OPERATOR'S MANUAL

MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY

Model TZT12F/TZT16F/TZT19F

[Link]
 7KHSDSHUXVHGLQWKLVPDQXDO
LVHOHPHQWDOFKORULQHIUHH

࣭)85812$XWKRUL]HG'LVWULEXWRU'HDOHU

$VKLKDUDFKR
1LVKLQRPL\D-$3$1

$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHG 3ULQWHGLQ-DSDQ $  $35  

3XE1R 20($
'$0, 7=7)7=7)7=7)


IMPORTANT NOTICES
General
• This manual has been authored with simplified grammar, to meet the needs of international users.
• The operator of this equipment must read and follow the instructions in this manual.
Wrong operation or maintenance can void the warranty or cause injury.
• Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO.
• If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
• The contents of this manual and the equipment specifications can change without notice.
• The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the screens you
see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system configuration and equipment
settings.
• Save this manual for future reference.
• Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by FURUNO will
void the warranty.
• The following concern acts as our importer in Europe, as defined in DECISION No 768/2008/EC.
- Name: FURUNO EUROPE B.V.
- Address: Ridderhaven 19B, 2984 BT Ridderkerk, The Netherlands
• All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks belong to
their respective holders.
How to discard this product
Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For disposal in
the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance ([Link] for the
correct method of disposal.
How to discard a used battery
Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery, see the chapter
on Maintenance. If a battery is used, tape the + and - terminals of the battery before disposal to pre-
vent fire, heat generation caused by short circuit.
In the European Union
The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of batteries must
not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash site. Take the used bat-
teries to a battery collection site according to your national legislation and
the Batteries Directive 2006/66/EU. Cd

In the USA
The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that Ni-Cd and
lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled. Take the used batter-
ies to a battery collection site according to local laws.
Ni-Cd Pb

In the other countries

There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols can in-
crease when the other countries make their own recycle symbols in the future.

i
 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Read these safety instructions before you operate the equipment.

Indicates a condition that can cause death or serious injury

WARNING if not avoided.

Indicates a condition that can cause minor or moderate

CAUTION injury if not avoided.

Warning, Caution Prohibitive Action Mandatory Action

WARNING
The radar antenna sends electromagnetic radio frequency (RF) energy. This
energy can be dangerous to you, especially your eyes. Do not look at the
radiator or near the antenna when the antenna is rotating.
The distances at which RF radiation levels of 100 W/m2 and 10 W/m2 exist are
shown in the table.

Antenna Distance to Distance to Antenna Distance to Distance to

Model 100 W/m2 point 10 W/m2 point Model 100 W/m2 point 10 W/m2 point
DRS2D N/A 0.4 DRS12A
0.2 m 2.4
DRS4A N/A 1.2 w/XN12A
DRS4D 0.1 m 1.4 DRS12A
0.2 m 1.9
DRS4D-NXT N/A 0.7 w/XN13A
DRS4DL N/A 1.1 DRS12A X-Class
w/XN12A 0.3 m 3.1
DRS4DL+ N/A 0.9
DRS6A N/A 1.2 DRS12A X-Class
w/XN13A 0.2 m 2.9
DRS6A-NXT N/A 0.7
DRS6A X-Class DRS25A
0.1 m 3 0.5 m 5.3
w/XN10A w/XN12A
DRS6A X-Class DRS25A
N/A 2.2 0.4 m 4.4
w/XN12A w/XN13A
DRS6A X-Class DRS25A X-Class
N/A 1.9 0.8 m 7.7
w/XN13A w/XN12A
DRS25A X-Class
0.7 m 6.8
w/XN13A

CAUTION
Check that no person is near the radar antenna before you turn on the radar.

Serious injury or death can occur if a person is hit by a rotating radar antenna.
Turn off the power immediately at the switchboard if water leaks into the
equipment or smoke or fire is coming from the equipment.

Failure to turn off the equipment can cause fire or electrical shock.
The front panel of the display unit is made of glass. Handle it with care.

Injury can result if the glass breaks.

Do not open the equipment.

Only qualified persons can work inside the equipment.

ii
 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING CAUTION
Keep units other than the radar The fish finder picture is not
antenna away from rain and refreshed when the picture
water. advance setting is “OFF”.

Fire or electrical shock can occur if Do not use high-pressure cleaners

water gets inside the equipment. to clean this equipment.

Do not disassemble or modify the This equipment has the waterproof

equipment. rating outlined in the specifications, at
the back of this manual. However, the
Fire or electrical shock can occur if use of high-pressure cleaning
the equipment is disassembled or equipment can cause water ingress,
modified. resulting in damage to, or failure of,
the equipment.
Do not operate the equipment with
wet hands.

Electrical shock can occur.

Do not depend on one navigation

device for the navigation of the
vessel.

Always check your position against

all available aids to navigation, for
the safety of vessel and crew.

A radar is an excellent
anti-collision aid, but remember
to keep watch for possible
collision conditions.

Always keep a watch while

underway.

Do not leave any objects near the

radar antenna.

Fire, electrical shock or injury can

result if something gets caught in the
radar antenna.

Use the correct fuse.

A wrong fuse can cause fire or

serious damage to the equipment.

Do not maneuver the vessel based

on the depth indication alone.

Grounding can occur.

iii
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

WARNING CAUTION
The ARPA function is a valuable aid The plotting accuracy and response of this
ARPA meets IMO standards. Tracking
to navigation. However, the naviga-
accuracy is affected by the following:
tor must check all aids available to
avoid collision. •
Tracking accuracy is affected by course
change. One to two minutes is required to
- The ARPA automatically tracks an restore vectors to full accuracy after an
automatically or manually acquired abrupt course change. (The actual amount
radar target and calculates its course depends on gyrocompass specifications.)
and speed, indicating them with a
vector. Since the data generated by •
The amount of tracking delay is inversely
the ARPA depends on the selected proportional to the relative speed of the
radar targets, the radar must be target. Delay is approx. 15-30 seconds for
optimally tuned for use with the the higher relative speed; approx. 30-60
ARPA, to ensure required targets will seconds for the lower relative speed. The
not be lost or unnecessary targets, following factors can affect accuracy:
like sea returns and noise, will not be - Echo intensity
acquired and tracked. - Radar transmission pulse length
- Radar bearing error
- A target is not always a landmass, - Gyrocompass error
reef, ship, but can also be returns - Course change (own ship and targets)
from the sea surface and from clutter.
As the level of clutter changes with
the environment, the operator must About the TFT LCD
correctly adjust the sea and rain
clutter controls and the gain control so The TFT LCD is constructed using the
that the target echoes do not dis- latest LCD techniques, and displays
appear from the radar screen. 99.99% of its pixels. The remaining
0.01% of the pixels may drop out or
Safety Labels blink, however this is not an indication of
malfunction.
A safety label is attached to the display unit. Do
not remove the label. If the label is missing or
damaged, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer
about replacement.

Name: Warning Label (2)

Type: 03-129-1001-3
Code No.: 100-236-743-10

iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD ................................................................................................................. xiv
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................... xvii

1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................1-1

1.1 Controls, Touchscreen Operations.............................................................................1-1
1.2 Remote Control Units (option) ....................................................................................1-5
1.2.1 Remote Control MCU-002..............................................................................1-5
1.2.2 Remote Control Unit MCU-004 ......................................................................1-6
1.2.3 Control Unit MCU-005 ....................................................................................1-8
1.2.4 Remote Control Unit group settings .............................................................1-10
1.3 How to Turn the Power On or Off .............................................................................1-12
1.4 How to Adjust the Brilliance of the Display and Hue ................................................1-13
1.5 Home Screen............................................................................................................1-15
1.6 How to Select a Display............................................................................................1-16
1.6.1 How to select a display from the Home screen ............................................1-16
1.6.2 How to select a display from the quick page ................................................1-17
1.7 How to Edit the Display Icons...................................................................................1-18
1.7.1 How to add a new display icon.....................................................................1-18
1.7.2 How to edit a display icon.............................................................................1-19
1.8 Edge Swipe Functions..............................................................................................1-20
1.9 Data Area .................................................................................................................1-22
1.9.1 How to change the order of the data ............................................................1-23
1.9.2 How to change the contents of a data box ...................................................1-23
1.9.3 How to add data to a data area ....................................................................1-24
1.9.4 How to delete a data box..............................................................................1-24
1.9.5 How to change the display method for the data in a data box .....................1-25
1.9.6 How to adjust the transparency of the data area..........................................1-25
1.9.7 How to display 3-axis speed from the SC-33/SCX-20..................................1-26
1.10 User Interface ...........................................................................................................1-27
1.11 MicroSD Cards .........................................................................................................1-28
1.12 Chart Plotter Introduction..........................................................................................1-30
1.13 Radar Introduction ....................................................................................................1-31
1.14 Sounder (Fish Finder) Introduction...........................................................................1-32
1.15 Settings Menu...........................................................................................................1-33
1.16 Two-Finger Tap Function .........................................................................................1-36
1.17 Language..................................................................................................................1-37
1.18 Man Overboard (MOB) .............................................................................................1-37
1.19 Wireless LAN Settings..............................................................................................1-39
1.19.1 How to connect the existing LAN .................................................................1-39
1.19.2 How to create a local wireless network ........................................................1-41
1.20 How to Create and Login to Your My TimeZero™ Account ......................................1-42
1.21 PIN Code Lock .........................................................................................................1-44

2. CHART PLOTTER .................................................................................................2-1

2.1 Chart Type..................................................................................................................2-1
2.2 Display Range ............................................................................................................2-2
2.3 Orientation Mode ........................................................................................................2-3
2.4 How to Move the Chart...............................................................................................2-3
2.5 The Boat Icon .............................................................................................................2-4
2.5.1 Description .....................................................................................................2-4
2.5.2 How to show or hide the COG vector, heading line .......................................2-4
2.5.3 COG vector length..........................................................................................2-5

v
TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.5.4 Boat icon orientation ...................................................................................... 2-6

2.6 How to Find Information Chart Object and Chart Information .................................... 2-6
2.6.1 Chart object information ................................................................................. 2-6
2.6.2 Chart information............................................................................................ 2-7
2.7 How to Find the Range and Bearing Between Two Locations................................... 2-8
2.8 Multiple Chart Plotter Displays ................................................................................... 2-9
2.9 Cartographic Text and Objects on Vector Charts .................................................... 2-10
2.9.1 Control visibility of text and object information in vector charts.................... 2-10
2.9.2 Control visibility of cartographic objects in S-52 charts................................ 2-11
2.10 Alarms ...................................................................................................................... 2-13
2.10.1 Cross Track Error alarm............................................................................... 2-14
2.10.2 Depth alarm.................................................................................................. 2-14
2.10.3 SST alarm .................................................................................................... 2-15
2.10.4 Speed alarm................................................................................................. 2-16
2.10.5 Anchor watch alarm ..................................................................................... 2-16
2.10.6 Wind speed alarm ........................................................................................ 2-17
2.10.7 Low fuel alarm.............................................................................................. 2-17
2.10.8 Other Alarm menu items .............................................................................. 2-17
2.10.9 Alarms list..................................................................................................... 2-18
2.11 Track ........................................................................................................................ 2-18
2.11.1 How to start, stop recording the track .......................................................... 2-18
2.11.2 How to show or hide the track display.......................................................... 2-19
2.11.3 Track recording interval................................................................................ 2-19
2.11.4 Track color ................................................................................................... 2-20
2.11.5 Track thickness ............................................................................................ 2-22
2.11.6 How to create a route with past track (follow track) ..................................... 2-22
2.11.7 How to create a route with track currently being recorded (track back) ....... 2-23
2.11.8 How to delete tracks..................................................................................... 2-24
2.11.9 How to find the number of track points used................................................ 2-24
2.12 Chart Plotter Menu ................................................................................................... 2-25
2.13 NAVpilot Series Auto Pilot........................................................................................ 2-26
2.13.1 How to enable use of the NAVpilot .............................................................. 2-26
2.13.2 How to show the NAVpilot control box in the data area ............................... 2-27
2.13.3 How to change the steering mode ............................................................... 2-28
2.13.4 How to change the NAVpilot settings........................................................... 2-30
2.14 My Friends (Social Network) .................................................................................... 2-31
2.14.1 How to setup My Friends ............................................................................. 2-31
2.14.2 How to show or hide the My Friends display................................................ 2-31
2.15 TZ iBoat Functions ................................................................................................... 2-32
2.16 Photos ...................................................................................................................... 2-32

3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS.....................................................................................3-1
3.1 3D Display..................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 How to activate the 3D display....................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 How to make the 3D view clearer .................................................................. 3-3
3.2 Overlays ..................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1 Depth shading overlay ................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.2 Satellite photo overlay.................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.3 Radar overlay................................................................................................. 3-6
3.2.4 Tide info overlay............................................................................................. 3-8
3.2.5 Tidal current overlay..................................................................................... 3-10

4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES ........................................................................................4-1

4.1 About Points & Event Marks ...................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 How to Enter Points, Event Marks ............................................................................. 4-2
4.2.1 How to enter a point (plotter and radar displays only).................................... 4-2

vi
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.2.2 How to enter an event mark ...........................................................................4-3

4.3 How to Display Point, Event Mark, Catch Information................................................4-5
4.4 How to Enter a Comment for an Event Mark..............................................................4-5
4.5 Default Point, Event Mark Settings.............................................................................4-6
4.5.1 Default point settings......................................................................................4-6
4.5.2 Default event mark settings ............................................................................4-7
4.6 How to Find Number of Points Used ..........................................................................4-8
4.7 Points List ...................................................................................................................4-9
4.7.1 How to show the Points list, process points ...................................................4-9
4.8 How to Move Points..................................................................................................4-11
4.8.1 How to move an on-screen point..................................................................4-11
4.8.2 How to move a point using the pop-up window ............................................4-12
4.8.3 How to move a point using the Points list.....................................................4-12
4.9 How to Delete Points ................................................................................................4-12
4.9.1 How to delete an on-screen point.................................................................4-12
4.9.2 How to delete a point from the Points list .....................................................4-12
4.9.3 How to delete all points ................................................................................4-12
4.10 How to Edit Points ....................................................................................................4-13
4.10.1 How to edit an on-screen point.....................................................................4-13
4.10.2 How to edit a point from the Points list .........................................................4-14
4.11 How to Move a Point to the Screen Center ..............................................................4-14
4.12 How to Show or Hide All Points, Points Names .......................................................4-14
4.13 How to set Point Naming Functions .........................................................................4-15
4.14 How to Set Point Density..........................................................................................4-15
4.15 How to Go to a Point ................................................................................................4-16
4.15.1 How to go to an on-screen point ..................................................................4-16
4.15.2 How to go to a position selected on screen..................................................4-17
4.15.3 How to go to a point selected from the Points list ........................................4-19
4.15.4 How to use the NAVpilot to steer to a point..................................................4-20
4.15.5 How to display the point information for the active Goto point .....................4-20
4.16 How to Restart or Cancel Navigation to a Point .......................................................4-21
4.16.1 How to restart navigation to a point..............................................................4-21
4.16.2 How to cancel navigation to a point..............................................................4-21
4.17 Boundaries ...............................................................................................................4-22
4.17.1 How to create a boundary ............................................................................4-22
4.17.2 How to show or hide all boundaries .............................................................4-23
4.17.3 How to set default boundary attributes .........................................................4-24
4.17.4 Boundaries list..............................................................................................4-25
4.17.5 How to edit an on-screen boundary .............................................................4-29
4.17.6 How to add a point to a boundary ................................................................4-30
4.17.7 How to move a point on a boundary.............................................................4-30
4.17.8 How to delete a point from a line or area boundary .....................................4-31
4.17.9 How to set an alarm for a boundary .............................................................4-31
4.17.10How to find the number of boundary points used.........................................4-32
4.17.11How to display a boundary at the screen center ..........................................4-32
4.17.12How to delete boundaries.............................................................................4-32

5. ROUTES ................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 What is a Route? ........................................................................................................5-1
5.2 How to Create a Route ...............................................................................................5-2
5.2.1 How to create a route by selecting positions ..................................................5-2
5.2.2 How to create a route with points ...................................................................5-3
5.2.3 How to create a route from the Points list ......................................................5-4
5.3 How to Edit a Route....................................................................................................5-4
5.3.1 How to insert a route point on a route ............................................................5-4
5.3.2 How to move a route point on a route ............................................................5-5

vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.3.3 How to delete a point (incl. route point) on a route ........................................ 5-5
5.3.4 How to extend a route .................................................................................... 5-5
5.4 Routes List ................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.5 How to Find Number of Routes Created .................................................................. 5-10
5.6 How to Find a Route on the Chart............................................................................ 5-10
5.7 How to Delete a Route ............................................................................................. 5-10
5.7.1 How to delete a route on the screen ............................................................ 5-10
5.7.2 How to delete a route from the Routes list ................................................... 5-10
5.7.3 How to delete all routes................................................................................ 5-11
5.8 How to Show or Hide All Routes .............................................................................. 5-11
5.9 How to Set Route Density ........................................................................................ 5-11
5.10 How to Follow a Route ............................................................................................. 5-12
5.10.1 How to follow an on-screen route................................................................. 5-12
5.10.2 How to follow a route selected from the Routes list ..................................... 5-13
5.10.3 How to start navigation from a route point ................................................... 5-13
5.10.4 How to show the detailed information about a route .................................... 5-14
5.11 Operations Available When You Follow a Route ..................................................... 5-15
5.11.1 How to restart navigation ............................................................................. 5-15
5.11.2 How to follow a route in the reverse direction .............................................. 5-15
5.11.3 How to stop following a route ....................................................................... 5-15
5.11.4 How to skip a point on a route...................................................................... 5-16
5.11.5 Waypoint switching mode ............................................................................ 5-16
5.11.6 How to automatically zoom a route .............................................................. 5-16
5.11.7 XTE lines...................................................................................................... 5-17
5.11.8 Waypoint arrival notification ......................................................................... 5-17
5.11.9 End of route notification ............................................................................... 5-17
5.11.10How stop continue navigation at end of route .............................................. 5-17
5.11.11Steering a route with the NAVpilot ............................................................... 5-18
5.12 SAR Operations ....................................................................................................... 5-19
5.13 Fuel Level Indicators ................................................................................................ 5-21
5.14 Laylines .................................................................................................................... 5-22
5.14.1 How to enable/disable the layline feature .................................................... 5-22
5.14.2 How to show layline data in the data area ................................................... 5-22
5.14.3 How to change the polar wind file ................................................................ 5-23
5.15 Routes Menu............................................................................................................ 5-24

6. RADAR...................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 How to Transmit, Set the Radar in Stand-by.............................................................. 6-1
6.2 Tuning ........................................................................................................................ 6-1
6.3 How to Adjust the Gain .............................................................................................. 6-2
6.4 How to Reduce the Sea Clutter.................................................................................. 6-4
6.5 How to Reduce the Rain Clutter................................................................................. 6-4
6.6 Range Scale............................................................................................................... 6-5
6.7 Orientation Mode........................................................................................................ 6-5
6.8 How to Measure the Range and Bearing from Your Ship to a Target........................ 6-6
6.8.1 How to display the range rings....................................................................... 6-6
6.8.2 How to set the number of the range rings to show......................................... 6-7
6.8.3 How to select the range rings mode............................................................... 6-7
6.8.4 How to measure the range and bearing to an object ..................................... 6-8
6.8.5 How to measure the range with the VRM ...................................................... 6-9
6.8.6 How to measure the bearing with the EBL................................................... 6-11
6.8.7 How to select the EBL reference.................................................................. 6-12
6.9 How to Measure the Range and Bearing Between Two Targets ............................. 6-13
6.10 How to Off-center the Picture................................................................................... 6-13
6.11 Heading Line ............................................................................................................ 6-14
6.12 How to Reduce Radar Interference.......................................................................... 6-14

viii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.13 Echo Average ...........................................................................................................6-15

6.14 Guard Zone ..............................................................................................................6-15
6.14.1 How to set a guard zone ..............................................................................6-15
6.14.2 How to activate or deactivate a guard zone .................................................6-16
6.14.3 How to hide a guard zone ............................................................................6-16
6.15 Watchman ................................................................................................................6-17
6.16 Echo Trail .................................................................................................................6-18
6.16.1 How to show, hide echo trails.......................................................................6-18
6.16.2 How to clear echo trails ................................................................................6-18
6.16.3 How to select echo trail length .....................................................................6-18
6.16.4 How to select the echo trail mode (reference)..............................................6-19
6.16.5 How to select echo trail color .......................................................................6-19
6.16.6 How to select echo trail shading...................................................................6-20
6.17 How to Show, Hide or Cancel an Active Route ........................................................6-20
6.18 How to Show or Hide the Own Ship Icon .................................................................6-20
6.19 Echo Color................................................................................................................6-21
6.20 Background Color.....................................................................................................6-21
6.21 Dual-Range Display..................................................................................................6-22
6.22 Bird Mode .................................................................................................................6-23
6.23 Target Analyzer ........................................................................................................6-24
6.24 Connecting With FAR-2xx7/FAR-15xx Series Marine Radars .................................6-27
6.25 RezBoost ..................................................................................................................6-28
6.26 Radar Menu..............................................................................................................6-29
6.27 How to Interpret the Radar Display ..........................................................................6-30
6.27.1 False echoes ................................................................................................6-30
6.27.2 Search and rescue transponder (SART) ......................................................6-32
6.27.3 RACON (Radar Beacon) ..............................................................................6-33
6.28 ARPA Operation .......................................................................................................6-34
6.28.1 How to show or hide the ARPA display ........................................................6-34
6.28.2 How to manually acquire a target.................................................................6-35
6.28.3 How to automatically acquire a target ..........................................................6-35
6.28.4 How to automatically acquire targets by Doppler .........................................6-36
6.28.5 How to display target data............................................................................6-36
6.28.6 How to stop tracking targets .........................................................................6-37
6.28.7 ARPA list ......................................................................................................6-37
6.28.8 How to clear lost targets ...............................................................................6-38
6.28.9 CPA/TCPA alarm .........................................................................................6-39
6.28.10CPA graphic display .....................................................................................6-40

7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER) ...................................................................................7-1

7.1 How the Fish Finder Operates....................................................................................7-1
7.2 How to Transmit, Go to Stand-by ...............................................................................7-2
7.3 How to Select a Display..............................................................................................7-2
7.3.1 Single frequency display ................................................................................7-2
7.3.2 Dual frequency display ...................................................................................7-3
7.3.3 Zoom displays ................................................................................................7-4
7.3.4 A-scope display (display only) ........................................................................7-5
7.3.5 Bottom discrimination display .........................................................................7-6
7.4 How to Select the Range............................................................................................7-7
7.5 How to Adjust the Gain...............................................................................................7-7
7.5.1 Automatic gain adjustment .............................................................................7-7
7.5.2 Manual gain adjustment .................................................................................7-8
7.6 How to Reduce Clutter ...............................................................................................7-9
7.7 Picture Advance Speed ............................................................................................7-10
7.8 How to Reduce Interference.....................................................................................7-11
7.9 How to Erase Unnecessary Echoes .........................................................................7-11

ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS

7.10 How to Measure Range, Depth to an Object ........................................................... 7-12

7.11 Echo History Display ................................................................................................ 7-12
7.12 How to Balance Echo Strength ................................................................................ 7-13
7.13 Fish Finder Alarms ................................................................................................... 7-14
7.13.1 How to set an alarm ..................................................................................... 7-14
7.13.2 How to activate or deactivate an alarm ........................................................ 7-15
7.13.3 Alarm sensitivity ........................................................................................... 7-15
7.14 ACCU-FISH™ ........................................................................................................... 7-16
7.14.1 How to set ACCU-FISH™ ............................................................................. 7-16
7.14.2 Fish size correction ...................................................................................... 7-17
7.14.3 How to turn the fish symbol indication on or off ........................................... 7-17
7.14.4 How to display the fish information .............................................................. 7-17
7.14.5 How to set the minimum size of ACCU-FISH™ symbols ............................. 7-17
7.15 RezBoost™ ............................................................................................................... 7-18
7.16 White Edge............................................................................................................... 7-18
7.17 Temperature Graph.................................................................................................. 7-19
7.18 Preset Frequency with Fish Finder Power Amplifier DI-FFAMP .............................. 7-20
7.19 Fish Finder Menu .................................................................................................... 7-21
7.20 Interpreting the Display ............................................................................................ 7-25

8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D .............................................................................8-1

8.1 Display Screens Overview ......................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Multi-Sounder Display Operations ............................................................................. 8-4
8.2.1 How to switch between TX and STBY ........................................................... 8-4
8.2.2 How to switch between single beam and triple beam presentations.............. 8-4
8.2.3 How to set the TX beam angle....................................................................... 8-4
8.2.4 How to set the TX beam width ....................................................................... 8-4
8.2.5 How to show or hide the depth and frequency indications............................. 8-5
8.2.6 Availability of points and event marks registration, and go to a point ............ 8-5
8.3 Side Scan Display Operations ................................................................................... 8-6
8.3.1 How to switch between TX and STBY ........................................................... 8-6
8.3.2 How to change echo color.............................................................................. 8-6
8.3.3 How to show or hide the depth and frequency indications............................. 8-6
8.3.4 Availability of points and event marks registration, and go to a point ............ 8-7
8.4 Cross Section Display Operations ............................................................................. 8-7
8.4.1 How to switch between TX and STBY ........................................................... 8-7
8.4.2 How to show or hide the grid.......................................................................... 8-8
8.4.3 Zoom display.................................................................................................. 8-8
8.4.4 How to smooth echoes (distance).................................................................. 8-8
8.4.5 How to smooth echoes (time) ........................................................................ 8-8
8.4.6 How to apply correction to the speed of sound .............................................. 8-9
8.4.7 How to show or hide the depth and frequency indications............................. 8-9
8.4.8 Availability of points and event marks registration, and go to a point ............ 8-9
8.5 3D Sounder History Display Operations .................................................................. 8-10
8.5.1 How to switch between TX and STBY ......................................................... 8-10
8.5.2 How to move, zoom in, zoom out the viewpoint position ............................. 8-10
8.5.3 How to mark school of fish ........................................................................... 8-11
8.5.4 How to stop advancement of the display ..................................................... 8-11
8.5.5 How to adjust the echo detection level......................................................... 8-11
8.5.6 How to calibrate the seabed echo................................................................ 8-11
8.5.7 How to use the noise filter............................................................................ 8-11
8.5.8 How to use terrain shading .......................................................................... 8-12
8.5.9 Depth/Color Shading display........................................................................ 8-12
8.5.10 How to show or hide the depth and frequency indications........................... 8-15
8.5.11 Availability of points and event marks registration, and go to a point .......... 8-15

x
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

9. FILE OPERATIONS ...............................................................................................9-1

9.1 File Format .................................................................................................................9-1
9.2 How to Export User Objects .......................................................................................9-2
9.3 How to Import User Objects .......................................................................................9-2
9.4 How to Export, Import Track.......................................................................................9-3
9.5 How to Backup the Equipment Settings .....................................................................9-4
9.6 How to Load the Equipment Settings .........................................................................9-4
9.7 My TimeZero Cloud Data Service ..............................................................................9-5
9.7.1 How to save settings/data to the cloud...........................................................9-5
9.7.2 How to retrieve settings/data from the cloud ..................................................9-5

10. CAMERA/VIDEO/EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT.......................................................10-1

10.1 How to Display a Video Image .................................................................................10-1
10.2 Video Signal Types...................................................................................................10-2
10.3 How to Set the Camera Display ...............................................................................10-3
10.3.1 How to set the video signal ..........................................................................10-3
10.3.2 How to switch your video inputs ...................................................................10-7
10.3.3 How to adjust the image size .......................................................................10-7
10.3.4 How to adjust the video image .....................................................................10-7
10.4 Control of FLIR Camera ...........................................................................................10-7
10.5 Tracking Active Waypoint, MOB...............................................................................10-9
10.6 Operating External Equipment .................................................................................10-9

11. FUSION-Link .......................................................................................................11-1

11.1 FUSION Display .......................................................................................................11-1
11.2 FUSION Operation Bar.............................................................................................11-4
11.3 FUSION Settings ......................................................................................................11-5

12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS.................................................................12-1

12.1 How to Show the Instrument Display........................................................................12-1
12.2 Instrument Displays ..................................................................................................12-2
12.2.1 Full-screen instrument displays ....................................................................12-2
12.2.2 Three-way, four-way split screen instrument display ...................................12-6
12.2.3 How to switch between instrument displays ...............................................12-10
12.3 How to Edit the Instrument Displays.......................................................................12-11
12.3.1 How to prepare for editing ..........................................................................12-11
12.3.2 How to rearrange the indications in an instrument display .........................12-11
12.3.3 How to edit, remove an indication in an instrument display .......................12-12
12.3.4 How to add an indication to an instrument display .....................................12-14
12.3.5 How to rename an instrument display ........................................................12-14
12.3.6 How to remove an instrument display ........................................................12-14
12.3.7 How to add an instrument display ..............................................................12-15
12.3.8 SC-33/SCX-20 3-axis speed display ..........................................................12-15
12.4 Instrument Theme ..................................................................................................12-16
12.5 Fuel Management System......................................................................................12-16
12.5.1 How to manually enter fuel tank capacity ...................................................12-16
12.5.2 How to check remaining fuel amount .........................................................12-17
12.6 CZone.....................................................................................................................12-18
12.6.1 How to use CZone......................................................................................12-18
12.6.2 CZone control.............................................................................................12-19
12.6.3 CZone modes.............................................................................................12-21
12.6.4 CZone monitoring.......................................................................................12-24
12.7 Yamaha Engine Status Display ..............................................................................12-26
12.7.1 How to show the display.............................................................................12-26
12.7.2 Display examples .......................................................................................12-27
12.7.3 How to switch between displays.................................................................12-28

xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS

12.7.4 How to select the data to display in a data box.......................................... 12-28

12.7.5 Troll mode .................................................................................................. 12-29
12.7.6 Trouble codes ............................................................................................ 12-30
12.7.7 Alarm list .................................................................................................... 12-30

13. WEATHER OPERATIONS...................................................................................13-1

13.1 Weather Display Introduction ................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 NavCenter Weather ................................................................................................. 13-2
13.2.1 How to set up for NavCenter weather .......................................................... 13-2
13.2.2 How to download the NavCenter weather data............................................ 13-3
13.2.3 How to display the NavCenter weather data................................................ 13-4
13.2.4 How to load a weather file............................................................................ 13-6
13.3 SiriusXM Weather .................................................................................................... 13-6
13.3.1 How to set up for SiriusXM weather............................................................. 13-7
13.3.2 How to display the SiriusXM weather data................................................... 13-8
13.4 Weather Icons (SiriusXM Weather).......................................................................... 13-9
13.5 Weather Data (NavCenter or SiriusXM Weather) .................................................. 13-10
13.6 SiriusXM Weather Diagnostics............................................................................... 13-13
13.7 SiriusXM Satellite Radio......................................................................................... 13-14
13.7.1 How to enable the radio ............................................................................. 13-14
13.7.2 How to operate the radio controls .............................................................. 13-15
13.7.3 Radio diagnostics....................................................................................... 13-16

14. AIS, DSC MESSAGE ...........................................................................................14-1

14.1 What is AIS? ............................................................................................................ 14-1
14.2 How to Show or Hide the AIS Symbols.................................................................... 14-1
14.3 AIS Target Symbols ................................................................................................. 14-1
14.4 Proximity AIS Target Alarm...................................................................................... 14-3
14.5 How to Ignore Slow Moving AIS Targets ................................................................. 14-3
14.6 How to Display AIS Safety Messages...................................................................... 14-3
14.7 How to Display AIS Target Data .............................................................................. 14-4
14.8 How to Show or Hide the Target IDs........................................................................ 14-4
14.9 AIS List..................................................................................................................... 14-5
14.10AIS SART ................................................................................................................ 14-6
14.11CPA/TCPA Alarm .................................................................................................... 14-7
14.12How to Register an AIS or DSC Target to the Buddies List .................................... 14-8
14.13CPA Graphic Display............................................................................................... 14-9
14.14AIS Transponder FA-30, FA-50............................................................................. 14-10
14.15DSC Message Information .................................................................................... 14-11
14.15.1DSC distress message............................................................................... 14-11
14.15.2How to set a DSC marker as destination ................................................... 14-11
14.15.3How to display DSC marker information .................................................... 14-11
14.15.4The DSC list ............................................................................................... 14-12

15. OTHER FUNCTIONS ...........................................................................................15-1

15.1 General Menu .......................................................................................................... 15-1
15.2 Units Menu ............................................................................................................... 15-3
15.3 Initial Setup Menu .................................................................................................... 15-5
15.4 Facsimile Receiver FAX-30.................................................................................... 15-11
15.5 How to Check for Software Updates ...................................................................... 15-12
15.6 How to Manage Your Charts.................................................................................. 15-13
15.6.1 How to view your charts ............................................................................. 15-13
15.6.2 How to update or add charts ...................................................................... 15-14
15.6.3 How to delete charts .................................................................................. 15-15

xii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

16. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................16-1

16.1 Maintenance .............................................................................................................16-1
16.2 Fuse Replacement ...................................................................................................16-2
16.3 Life of Parts ..............................................................................................................16-2
16.4 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................16-3
16.4.1 General troubleshooting ...............................................................................16-3
16.4.2 Plotter troubleshooting .................................................................................16-4
16.4.3 Radar troubleshooting ..................................................................................16-4
16.4.4 Fish finder troubleshooting ...........................................................................16-5

APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE .......................................................................................AP-1

APPENDIX 2 TRANSDUCER LIST ........................................................................AP-15
APPENDIX 3 ALERT MESSAGES .........................................................................AP-18
APPENDIX 4 RADIO REGULATORY INFORMATION ..........................................AP-24
SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................... SP-1
INDEX ......................................................................................................................... IN-1

xiii
FOREWORD
A Word to the Owner
Congratulations on your choice of Multi Function Display, a member of the NavNet TZtouch3 fam-
ily of multi-function displays. We are confident you will see why the FURUNO name has become
synonymous with quality and reliability.

Since 1948, FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative and
dependable marine electronics equipment. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our ex-
tensive global network of agents and dealers.

Your equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine envi-
ronment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless properly installed and
maintained. Please carefully read and follow the operation and maintenance procedures set forth
in this manual.

We would appreciate feedback from you, the end-user, about whether we are achieving our goal.

Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO.

Features
The NavNet TZtouch3, equipped with a touch screen with multi touch capacity, is a networked
navigation system that gives you functions such as radar, chart plotter, fish finder and AIS. Infor-
mation is transferred between NavNet TZtouch3 units through Ethernet or NMEA 2000. The plug-
and-play format allows expansion and you can connect a maximum of six NavNet TZtouch3 units.
Also, you can control the NavNet TZtouch3 units and display their data on an iOS or Android™
device.

Main features
• Intuitive touch control operation.
• The NavNet TZtouch3 units can be controlled and monitored from the following applications*.
Application* Capability iOS Android TM
NavNet Remote Monitor or operate iPad only 7 inch or larger
NavNet TZtouch3
Monitor NavNet TZ- Other than iPad 7 inch or larger
touch3
NavNet Viewer Display nav data, Yes Yes
fish finder picture.
NavNet Controller Remote control of Yes Yes
NavNet TZtouch3.

* Check compatibility with your OS version in the respective store before downloading. Applica-
tions are available from the App Store (iOS) or Google Play™ (Android) at no cost.
• Instrument display provides comprehensive navigation data with connection of appropriate sen-
sors.
• Points (waypoints) and routes can be transferred and shared between NavNet TZtouch3 units,
via Ethernet.
• Large memory stores 30,000 Track Points, 30,000 Points, 200 Routes, 200 Boundaries, 1000
Photos, and 1000 Catches.

xiv
 FOREWORD

• Able to write and read data (points, routes, tracks, etc.) using a micro SD card.
• Built in GPS receiver and antenna. (TZT12F/TZT16F only)
• AIS function (requires connection of AIS transponder) receives AIS data from AIS equipped
vessels, shore stations and navigational aids and displays relevant data.
• Built in fish finder available with single or dual frequency transducer.
• ACCU-FISH™ provides at-a-glance estimation of length and depth of individual fish. (Requires
ACCU-FISH™ capable transducer.)
• Bottom discrimination display helps identify probable bottom composition with graphics and col-
ors. (Requires bottom discrimination display capable transducer.)
• RezBoost™ raises echo resolution to see fish echoes clearly. (Requires RezBoost™ capable
transducer. Not available when the transducer is installed with the inside hull installation meth-
od.)
• CHIRP transducer provides high resolution, low-noise pictures of underwater conditions.
• Dual-range radar display for watch on short and long distances at the same time.
• DSC (Digital Selective Calling) message information feature provides the MMSI no. and posi-
tion of vessels that have transmitted a DSC message to you. (Requires DSC capable radiotele-
phone.)
• Control audio of FUSION-Link™ equipment.
• HDMI output (type A receptacle).
• Monitoring of the inside/outside of your ship via analog camera (FLIR™, AXIS™).
• Monitoring around the vessel with pan-tilt-zoom capable (PTZ) cameras (FLIR™, AXIS™).
• HDMI input and USB touch output for control of external application. (TZT16F, TZT19F)

Software used in this product

This equipment uses the following open source software.

• Ubiquitous QuickBoot Copyright© Ubiquitous Corp. All rights reserved.

• This product includes software to be licensed under the GNU General Public License (GPL) ver-
sion 2.0, GNU Lesser General Public Software License (LGPL) version 2.0, Apache, BSD and
others. The program(s) is/are free software(s), and you can copy it and/or redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GPL version 2.0 or LGPL version 2.0 as published by the Free
Software Foundation. Please access to the following URL if you need source codes: https://
[Link]/contact/cnt_oss01.html.

Program no.
System: 1950212-01.**
Application: 1950213-01.**
** denotes minor modifications.

CE declaration
With regards to CE declarations, please refer to our website ([Link]), for further infor-
mation about RoHS conformity declarations.

xv
FOREWORD

Standards used in this manual

• Key names are shown in boldface type. For example, ENT key (on the MCU-002, MCU-004 or
MCU-005).
• Menu items, on-screen indications, and the names of pop-up menus and pop-up windows are
shown in brackets. For example, the [Settings] menu.
• Messages shown on the screen (including the Status bar) are enclosed in quotations. For ex-
ample, "No Network Connected".
• The [Settings] menu is comprised of several sub menus. When you are asked to select one of
its sub menus, "[Settings]" is followed by a hyphen and the sub menu name. For example, "Tap
[Settings]→[General]”.
• The colors mentioned in this manual are the default colors. Your colors may be different.
• Most of the screenshots in this manual are taken from the TZT19F. Layouts may be slightly dif-
ferent on your unit.

xvi
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
TZT12F System configuration
Radar Sensor (Open)
Radar Sensor (Radome) DRS6A X-Class/DRS12A X-Class/DRS25A X-Class
DRS4DL/DRS4DL+/DRS4D-NXT DRS6A-NXT/DRS12A-NXT DRS25A-NXT

Select an antenna type:

DC12-24V Radome or Open.

DC24V
FAR-2xx7/2xx8 series
FAR-15x3/15x8 series
BBDS1, DFF series
Multi-beam Sonar DFF-3D
Ethernet FA-30/50
Hub*2
HUB-101 FAX-30
: Standard supply IP Camera
: Optional/local supply FUSION-Link compatible devices

Control Unit MCU-005 PoE Hub*3

Control Unit
FA-40/70 USB Hub MCU-002/MCU-004 or
Autopilot SD Card Unit SDU-001
NAVpilot-300/ Touch Monitor*4
NAVpilot-711C Junction (HDMI Output)
Box
SCX-20 CCD Camera
FI-5002 Multi Function
SC-30/33 Display CCD Camera
GP-330B TZT12F*1
Event Switch
FI-50/70 External Buzzer
Power Switch
IF-NMEA2K2
NMEA0183 Output
IF-NMEAFI
Ship’s main
Fish Finder
12 to 24V DC
Category of units Power Amplifier
Antenna unit: Exposed to the weather. Transducer*5 or DI-FFAMP
Other units: Protected from the weather.
Transducer
*1: This unit has a built-in fish finder as standard.
*2: A maximum of 6 units of NavNet TZtouch2/3 can be connected. NavNet TZtouch2 requires software
version 7, which is to be released in Spring 2020. For configurations with TZT2BB included, a
maximum of 4 NavNet TZtouch2/3 units can be connected. NavNet TZtouch cannot be connected.
*3: Use a commercially available PoE hub. "GS108PE" of NETGEAR has tested compatible.
The basic functions of the hub were verified, however the compatibility of all functions were not
checked. FURUNO cannot guarantee proper operation.
*4: The HDMI output resolution is fixed to 1280×800. To use a touch monitor for operation, its
resolution must be 1280×800 (Aspect ratio 16:9) and with HPD (Hot Plug Detection) function.
*5: Some transducers require connection of 12-10 pin conversion cable.

xvii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

TZT16F/19F System configuration

Radar Sensor (Open)

Radar Sensor (Radome) DRS6A X-Class/DRS12A X-Class/DRS25A X-Class
DRS4DL/DRS4DL+/DRS4D-NXT DRS6A-NXT/DRS12A-NXT DRS25A-NXT

Select an antenna type:

DC12-24V Radome or Open.

DC24V
FAR-2xx7/2xx8 series
FAR-15x3/15x8 series
BBDS1, DFF series
Multi-beam Sonar DFF-3D
Ethernet FA-30/50
: Standard supply Hub*2
: Optional/local supply HUB-101 FAX-30
IP Camera
FUSION-Link compatible devices

HDMI Source Devices

Control Unit MCU-005 PoE Hub* 3 USB Host/Devices*4
Control Unit
FA-40/70
USB Hub MCU-002/MCU-004 or
Autopilot SD Card Unit SDU-001
NAVpilot-300/ Touch Monitor*5
NAVpilot-711C Junction (HDMI Output)
Box
SCX-20 CCD Camera
FI-5002 Multi Function
SC-30/33 Display*1 CCD Camera
GP-330B TZT16F/19F
Event Switch
FI-50/70 External Buzzer
Power Switch
IF-NMEA2K2
NMEA0183 Output
IF-NMEAFI
Ship’s main
Fish Finder
12 to 24V DC
Category of units Power Amplifier
Antenna unit: Exposed to the weather. Transducer*6 or DI-FFAMP
Other units: Protected from the weather.
*1: This unit has a built-in fish finder as standard. Transducer
2
* : A maximum of 6 units of NavNet TZtouch2/3 can be connected. NavNet TZtouch2 requires software
version 7 or later. For configurations with TZT2BB included, a maximum of 4 NavNet TZtouch2/3
units can be connected. NavNet TZtouch cannot be connected.
*3: Use a commercially available PoE hub. The NETGEAR GS108PE has tested as compatible.
The basic functions of the hub were verified, however the compatibility of all functions were not
checked. FURUNO cannot guarantee proper operation.
*4: When using a USB OTG as a USB host device, this equipment operates as a touch operation
output device.
*5: The HDMI output resolution is fixed to 1920x1080. To use a touch monitor for operation, its output
resolution must be 1920x1080 (Aspect ratio 16:9) with HPD (Hot Plug Detection) function.
*6: Some transducers require connection of a 12-to-10 pin conversion cable.

xviii
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.1 Controls, Touchscreen Operations

The multi function display unit is operated with a touchscreen and keys (TZT12F only).
An optional remote controller also controls operations.

Control description
TZT12F

8 7

9
6

5 4

Front 2 1 Rear

No. Item Function

1 • Short push: Turns the power on. With the unit powered, the
[Quick Access] window appears.
(Power switch) [Quick Access] window
• Toggles radar, fish finder, multibeam sonar, and NavPilot be-
tween transmit and stand-by.
• Adjust the brilliance and hue of the display.
• Turns the power off (device or network).
• Locks, unlocks the touchscreen.
2 FUNC key • Short push: Performs the task assigned to the “two finger tap
function”
• Long push: Performs the task assigned to the “two finger long
tap function”
3 CursorPad Moves the cursor.
4 Center/ESC key • Centers own ship icon.
• Returns to previous menu.
• Disables the fish finder’s scrollback function.
• Undoes current operation.
5 Display Switching • Short push: Switches the active display in split-screen display.
key • Long push: Switches between the active split-screen display
and full-screen display.
6 RotoKey™ • Push: Selects cursor position (pop-up menu appears). Also,
confirms selected item.
• Rotate: Selects the range on the plotter, radar and fish finder dis-
plays. Also, selects menu items.

1-1
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

No. Item Function

7 Event/MOB key • Short push: Creates an event mark at the boat's location.
• Long push: Creates an MOB at the boat's location.
8 Home key • Short push: Opens the Home screen.
• Long push: Opens the [Settings] menu.
9 Micro SD card slot Slot for chart card, and memory card (storing track, routes, points,
setting data).

TZT16F/19F

The touch switch on the front panel controls power and brilliance. The rear panel con-
tains a micro SD card slot.

Front Rear
TZT16F

Front Rear
TZT19F

No. Item Function

1 • Short push: Turns the power on. With the unit powered, the
[Quick Access] window appears.
(Power switch) [Quick Access] window
• Toggles radar, fish finder, multibeam sonar, NavPilot. between
transmit and stand-by.
• Adjust the brilliance, hue and day/night mode of the display.
• Turns the power off (device or network).
• Locks, unlocks the touchscreen.
2 Micro SD card slot Slot for chart card, and memory card (storing track, routes, points,
setting data).

Soft cover
The soft cover protects the LCD when the display unit
is not in use. To remove the cover, grasp the cover at
the locations circled in the figure at right and pull for-
ward.

1-2
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

Touchscreen operations
The tables which follow outline the touchscreen operations.

Operations with a finger

Operation with a finger Function
Tap • Select a menu item.
• Select an object or position to display the cor-
responding pop-up menu.
Long • Edit display icon (on Home screen).
tap

Drag • Pan the charts.

• Scroll the menu.
Swipe • Show the [Slide-out] menu, [Layers] menu
([Link] 1.8).

Operations with two fingers

Operation with two fingers Function
Pinch • Zoom in or out the display range in the 2D/
3D modes or weather display.
• Select radar range on the radar display.

Zoom in Zoom out

Drag Change 3D viewing point.

Tap Do the function assigned to [Two Finger Tap

Function], which is in the ([Settings]→[Gener-
al] menu. See section 1.16.

Long Do the function assigned to [Two Finger Long

tap Tap Function], which is in the ([Settings]→
[General] menu. See section 1.16.

1-3
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

Notes on touchscreen operations

• Waterdrops on the screen can cause mis-operation and slow touch response. Wipe
the screen with a dry cloth to remove the water.
• This equipment uses a capacitive touch screen. Tap the screen with your fingertips
directly. Do not use sharp objects (needle, pen, nail) or a stylus pen. Be careful not
to scratch the screen.
• Touchscreen may be reduced when wearing gloves.
• Do not put objects (adhesive-backed paper, etc.) on the screen. Mis-operation can
result.
• Keep the equipment away from radio antennas, fluorescent lights, solenoid valves
and electronic devices to prevent unintended operation cause by electrical noise.
• The front panel is made of glass. If the front panel is damaged, do not try to repair
it yourself. Unauthorized repair will void the warranty. Contact your dealer about re-
pair or replacement.
• The touch screen can be locked to prevent operation of the equipment. See the pro-
cedure below.

How to lock the touch screen

The touch screen can be locked to prevent unintentional operation.

With the power applied, press to show the [Quick Access] window. Tap the [Touch
Screen] icon.

DRS6A_X-CLASS BBDS1

Touch Screen

Device Network

When the screen is locked, a small padlock-shaped icon appears at the [Home] button
position, at the top-left of the screen, as shown in the figure below.

Home Home
Locked Unlocked

1-4
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.2 Remote Control Units (option)

The Remote Control Units let you operate the system without touching the screen.
When the power is applied and a Remote Control Unit is connected, an orange cursor
(selection cursor) marks current selection in menus.

1.2.1 Remote Control MCU-002

No. Key Function
1 STBY•AUTO Switches the steering mode of the FURUNO
key NAVpilot series Autopilot between the Stand-
by and AUTO modes. When switching occurs,
1 2 3 a beep sounds* and a message informs you of
Navpilot mode change.
• Stand-by mode→AUTO mode: "Navpilot
Engaged".
• AUTO mode→Stand-by mode: "Navpilot
Disengaged".
4 2 CENTER key • Returns own ship to the center of the
screen (Plotter/Weather/Radar display).
• Cancels the echo history (Fish finder dis-
5 play).
6 3 CURS•SCRL Switches the joystick gesture between the
key cursor mode and scroll mode.
7
8 9 4 Joystick Short push: Works the same as tap gesture.
• Opens the pop-up menu.
• Activates the item selected by the cursor.
Long push: Works the same as long tap ges-
ture.
• Enables editing of display icons.
Joystick operation:
Cursor mode operation:
• Moves the cursor.
Scroll mode operation:
• Pans the display (Plotter/Weather/Radar
display).
• Shifts the range and scrolls back the picture
(Fish finder display).

No. Key Function

5 +, - key • Selects an item from the slide-out/main/pop-up menu.
• Zooms in (+) and out (-).
6 ENT key • Activates selected item.
• Press ENT key followed by joystick operation: Opens [Layers] menu,
Quick Page, Slide-out menu, Data Area.

䞉Opens Layers menu 䞉Opens Quick Page

ENT
ENT
Push Push

䞉Opens Slide-out 䞉Opens Data Area

ENT
ENT
Push Push

1-5
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

No. Key Function

7 CANCEL/MOB Short push:
key • Closes the menu or dialog box.
• Stops the aural alarm.
• Ends the tool mode (End Route, End Move, etc.).
Long push:
• Enters the MOB mark (at the own ship’s position).
8 FUNC key • Short push: Does the task assigned to the “two finger tap function”
• Long push: Does the task assigned to the “two finger long tap function”
9 HOME/BRILL Short push: Shows the Home screen.
key Long push: Opens the [Quick Access] window.

* The beep sound can be turned on or off with [Notify when NAVpilot is engaged] in
the menu. See section 2.10.8.

1.2.2 Remote Control Unit MCU-004

No. Key Function
1 STBY•AUTO Switches the steering mode of the FURUNO
key NAVpilot series Autopilot between the Stand-by
and AUTO modes. When switching occurs, a
beep sounds* and a message informs you of
Navpilot mode change.
1 2 • Stand-by mode→AUTO mode: "Navpilot
STBY HOME
•
AUTO BRILL
Engaged".
3 4
• AUTO mode→Stand-by mode: "Navpilot
FUNC Disengaged".
2 HOME/BRILL • Short push: Opens the Home screen.
key • Long push: Opens the Brilliance/Power win-
5 6
CURS
• CENTER dow.
SCRL
3 CONTROL Switches between displays that can be con-
7 key trolled with the MCU-004 when multiple displays
are installed in the same network.
8 4 FUNC key • Short push: Performs the task assigned to
the “two finger tap function”
• Long push: Performs the task assigned to
9 10
the “two finger long tap function”
CANCEL
MOB
5 CURS•SCRL Switches the function of the joystick between
key the Cursor and Scroll modes.
6 CENTER key • Returns own ship to center of screen (Plotter/
Weather/Radar display).
• Cancels the echo history (Fish finder display).
7 Rotary knob • Selects an item from the [Slide] menu, [Set-
tings] menu, pop-up menu.
• Zooms in/out.

1-6
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

No. Key Function

8 Joystick Short push: Works same as tap gesture.
• Opens the pop-up menu.
• Activates the item selected by the cursor.
Long push: Works same as long tap gesture.
• Enables editing of display icons.
Joystick operation:
Cursor mode operation: Moves the cursor.
Scroll mode operation:
• Pans the display (Plotter/Weather/Radar display).
• Shifts the range and scrolls back the picture (Fish finder display).
9 EDGE key • Activates selected item.
• Press ENT key followed by joystick operation: Opens [Layers]
menu, Quick Page, Slide-out menu, Data Area.

䞉Opens Layers menu 䞉Opens Quick Page

Push Push

䞉Opens Slide-out menu 䞉Opens Data Area

Push Push

10 CANCEL/MOB key Short push:

• Closes the menu or dialog box.
• Stops the aural alarm.
• Ends the tool mode (End Route, End Move, etc.).
Long push:
• Enters the MOB mark (at the own ship’s position).

* The beep sound can be turned on or off with [Notify when NAVpilot is engaged] in
the menu. See section 2.10.8.

1-7
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.2.3 Control Unit MCU-005

No. Key Name Description

1 Power lamp When the power is applied to the MCU-005, the lamp is lit.
2 EVENT key • Short push: Creates an event mark at the boat's location.
• Long push: Creates an MOB at the boat's location.
3 GAIN/TX key Short push: Adjusts the radar gain/AC SEA/AC RAIN or ad-
just the Fish Finder/Multi-beam Sounder gain.
Long push: Toggles between Standby and Transmit for the
radar.
4 MENU key Opens/closes the menu.
5 HOME/BRILL key Short push: Opens the Home screen.
Long push: Opens the [Quick Access] window.
6 CANCEL/MOB key Short push:
• Closes menus/windows.
• Stops the aural alarm.
• Ends the tool mode (End Route, End Move, etc.).
Long push:
• Enters the MOB mark (at the own ship’s position).
7 CTRL key Switches control between multiple displays when more than
one display is in the system.
8 EDGE key • Activates the selected item.
• Press the EDGE key, then operate the CursorPad or scroll
pad to open [Layers] menu, Quick Page, Slide-out menu,
Data Area.
䞉Opens Layers menu 䞉Opens Quick Page
OLLIN
CR OLLIN
CR
G
S

SHIP

Push Tap
G
S

SHIP
3D
Push 3D
Tap

䞉Opens Slide-out menu 䞉Opens Data Area

OLLIN
CR
OLLIN CR
G
S
G

SHIP
S

Push
SHIP
3D
Tap Push 3D
Tap

9 FUNC key Short push: Performs the function assigned to two finger tap
function.
Long push: Performs the function assigned to two finger long
tap function.

1-8
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

No. Key Name Description

10 CURSOR key and cursor CURSOR key, short push:
pad • Opens pop up menus.
• Activates/confirms the item selected by the cursor.
Cursorpad CURSOR key, long push:
• Edit display icon (on Home screen).
CursorPad operation:
CURSOR key • Moves the selection cursor.

11 STBY/AUTO key Switches the steering mode of the FURUNO NAVpilot series
Autopilot between the Stand-by and AUTO modes. When
switching occurs, a beep sounds* and a message informs you
of Navpilot mode change.
• Stand-by mode→AUTO mode: "Navpilot Engaged".
• AUTO mode→Stand-by mode: "Navpilot Disengaged".
12 POINTS/ROUTE key Short push: Sets the cursor location as a point.
Long push: Starts a route from the cursor location.
13 RotoKey™ Short push:
• Opens pop up menus.
• Activates/confirms the item selected by the cursor.
Long push:
• Edit display icon (on Home screen).
Rotate:
• Moves the selection cursor. Selected items are highlighted.
• Zooms in/out.
14 RANGE OUT/IN key • Zooms in/out.
15 SHIP/3D key and scrolling Ship/3D button short push:
pad • Returns own ship to center of screen (Plotter/Weather/Ra-
dar display).
Scrolling • Cancels the echo history (Fish finder display).
pad Ship/3D button long push:
OLLIN
CR
• Switches between 2D and 3D display.
G
S

SHIP
3D
Scrolling pad:
SHIP/3D • Scrolls chart, radar picture, and AXIS make PTZ network
button
cameras.

* The beep sound can be turned on or off with [Notify when NAVpilot is engaged] in
the menu. See section 2.10.8.

1-9
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.2.4 Remote Control Unit group settings

If multiple NavNet TZtouch3 units are installed in the network, you can select the dis-
play to show on a unit, using the MCU-004 or MCU-005. Additionally, you can select
the order in which to cycle through the displays.

Note: Confirm that there are no duplicate unit nicknames in the network. If a duplicate
name is found, change the name on the [Sensor List] ([Initial Setup]→[Sensor List]).
1. From the Home screen, tap [Settings]→[Initial Setup].
2. Tap [Remote Controller Configuration] twice.

TZTL12F_FB_LEFT Switch Order

Example remote configuration - MCU-004

No. Description
1 The nickname automatically assigned to the MCU-004/MCU-005.
2 The nickname assigned to the NavNet TZtouch3 unit currently being operated.
3 Setting for the unit connected to TZT12F_FB_LEFT*, controlled by MCU1.
4 Set the cycling order of units controlled by MCU1. To skip a unit, select it to [Off].
5 Setting for the unit connected to TZT19F_MB_LEFT*, controlled by MCU2.
6 Set the cycling order of units controlled by MCU2. To skip a unit, select it to [Off].

*: For the configurations with an MCU-005 connected, the nickname for the MCU-
005 appears.

1-10
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

Based on the menu settings shown on the previous page, the installed configura-
tion should look similar to the following image.

䠄A䠅TZT12F_FB_LEFT 䠄B䠅TZT12F_FB_RIGHT
MCU1
FLYBRIDGE
STBY HOME

(A) and (B) can

•
AUTO BRILL

FUNC

CURS CENTER
•

be controlled
SCRL

from MCU1. CANCEL

MOB

䠄C䠅TZT19F_MB_LEFT 䠄D䠅TZT19F_MB_RIGHT
MCU2
FLYBRIDGE
(C) and (D) can STBY
•
AUTO
HOME
BRILL

FUNC
HUB
be controlled
CURS CENTER
•
SCRL

from MCU2. CANCEL

MOB

3. Select the displays to cycle.

4. Set the order. To skip a display, select it to [Off].

5. Tap "<" on the title bar to return to the [REMOTE CONTROLLER CONFIGURA-
TION] menu.
6. Tap the [Confirm] button on the title bar to save settings and close the menu.

1-11
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.3 How to Turn the Power On or Off

How to turn the power on

Tap (push for TZT12F) the power switch ( ) on TZT16F/19F

the front panel to turn the power [Link] equip- TZT12F
ment beeps twice and the splash screen appears.
After the startup process is completed, the wel-
come screen replaces the splash screen.

Power
switch

[Demo Mode]: Tap [Start] to start the Demo mode. To stop the Demo mode, go to the
Home screen, tap [Settings]→[General], then [Stop Demo].
[Let’s Navigate!]: Start normal operation. (The equipment starts up with the last-used
display.)

[Tutorial]: Tap [Start Tour] to start the tutorial. You can stop the tutorial at any time by
tapping the screen. A confirmation message appears; tap [OK] to stop the tutorial.

[Show at startup]: Check to get the welcome screen each time the equipment is pow-
ered. Remove the checkmark to hide the welcome screen at power-up. You can also
show or hide the welcome screen from the menu.*

After clearing the welcome screen, the [NAVIGATION WARNING] screen appears.
Read the warning, then click [OK].

* To show or hide the welcome, go to the Home screen, tap [Settings]→[General], then
turn [Show Welcome Screen at startup] on or off.

1-12
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

How to turn the power off

Tap (push for TZT12F) the power switch to show the [Quick Access] window.

DRS6A_X-CLASS BBDS1

Touch Screen

Device Network

Tap [Device] to power off only this unit, or [Network] to power this unit and all other
NavNet TZtouch3 units in the network. A beep sounds, the message "Shutdown in
progress" appears, then the unit shuts down shortly thereafter.

Note 1: If you cannot turn off the power as shown above, or the screen has frozen,
push and hold the power switch until the screen goes blank, wait two seconds, then
release the switch.
Note 2: Do not turn off the power during the start-up. Wait until the start-up is complet-
ed before you turn off the power.
Note 3: The screen refreshes slower in low ambient temperature.

1.4 How to Adjust the Brilliance of the Display and

Hue
With the power applied, press to show the [Quick Access] window.
Closes the window.

DRS6A_X-CLASS BBDS1

Hue options from left:

Daytime, Dusk, Nighttime, Automatic
Adjusts the display brilliance.

Touch Screen

Device Network

1-13
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

To adjust the brilliance, tap (push for TZT12F) the power switch, drag the icon on
the slider bar or tap the slider bar.

To select the hue, tap the applicable icon above the slider bar. The Auto icon auto-
matically adjust the hue according to the time of day at your ship’s position.

How to synchronize brilliance of units in the network

Turn on [Brilliance Synchronization] in the [Settings]→[General] menu to synchronize
the brilliance among NavNet units in the network.

Note: Hue settings are not synchronized.

1-14
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.5 Home Screen

The Home screen is where you access functions and menus, select displays, and
check sensor status. Tap the [Home] icon at the top left corner to show the Home
screen. The Home screen is automatically closed, and the previous operation display
restored, when no operation is detected for approx. one minute.

The figure below shows an example display with all sensors and corresponding devic-
es connected.

Home icon
on
Tap

Time, date Sensor icons

Time

Date Heading Sounder Fusion

GPS Radar SiriusXM WiFi

Lists Home screen

Functions Display icons

Plotter Radar Sounder Camera

Weather Instrument Multi Sounder Side Scan

Cross Section 3D History YAMAHA

Engine Manager

1-15
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

The Sensor icons show the sensors connected in the system and their status, in the
following colors. White: Sensor normal; Red: Sensor error; Gray: Sensor inactive
(stopped).

The Functions section provides the features mentioned below. If the item is hidden,
drag up or down from [Settings]. ([MOB] is fixed.)
[MOB]: Enters a MOB mark (to mark man overboard location on the plotter and radar
displays). See section 1.18.
[Settings]: Menus (general, plotter, radar, sounder, etc.) for customization of the sys-
tem. See section 1.15.
[Tide]: Opens the tide graph.
[Charts]: Displays a list of charts stored in this equipment.
[Lists]: Accesses the lists (points, routes, boundaries, catches, photos, AIS, DSC,
ARPA, Alarms).
[FAX30]*: Opens the FAX-30 operation screen.
[Fusion]*: Opens the FUSION operation screen.
[SiriusAudio]*: Opens the SiriusXM Audio control panel.
[eGuide]: Opens the abbreviated operator’s manual. You can get the latest version of
the operator’s manual by accessing the quick response code provided in the introduc-
tion section of the guide.
* Requires appropriate equipment connection. Not shown otherwise.

The Display icons select corresponding displays. See the next section for details.

1.6 How to Select a Display

You have two methods from which to select a display, the Home screen and the quick
page.

1.6.1 How to select a display from the Home screen

Tap the [Home] icon to show the Home screen. Tap the applicable display icon. (It
may be necessary to swipe the screen if you have programmed a number of display
icons.)

Display icon (large)

Display icon (small)

Note: The display icons can be edited (size changed, layout rearranged, icon deleted,
etc.) See section 1.7.2.

1-16
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.6.2 How to select a display from the quick page

The quick page lets you change the display from the current display without having to
go the Home screen.

To show the quick page, swipe the top of the screen downward. Tap desired display
icon to change the display.

Swipe

Quick
Dot indicates pages
display currently
in use.

How to add the current display to the quick page

Show the quick page, long tap the desired icon. The icon corresponding to the current
mode appears in the quick page.

1-17
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.7 How to Edit the Display Icons

The default Home screen arrangement provides display icons in a configuration ac-
cording to the equipment that you have in your network. If the arrangement does not
meet your requirements, you can rearrange the icons to suit your needs. You can have
a maximum of 16 display icons, and a screen can be shown in full screen, 2-way, 3-
way or 4-way split screens.

Note: Some displays cannot be shown in multi-split screens. An icon is greyed out
when it cannot be selected to a multi-split screen. See section 1.7.1.
The displays available depend on the display division selected and your system con-
figuration. The table below outlines the display divisions and available displays.

Display division Available displays

Full screen Plotter, weather, radar, fish finder, instrument, camera, multi beam
sonar, side scan, cross section, 3D history, Yamaha Engine Manag-
er
Two-way split Plotter, radar, fish finder, multi beam sonar, side scan
Three-way, four-way Plotter, radar, fish finder, instrument*, camera*, multi beam sonar,
split side scan, cross section*, 3D history*, Yamaha Engine Manager

* Not available in left-side screen in a three-way split screen.

1.7.1 How to add a new display icon

1. Tap the [Home] icon to show the Home screen.
2. Tap the + icon, shown right. (If the icon is not shown, this means
that all available display icons (16) have been used. Erase an
unnecessary icon to make room. See subsection 1.7.2.)
3. Follow the instructions below to create a display icon.

Tap to save icon.

Custom display area

Display
division
choices Drag display
division icon to
screen center.
Drag display type
(icon) to screen
center.
Available displays (Unavailable displays are greyed out)
In the three-way split screen, unavailable displays are
denoted by showing “ ” when dragging the unavailable Display
display (icon). choices

After saving, the arrangement is then opened on the screen and the display icons on
the Home screen are updated according to your arrangement.

1-18
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.7.2 How to edit a display icon

Long tap the display icon to edit to show the editing icons on the display icon. Tap the
applicable editing icon. Refer to the figure and instructions below.

Edit icon content Remove icon

Long
tap

Change icon size

Edit icon content: Tap the icon to show the [EDIT PAGE] display (see
subsection 1.7.1). Then, change the configuration as necessary.
Remove icon: Tap the icon to delete the icon from the Home screen.
Change icon size: Tap the icon to switch the size between large and small. Tap any-
where other than an icon to confirm change.

1-19
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.8 Edge Swipe Functions

This equipment has five edge swipe functions: quick page, slide-out menu, pop-up
menu, [Layers] menu, and data area (nav data). Swipe or tap the screen at the loca-
tions shown below to access the hidden functions.

A window other than a data area is automatically erased from the screen when it is not
operated within the time specified with [User Interface Auto-Hide] in the [Gener-
al]→[Settings] menu. You can erase the window at any time by tapping the screen.

Quick page

Swipe

Swipe Tap Swipe

Swipe
Slide-out menu
Data area

ቃ⏺⥺

Layers menu*
* Plotter display, radar sensor connected. [Radar Overlay],
[Radar Rings], [Guard Zone 1] and [Guard Zone 2] do not
appear when a radar sensor is not connected. Pop-up menu

Function description
The quick page selects displays. See subsection 1.6.2.

The slide-out menu provides quick access to several universal functions. To execute
a function, tap the function name. Unavailable functions are grayed out. The color of
the icon changes according to function status, yellow for ON, white for OFF.

The pop-up menu provide a subset of functions that are relevant to the object or lo-
cation tapped. To execute a function, tap the function name. Unavailable functions are
grayed out. Functions that have “>” at the end of their name indicate additional func-
tions are available.

1-20
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

The [Layers] menu provides quick access to the layer options, often-used functions
and detailed settings of the active display. Tap a slide switch to turn a function on or
off. Unavailable functions are grayed out. This menu can also be accessed from the
slide-out menu in some modes.

Note 1: For the multi-screen display, the active display (orange rectangle circum-
scribes the active display) can be controlled from the [Layers] menu.
Note 2: The [Layers] menu is not available with the instrument displays.
The figure below shows the [Layers] menu for the radar and fish finder displays.

Layers menu for radar display

Layers menu for fish finder display

The data area shows navigation data. See the next section for details.

1-21
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.9 Data Area

The data area at the left side of the screen shows various navigation, engine, tank and
active display sensor data. You can select the data to display, select format (analog
or digital) for data and change the order of the data. Data availability depends on your
system configuration.

Data
area

Note: The data display is also available in all split screens, on the left screen.
To show the data area, swipe the screen rightward from the left edge of the screen, or
open the slide-out menu and tap [NavData]. Three yellow bars appear to the left of
[NavData] when the data area is displayed. A maximum of two “tabs”* of nav data can
be shown in the data area, and the current categories are named at the bottom of the
data area. Tap the category name to switch categories. Each category contains nu-
merous data boxes. Hidden data boxes can be shown by scrolling the data area up or
down.
* The five sheet categories are

[DATA]: Shown on all display modes.

[ROUTE]: Shown with the chart plotter display.
[RADAR]: Shown with the radar display.
[FISH FINDER]: Shown with the fish finder display.
[DFF-3D]: Shown with the DFF-3D display (multi beam sonar, side scan, cross section,
3D history).

1-22
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.9.1 How to change the order of the data

1. Long tap the data area to show the [Edit NavData] display screen.

Grip
icon

2. Press and hold the grip icon of the data to move, then drag and drop the data box
to its new location.
3. Tap [9] to close the [Edit NavData] display screen.

1.9.2 How to change the contents of a data box

1. Long tap the data area to show the [Edit NavData] display screen.
2. Tap the data box for which you want to change its contents. The [Modify NavData]
window appears.

3. In the [Modify NavData] window, tap desired data.

4. Tap [9] to close the [Edit NavData] display screen.

1-23
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.9.3 How to add data to a data area

1. Long tap the data area to show the [Edit NavData] display screen.
2. Tap an unoccupied area in the data box to show the [Add NavData] window. You
can also show this window by tapping [Add NavData].

3. In the [Add NavData] window, tap desired data. The selected data appears in the
data box. In the example below, the [Cursor Information] box has been added.

4. Tap [9] to close the [Edit NavData] display screen.

1.9.4 How to delete a data box

1. Long tap the data area to show the [Edit NavData] display screen.
2. Tap the data box to delete, and the [Modify NavData] window appears.
3. Tap [Remove].
4. Tap [9] to close the [Edit NavData] display screen.

1-24
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.9.5 How to change the display method for the data in a data box
The data in the data boxes can be shown in graphic, numeric, or graph format.

1. Tap the data box to process.

2. At the top of the [Modify NavData] window, tap [Change Type]
3. Tap [Graphic], [Numeric] or [Graph] as appropriate. The figure below shows the
appearance of SOG data in the available formats.

[Graphic] [Numeric] [Graph]

Analog format Digital format Graph format

For Graph, the plotting period (horizontal axis) and plotting range (vertical axis)
can be changed.
1) Tap the data box to change.
2) Tap [Plot Period]*, then tap desired period, among 1'00s, 5'00s, 10'00s,
30'00s, 1h00, 3h00', 6h00', 12h00', 1d00h, and 2d00h.
* Depending on the display time, the number of data points displayed on the
graph may decrease, and the graph may become coarse.
3) Tap [Plot Range Value], and a software keyboard appears. Enter range value,
then tap [9].
4) Tap [×] to close the keyboard.
4. Tap [9] to close the [Modify NavData] window.

1.9.6 How to adjust the transparency of the data area

1. At the Home screen, tap [Settings]→[Chart Plotter].
2. Tap [NavData Transparency]. Select desired transparency, from 0-80(%).
3. Tap [×] to close the menu.
Note: Alpha blending technology is used for transparency effects.

1-25
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.9.7 How to display 3-axis speed from the SC-33/SCX-20

When a SC-33/SCX-20 Satellite Compass™ is connected to the same network, you
can use a box in the data area as a dedicated SC-33/SCX-20 display.

Note: This function requires PGN 130578 Vessel Speed Components to be output
from the SC-33/SCX-20.
Referring to section 1.9.2 and section 1.9.3, select the 3-Axis Speed display.

Port/starboard directional speed

: Starboard
: Port Tidal current direction
(brown arrow)
Speed at
CCRP*
Fore/aft directional speed
: Fore Speed at mid-ship
: Aft
Wind direction
1.23 3-axis Speed

(purple arrow)
15.67 1.23
Speed at stern 1.23 15.67
Speed
SOG: Speed over
1.23
the ground
STW: Speed thru [Graphic] [Numeric]
the water analog format digital format
*
CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point) is determined at installation, and is either the bow,
transducer location or center of vessel.

1-26
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.10 User Interface

You can change the size of some items in the user interface and those items are cir-
cumscribed in the figure below. The figure below shows a display example in the
[Normal] configuration.

Event icon Navigation bar Center vessel

Home Restart
DTW BTW TTG ITA

icon Date
⯪㏿䜰䝷䞊䝮
Speed Alarm Undo, Redo
icons
Status bar

POS
Slider bar
Data
area

2D/3D icon, range, display mode icon

1. From the Home screen, tap [Settings]→[General]→[Scale & Layout].

2. Tap desired size.

3. Tap [×] to close the menu.

1-27
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.11 MicroSD Cards

This equipment uses microSD cards for chart cards and data storage (tracks, routes,
points, boundaries, catches, photos, and setting data. With use of the SDU-001 or a
SD card reader, SDXC (Secure Digital Extended Capacity) cards can also be used.

How to insert a microSD card

Before inserting a chart card in the multi function display, turn off the power.

Push card
Open cover. into a slot
Unfasten two
screws. and close
cover.
Push card into slot
and close cover.

Chart card drive (multi function display) SD card unit (SDU-001)

How to format a microSD card/SD card

You do not normally need to format a data microSD card. If the card becomes unread-
able, format the card with a formatting program that is compatible with the specifica-
tions of the card. Formatting a chart card will erase all chart data on the card.

How to remove a microSD card

1) Open the card drive cover.

2) Push the card to release the card from the card drive.
3) Remove the card with your fingers then close the lid (cover).

About the microSD cards

• Handle the cards carefully. Improper use can damage the card and
destroy its contents.
• Make sure the slot lid (cover) is closed at all times.
• Remove a card with only your fingers. Do not use metal instruments
(like tweezers) to remove the card.
• Do not remove a card while the device is transferring or accessing information.

1-28
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

Compatible microSD cards

The table below list the cards that have been verified for use with this equipment.

Note 1: The cards were verified using basic functions. All functions were not verified.
FURUNO does not guarantee card operations.
Note 2: Cards other than those listed below have not been verified.

Capacity
Maker Maker Series Model
(GB)
SANDISK Ultra microSD UHS-I SDSQUAC-256G-JN3MA 256
SDSQUAC-128G-JN3MA 128
SDSQUAC-064G-JN3MA 64
SDSQUAC-032G-JN3MA 32
SDSQUAC-016G-JN3MA 16
High durability MICROSD/ SDSQQND-064G-JN3ID 64
MICROSDXC card SDSQQND-032G-JN3ID 32
micro SDHCcard SDSDQ-032G-J35U 32
SDSDQ-016G-J35U 16
TOSHIBA MU-J series MU-J256GX 256
MU-J128GX 128
MU-J064GX 64
MU-J032GX 32
MU-J016GX 16
MSDAR40M series MSDAR40N128G 128
MSDAR40N64G 64
MSDAR40N32G 32
MSDAR40N16G 16
MSDAR40N08G 8
Panasonic SMGB series RP-SMGB64GJK 64
RP-SMGB32GJK 32
RP-SMGB16GJK 16
SMGA series RP-SMGA08GJK 8
RP-SMGA04GJK 4

1-29
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.12 Chart Plotter Introduction

The chart plotter provides a world map in raster format. A vector chart for the US
coastline (with Alaska and Hawaii) is also provided. The plotter section has functions
to enter points, and create and plan routes.

The chart plotter receives position data fed from the built-in GNSS (GPS) receiver
(TZT12F/16F) or, in the case of the TZT19F, the external GNSS (GPS) receiver. Your
position is marked on the screen with the boat icon.

The points and routes you have entered are shown on the screen. You can move, de-
lete and edit the points and routes from their pop-up menus.

The chart plotter also does the following functions:

• Plots the track of your ship • Controls alarm functions

• Measures distances and bearings • Follows routes
• Marks man overboard (MOB) position

Home icon Event icon Navigation bar

Status bar
Center
Vessel
Depth Alarm
Undo,
Data Redo
area icons

COG vector
(dashed line) Heading
line Slider
Track bar
Inactive route Boat icon
(sleeping)*
Point
Inactive route
1
3
(expanded)
2

Orientation mode switch * Arrival or departure position,

Chart range selectable on [Layers] menu.
2D/3D switch

The status bar, common to all modes, alerts you to equipment status. The color of
both the bar and the status message change according to message category.
• Red bar, yellow characters: warning (alarm violation, equipment error, etc.)
• Yellow bar, black characters: caution (system message, etc.)
When an alert condition occurs, the equipment beeps (if enabled), the name of the
alert appears in the bar, and the bar flashes. You can stop the flashing and silence the
beep by tapping the bar. The alert indication remains in the status bar until the cause
for the alert is removed.

The undo/redo icon has the following functions with points and routes.

• Undo icon: Reverse the last change done.

• Redo icon: Restore the undo action.

1-30
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.13 Radar Introduction

A radar system operates in the microwave part of the radio frequency (RF) range. The
radar detects the position and movement of objects. Objects are shown on the radar
display at their measured distances and bearings in intensities according to echo
strength.

A guard zone tells you when the radar targets are in the area you specify.

Center radar
Home icon Event icon North mark
picture

Redo,
Guard Undo
Data
zone icons
area

Heading
line Slider
Own Own
ship icon
ship bar
position

TX/STBY switch Fixed range

Radar range rings
Orientation mode switch

1-31
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.14 Sounder (Fish Finder) Introduction

The sounder display provides a picture of the echoes found by the fish finder. Echoes
are scrolled across the screen from the right position to the left position.

The echoes at the right position are the current echoes. These echoes can be from
separate fish, a school of fish, or the bottom. Depth to the bottom is indicated, provided
the gain is set correctly. You can scroll the echoes backward.

Both low and high TX frequencies are provided. (Frequencies depend on the trans-
ducer connected.) The low frequency has a wide detection area, which is for general
detection and understanding bottom conditions. The high frequency has a narrow
beam that helps you inspect fish.

The range, gain, clutter and TVG can be adjusted automatically according to your pur-
pose (cruising or fishing) to let you do other tasks.

Home icon Event icon

Depth
scale
Temp.
Temp. graph*2
scale*2

Bottom
echo

Fish
Slider mark*1
bar

Depth Frequency A-scope

*1 Requires appropriate transducer.

*2 Requires water temperature sensor.

A CHIRP or standard (CW narrowband) type transducer can be connected to this unit.
TruEcho CHIRP™ is a revolutionary technology that displays high-resolution, low-
noise images using broadband ultrasound and advanced signal processing. The re-
action of bottom and reef schools of fish and the seabed echo are displayed distinctly,
which is useful for suitable catch determination. For the model of CHIRP transducer,
refer to the configuration table in the equipment manual.

1-32
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.15 Settings Menu

The [Settings] menu provides the options for customizing your system. The [Settings]
menu, as well as all other items on the Home screen, is automatically closed, and the
previous operation display restored, when no operation is detected for approx. one
minute.

1. Tap the [Home] icon to go to the Home screen.

2. Tap [Settings].
Back button Menu name Close button

Title bar

Preview screen shows you the result

Menus of certain selections.
3. Tap a menu. For example, tap the [General] menu.
4. Do one of the following according to the menu item:
• ON/OFF flipswitch: Tap the flipswitch to switch between [ON] and [OFF].

Flipswitch

Auto Scroll

• Slider bar, keyboard: Set level by dragging the slider button, or tapping the
keyboard icon ( ) to enter the level with the numeric software keyboard.
(See the next page for the appearance of the numeric keyboard.)

Slider bar Slider button

Tap to show
keyboard.

1-33
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

• Alphabet, numerical data entry: A menu item that requires entry of alphabet
and/or numerical data has a keyboard icon ( ). Tap the keyboard icon to
show the keyboard. (The keyboard displayed depends on the item selected.
Some items provide only the numeric keyboard.) Enter data, then tap [9] to con-
firm.
Alphabet input keyboard
Cursor (light blue) Title Close window
Name

Name

Erase
line

Delete letter
before cursor.

Delete letter at
Switch between cursor position.
upper and lower Switch between
case. upper and
Stop work
and close lower case.
keyboard.
Move cursor. Space Confirm
entry
Switch between numerics and symbols.
*
䠖Lower case input. Tap to switch to upper case input.
䠖䠖Upper case input. Tap to switch to lowercase input.
䠖䠖Upper case input. Tap to switch to lowercase input.

Numeric input keyboard

Name

Switch to alphabet keyboard.

1-34
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

• Color selection: A menu item that requires selection of color shows the current
color selection to the right of the name of the menu item. Tap the menu item to
show the color options. Tap color option desired. Current selection is highlight-
ed with a light blue square.
Tap menu item. Current selection

Current
selection is
highlighted
in light blue.

• Option selection: A menu item that requires selection of an option shows the
current selection on the menu. Tap the option desired. The current selection
has a checkmark.
Tap menu item. Current selection

COG Vector Time 2'00s

Current
selection
has a
checkmark.

5. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

1-35
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.16 Two-Finger Tap Function

The two-finger tap function provides a shortcut to commonly used functions. You can
program two shortcuts, and access them with short or long two-finger taps. For the
TZT12F, this function can also be carried out with the FUNC key.

Note: When [Touch Output] (see section 10.6) is enabled, the two-finger tap function
is not available on the display that shows the output from the HDMI port. (The display
is specified with the camera icon on the Home screen.)
1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[General]→[Two Finger Tap Func-
tion] or [Two Finger Long Tap Function].

2. Tap a function among the following:

[None]: Nothing happens.
[Full Screen]: On a split screen, the tap function makes the active screen a full
screen. Tap the screen again to revert to the split screen.
[Screen Capture]: Capture the screen and save it to a storage media (microSD
card or USB memory). The message shown below appears. Tap [OK] to save the
screen capture. The file name is automatically set with the year, month, day, hour,
minute and second the screenshot was captured, and the .png extension.

SCREEN CAPTURE SAVED UPON:

RIGHT SD CARD

[Event Mark]: Record an event. The [Creating Events] pop-up menu appears,
from which you can select the mark to put at the position the mark was selected
(see subsection 4.2.2).
[Home]: Open the Home screen (see section 1.6).
[Settings]: Open the [Settings] menu (see section 1.15).
[Lists]: Open the [Lists] menu (see section 1.15 and section 4.7).
[Tide]: Open the tide graph (see section 1.15 and subsection 3.2.4).
[Fusion]: Open the Fusion screen (see section 11.1).
[Fusion Bar]: Show the Fusion operation bar (see section 11.2).
3. Tap the close button to finish.

1-36
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.17 Language
The default interface language is English (United States). To change the language, do
as follows:

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[General]→[Language].

2. Tap the language to use. The message "APPLICATION HAVE TO RESTART
NOW! DO YOU WANT TO RESTART APPLICATION?" appears.
3. Tap [OK].
The system takes approximately five minutes to optimize the system for the new
language setting,

1.18 Man Overboard (MOB)

The MOB function is used to mark the location of man overboard, from the plotter and
radar displays. At the moment the MOB function is activated, the MOB mark is put at
the current position, on both the plotter and radar displays.

How to mark the MOB position

Tap [MOB] on the Home screen. The plotter display opens, the MOB mark ( ) is
at the location at the moment MOB was activated, and the MOB location is automati-
cally set as destination. For the TZT12F, long push the [EVENT/MOB] key to enter the
MOB mark.
At the moment of activation the following occurs.

• The message "MOB" flashes in the status bar, with yellow characters on a red back-
ground. The aural alarm sounds if it is enabled. Tap the status bar to stop the flash-
ing indication and silence the aural alarm.
• The MOB mark is highlighted.
• A yellow line connects between the MOB mark and current location. This line shows
the straightest course between own ship and the MOB mark.
• If a FM-4800 VHF Radiotelephone is connected to the same network, the MOB in-
formation is also sent to the FM-4800 and can be sent as a DSC message.

MOB mark on the plotter display MOB mark on the radar display

1-37
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

MOB information
Tap a MOB mark to display the following MOB data: latitude, longitude, DTA (distance
to the MOB), ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival at the MOB), depth*.

* Depth data requires a depth sensor.

How to delete a MOB mark

Tap a MOB mark to display the pop-up menu, then tap [Delete]. However, if the MOB
position is set as destination, the MOB point (highlight) remains on the screen and the
destination is not canceled. To erase a MOB mark set as a destination, you must first
stop navigation to the MOB. Tap the MOB mark, select [Stop Nav] (to cancel the des-
tination), tap the mark again, then tap [Delete].

1-38
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.19 Wireless LAN Settings

You can connect to the internet with the wireless LAN signal to download weather in-
formation (see chapter 13). Also, using wireless LAN, you can connect an iOS or An-
droid™ device to monitor the NavNet TZtouch3 from the connected device.

The wireless LAN can be used two ways:

• Use existing LAN: Connect to an existing LAN access point (in a harbor, etc.) to
download weather information.
• Create local network: Create an access point from which the NavNet TZtouch3 can
be monitored, controlled from a smartphone or tablet.

About the wireless LAN

• The wireless LAN function is available only in the countries which have acquired ra-
dio wave certification. Turn this function off in countries which do not have radio
wave certification. Ocean-going vessels that have radio wave certification can use
the wireless LAN function in any country that has acquired radio wave certification.
Vessels with radio wave certification that enter a country that does not have radio
wave certification may use the wireless LAN function only onboard the vessel.
Available countries (as of 04/2018): USA, Canada, New Zealand, Australia, Japan,
and all countries of the EU.
• The communication rate and effective range for the wireless LAN can be affected
by electromagnetic waves, interfering objects, or access point location.
• We strongly recommend using the wireless LAN with encrypted connection. Other-
wise unauthorized access by a third party can occur, which can cause loss of data
or system crash.
• We recommend changing the initial password before using a local wireless network.

1.19.1 How to connect the existing LAN

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[General]→[Connect to the Internet].

2. Tap [When Necessary]. Tap "<" to go back one layer.

3. Tap [Wireless LAN Settings]→[Wireless Mode].

4. Tap [Connect to existing LAN]. Tap "<" to go back one layer.

1-39
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

5. Turn on [Wireless] to see the available WLAN networks at the bottom of the
screen.

XXXXX
XXX
XXXXX
XXX

6. Tap the network to use.

XXXXX

CANCEL

FORGET

CONNECT

7. Tap [Connect] to show the network key input window.

8. Enter the network key, then tap [OK].

When the connection is successful, the network details appear below [CURRENT
CONNECTED NETWORK].
Note: If the network key is incorrect, an error message appears. Enter the correct
key and tap [OK] again.
9. Tap X on the title bar to close the menu.

1-40
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.19.2 How to create a local wireless network

Note 1: Do the procedure with [Local Network] in [Wireless LAN Settings] turned off.
Note 2: It may not be possible to connect to a local network if the network is unstable.
In this case, turn [Wireless] off and on. Connect via existing LAN network.
Note 3: Confirm that [When Necessary] is selected in [Connect to the Internet] before
doing the procedure.
1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[General]→[Wireless LAN Set-
tings]→[Wireless Mode].
2. Tap [Create Local Network], then tap "<" to go back one layer.

Name TZT19F

Password XXXXXXXX

3. Tap [Name].
4. Enter the name of the network, then tap [9].
5. Tap [Password].
6. Enter the password, then tap [9]. (If the password is wrong, an error message ap-
pears. Tap the [OK] button then reenter the password.)
7. Turn on [Local Network] in [Wireless LAN Settings] to connect to the network.
8. Tap X on the title bar to close the menu.
9. Connect to NavNet TZtouch3 from the NavNet app on your tablet or smartphone.

1-41
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.20 How to Create and Login to Your My TimeZero™

Account
You will need to create a My TimeZero™ account to access the cloud and My Friends
(social network) functions. Prepare a PC or mobile device to complete the registration.

1. Connect your NavNet TZtouch3 to the internet. See section 1.19.

2. Open the [Settings]→[General] menu, then select [Login] in the [MY TIMEZERO]
section.

Note: You can also login with your Facebook account.

3. Tap [Create an account].

4. Fill in all fields. Check the checkbox if you want to subscribe to the Newsletter.

1-42
 1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

5. Click [Get started!] to finish.

6. From a PC or mobile device, follow the link provided in the e-mail to log into your
account. Leave the NavNet TZtouch3 as is.
7. Tap [Go to Log in page] on this equipment.

8. Enter the e-mail address used to register the account, and your password.
9. Tap [Log in].
The name used to create the account appears in the [Logged As] field. The Status bar
shows (in yellow) "You are logged as (your name)" and several beeps sound.

1-43
1. SYSTEM INTRODUCTION

1.21 PIN Code Lock

The PIN code lock feature allows you to require a four-digit password to be entered
upon startup, keeping your data safe against theft.

Follow the procedure below to set the password.

Note 1: Make a note of your password and store it in a safe place. If the password is
forgotten you cannot retrieve your user data (points, routes, tracks, boundaries, catch-
es, photos, settings).
Note 2: Set a password for each MFD (Multi Function Display) in the network.
1. Open the [Settings]→[General] menu.
2. Turn on [Password Lock].
You will use this password to unlock the MFD. Make a note of the password and
store it in a safe place. If you forget the password, all MFDs must be restored to
factory default to unlock the unit.
3. Tap [OK] to show the password input screen.

4. Enter your password with four digits. You are asked to confirm the password.
5. Re-enter your password. The message "Password protected" appears.
6. Tap [OK] to finish.
To release password protection, turn off [Password Lock] in the above [Link]
message "The password will removed and all units in the network will no longer be
protected. Are you sure you want to proceed?" Tap [OK].

1-44
2. CHART PLOTTER
This chapter shows you how to do the following:

• Use and prepare the chart plotter display

• Set chart plotter related alarms
• Control the track

2.1 Chart Type

A world map in raster chart format is included in your unit. A vector chart for the US
coastline (Alaska and Hawaii included) is provided also. To use this Chart Plotter as
a navigational aid, electronic charts (stored internally) for the area you navigate are
required. Contact your dealer about charts for your area.

There are two types of charts available with this equipment.

[Raster]: Raster charts are digitized scans of NOAA paper charts. Raster charts have
information like notes, source diagrams, tidal diamonds, horizontal and vertical datum,
etc.

[HO]: HO charts are S-57 format vector charts (digital files) that contain marine fea-
tures and information created for marine navigation. These charts are made according
to the International Hydrographic Organization (IHO). HO charts are available from C-
MAP, Navionics, Mapmedia, and NOAA (National Oceanic and Atmospheric Admin-
istration).

How to select a chart type

1. Go to the home screen, then select the [Chart Plotter] display.
2. Open the [Layers] menu.
3. Tap the chart type from among [Auto], [Raster] or [HOs].
*: [Auto] automatically switches the chart type according to chart availability and prior-
ity.

2-1
2. CHART PLOTTER

2.2 Display Range

You can change the display range to change the amount of information shown. The
selected range appears in the box at the bottom left-hand corner of the screen.

Range area

Display range
How to zoom in or out the display range
Method 1: Pinch the chart plotter display.

Zoom in Zoom out

Method 2: Operate the slider to bar to adjust the display range, using one of the meth-
ods shown below.
1) Drag the slider.
2) Tap the bar.
3) Tap the "+" or "-" icon on the slider.
(The slider bar is shown in the default setting. The slider bar can be shown or hidden
with [Show Scale Slider] in the [Settings]→[Chart Plotter] menu.)

Zoom in

Drag the slider

(or tap bar or +, - icons)

Slider bar
Zoom out

Note 1: You can judge the suitability of the range by the color of the chart scale indi-
cation.
• Black: Range is appropriate for chart accuracy.
• Red: Range is inappropriate for chart accuracy.

Note 2: You can zoom the display range in or out from the preview screen.
Method 3 (TZT12F only): Turn the RotoKey™ clockwise to zoom in. Turn counter-
clockwise to zoom out.

2-2
 2. CHART PLOTTER

2.3 Orientation Mode

The chart can be shown in head-up or north-up orientation. Tap the orientation mode
switch, [HU] or [NU], whichever is shown, at the bottom left corner to change the ori-
entation mode.

• North Up: North is at the top of the screen. When your heading changes, the boat
icon moves according to heading. This mode is for long-range navigation.
• Head Up: Displays the chart with the current compass heading of your ship at the
top of the screen. The heading data from a compass is required. When the heading
changes, the boat icon remains fixed, and the chart picture rotates according to
heading.

: North-up

Orientation
: Head-up
mode switch

2.4 How to Move the Chart

You may need to move the chart when the own ship icon is off-screen, you want to
view an area off-screen or enter a mark off-screen. The chart must be moved to do
this.

To move the chart, drag the on-screen display and show the area you want to work
with.

Note: To return your ship icon to the center of the display and show the immediately
surrounding area, tap the [Center Vessel] icon at the top-right corner of the display.

2-3
2. CHART PLOTTER

2.5 The Boat Icon

2.5.1 Description
The boat icon (red) marks current position and moves
according to your vessel’s movement. The following in-
formation also appears with the boat icon. Heading line

• Heading line: a straight line that runs from your posi- Turn direction
tion and shows the current heading. indicator

• COG vector: a vector line that runs from the boat icon COG vector
and points in the direction in which your ship is now
moving.
• Turn direction indicator: points in the direction your
vessel is turning, starboard or port. In the figure to the
right, the starboard turn indicator is shown.

2.5.2 How to show or hide the COG vector, heading line

Tap the boat icon to show the pop-up menu.

Set [COG] or [HDG] to [ON] or [OFF] as required.
The turn direction indicator is also turned on or off
with [COG].

Note 1: The color of the COG vector (including the

turn direction indicator) can be changed. Go to the
home screen, then select [Settings]→[Ship &
Track]→[COG Vector Color].
Note 2: The thickness of the heading line can be
changed. Go to the home screen, then select [ Set-
tings]→[Ship & Track]→[Heading Line Thickness].
Set the thickness with the software keyboard or
slider bar. [1] is thinnest; [5] is thickest.

2-4
 2. CHART PLOTTER

2.5.3 COG vector length

The COG vector can be set to show one of the following:

• Position after traveling the distance set in the menu.

• Estimated position after traveling the time set in the menu.
The tip of the vector is the estimated position of your ship at the end of the selected
time or distance. The greater the distance or the time, the longer the COG vector. To
change the COG vector length, do the following.

1. Open the home screen, then tap [Settings] → [Ship & Track] → [COG Vector].

2. Tap [Distance] or [Time] as required, then tap the [<] icon at the title bar.
If you selected [Distance], go to step 3. For [Time], go to step 5.
3. Tap [COG Vector Length] to display the software keyboard.
4. Set the length for the COG vector, then tap [9]. Go to step 6.
5. Tap [COG Vector Time], then tap the time for the COG vector.

6. Tap the close button to finish.

2-5
2. CHART PLOTTER

2.5.4 Boat icon orientation

You can select the orientation of the boat icon to heading or COG.

1. Open the home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Ship & Track].

2. Tap [Vessel Icon Orientation].
3. Tap [Heading] or [COG].
4. Tap the close button to finish.

2.6 How to Find Information Chart Object and Chart

Information
You can find chart object and chart information from the pop-up menu.

2.6.1 Chart object information

Simple information
Tap an object to show its name, specifications, position, and range and bearing, in the
pop-up menu.

Name and specifications of object

Latitude and longitude position

of object

Range and bearing to object

2-6
 2. CHART PLOTTER

Detailed information
Tap an object to show the pop-up menu. Tap [Chart Object info] on the pop-up menu
to show detailed information.

2.6.2 Chart information

Tap a location on the chart not occupied by a chart object, then tap [Chart Info] on the
pop-up menu.

2-7
2. CHART PLOTTER

2.7 How to Find the Range and Bearing Between

Two Locations
The [Distance] item in the slide-out menu measures the range and bearing between
any two locations on your chart. Range and bearing between the two locations are dig-
itally indicated on the screen.

1. Open the slide-out menu.

2. Tap [Distance].
A dashed line runs between the start location and the 2nd location. The range,
bearing, SOG, and TTG to the 2nd location is shown at the top of the screen.
Range Bearing Speed Over the Ground TTG

Starting location 2nd location

Icon
Drag to change location.

3. To change the location of either point, drag and drop.

4. To quit the distance measurement, tap [Cancel Ruler] at the top right-hand corner
of the screen.

2-8
 2. CHART PLOTTER

2.8 Multiple Chart Plotter Displays

Three chart plotter displays can be shown on one screen. With three chart plotter dis-
plays, you can see the conditions around your ship on both short and long ranges. Al-
so, you can see how your ship moves toward your destination from more than one
angle. For example, you can show one display in 3D and the other two in 2D.

The following features can be adjusted individually.

• AIS • ARPA • Display range

• Chart orientation • Chart type • Scroll the chart
• Overlays (radar, satellite photo, depth shading, tide icon, tidal current icon, ACCU-
FISH™ (see section 7.14), points, routes, tracks)
• 2D and 3D: Independent orientation (2D, 3D) and view point (3D) are possible.

The following example shows a three-way split plotter display.

Plotter display 2
Display range: 80.03 NM
Orientation: Head-up
Perspective: 2D

Plotter display 1 Plotter display 3

Display range: 26.09 NM Display range: 51.93 NM
Orientation: North-up Orientation: North-up
Perspective: 3D Perspective: 2D
Overlay: Depth shading

2-9
2. CHART PLOTTER

2.9 Cartographic Text and Objects on Vector Charts

This section shows you how to show or hide the cartographic objects and text infor-
mation that appear on the vector charts.

2.9.1 Control visibility of text and object information in vector charts

The [Settings]→[Vector Chart] menu controls the visibility of text and object informa-
tion, for example, buoy names and light description.

6.0 ft

[Chart Object Size]: Drag the slider to set the chart object size (setting value: 50 to
200%).
[Chart Color Palette]: Set the chart color pattern. [Standard] is this equipment’s origi-
nal color palette, [S-52] complies with the official S-52 charts, and [Sunlight] provides
a high contrast palette.

[Chart Symbols] Select the chart symbol type. [S-52] are the official IMO symbols (also
referred to as simplified symbols) library for ECDIS. [International] symbols are the
copy of paper chart symbols of IALA symbols library (US symbols library).

[Shallow Contour]: Set the shallow depth (setting range: 0.0, 3.3, 6.6, 9.8, 13.1, 16.4,
19.7, 23.0, 26.2, 29.50, 32.8 ft). Show shallow depth contours in dark blue.

[Safety Contour]: Set the safety depth (setting range: 0.0, 3.3, 6.6, 9.8, 13.1, 16.4,
19.7, 23.0, 26.2, 29.50, 32.8, 49.2, 65.6, 98.4, 164 ft). Show safety depth contours in
medium blue.

[Deep Contour]: Set the deep depth (setting range: 0.0, 3.3, 6.6, 9.8, 13.1, 16.4, 19.7,
23.0, 26.2, 29.50, 32.8, 49.2, 65.6, 98.4, 164, 328, 656, 984, 1,640 ft). Show deep-
depth contours in light blue. Depths greater than set here are shown in white.

[Text (Important)]: Show or hide the important text information.

[Text (Other)]: Show or hide the other text information.

[Display Buoy Names]: Show or hide the buoy names.

2-10
 2. CHART PLOTTER

[Display Light Description]: Show or hide the light descriptions.

[Display Light Sectors]: Show or hide light sectors for fixed beacons.

[Display Routes]: Show or hide routes.

[Display Routes Bearings]: Show or hide route bearings.

[Display Soundings]: Show or hide depth soundings.

[Display Soundings in Red]: Spot soundings whose depths are lower than the value
selected on the [Shallower than...] menu are shown in red.

[Soundings in Red up to]: Select the value for the [Display Soundings in Red] menu
(setting range: 0.0, 3.3, 6.6, 9.8, 13.1, 16.4, 19.7, 23.0, 26.2, 29.50, 32.8, 49.2, 65.6,
98.4 ft).

[Obst. Depth Below Safety]: Show or hide obstruction depths under the safety depths.

[Display Seabed]: Show or hide seabed composition indication, for example, mud,
sand, rock.

[Cautionary Areas]: Show or hide the cautionary areas that appear on the chart.

[Reset Default Settings]: Select this menu item to restore default settings for the [Vec-
tor Chart] menu.

2.9.2 Control visibility of cartographic objects in S-52 charts

The [Settings]→[S-52 Display] menu controls the visibility of S-52 cartographic ob-
jects, for example, lights and fog signals.

[S-52 Vector Chart Display Mode]: Set the level of information to show on the chart.
The selections are [Custom], [Base], [Standard], [Other], and [Fishing]. The chart fea-
tures are turned on or off according to setting.

2-11
2. CHART PLOTTER

Note: The following menu items except [Reset Default Settings] are unavailable when
you select the mode other than [Custom]

[Unknown Object]: Show or hide unknown objects that appear on the chart.
[Chart Data Coverage]: Show or hide the geographic names and geographic objects.

[Water and Seabed Features]: Show or hide the water and seabed presentation.

[Traffic Routes]: Show or hide the marine traffic routes.

[Information Areas]: Show or hide the information areas that appear on the chart.

[Buoys & Beacons]: Show or hide the buoys and beacons.

[Lights]: Show or hide the sector of light that a fixed beacon shines.
[Fog Signals]: Show or hide the structure that sends a fog signal.

[Radar]: Show or hide the radar buoy.

[Information About Chart Data]: Show or hide the chart data information.

[Obstructions]: Show or hide obstructions (wrecks, etc.)

[Depth Contours, Cur., etc]: Show or hide the depth contours, tidal currents and mag-
netics.

[Fishing Facilities]: Show or hide the location of fishing facilities.

[Services (Pilot, Signal Stations)]: Show or hide the location of pilots and signal sta-
tions.

[Harbour Facilities]: Show or hide the location of harbour facilities.

[Services and Small Craft Facilities]: Show or hide the services for ship and small craft.

[Land Features]: Show or hide the cartographic features that are shown on land.

[Reset Default Setting]: Select this menu item to restore default settings for the [S-52
Display] menu.

2-12
 2. CHART PLOTTER

2.10 Alarms
The various Chart Plotter alarms alert you (with audiovisual alarms) when the condi-
tions specified are met. These alarms are:

• Cross track error alarm • Depth alarm

• Sea surface temperature alarm • Speed alarm
• Anchor watch alarm • Wind speed alarm
• Boundary alarm (see section 4.17) • Low fuel alarm

When an alarm is generated, the name of the offending alarm appears in the status
bar (red background with yellow text) at the top of the screen and flashes. If [Alarm
Sound] ([Alarm] menu) is active, the unit beeps.

Status bar Alarm indication (ex. anchor watch alarm)

Anchor Alarm

Note: If [Sound Alarm Until Acknowledged] is set for [OFF], the unit continues to beep
until the cause of the alarm is removed.

How to open the [Alarm] menu

1. Open the home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Alarm].

2-13
2. CHART PLOTTER

2.10.1 Cross Track Error alarm

The cross track error alarm tells you when your ship goes off course by more than the
limit set (cross track error alarm boundaries).

Starting point Go to point

Alarm
setting
Intended :Alarm area
course

1. Turn on [Cross Track Error Alarm] in the [Alarm] menu.

2. From the home screen, tap [Settings] → [Routes] → [Cross Track Error Value] to
display the software keyboard.
3. Set the value, then tap [9].
4. Tap the close button to finish.
Note: To disable this alarm, turn it off at step 1 of the above procedure.

2.10.2 Depth alarm

The depth alarm tells you when the depth to the bottom is shallower than the value
you set. Requires depth data.

Note: Requires connection to appropriate sensor.

1. Turn on [Depth Alarm] in the [Alarm] menu.
2. Tap [Depth Alarm Value] to display the software keyboard.
3. Set the value, then tap [9].
4. Tap the close button to finish.
Note: To disable this alarm, turn it off at step 1 of the above procedure.

2-14
 2. CHART PLOTTER

2.10.3 SST alarm

The sea surface temperature alarms tells you when the sea surface temperature is
over, under, within, or out of range of the temperature you set. Requires a temperature
sensor.

Note: Requires connection to appropriate sensor.

1. Tap [Sea Surface Temperature Alarm] on the [Alarm] menu.

2. Tap [Over], [Under], [Within], [Out of] or [Shear]. Follow the appropriate procedure
below.

[Over] or [Under]
The [Over] or [Under] alarm sounds when the temperature is over or under the set
value, respectively.
1) Tap [Temperature Alarm Value] to display the software keyboard.
2) Set the value, then tap [9]. Go to step 3.
[Within] or [Out of]
The [Within] or [Out of] alarm sounds when the temperature is within or out of the
temperature range set, respectively.
1) Tap [Temp. Alarm Range Min Value] to display the software keyboard.
2) Set the minimum value, then tap [9].
3) Tap [Temp. Alarm Range Max Value] to display the software keyboard.
4) Set the minimum value, then tap [9]. Go to step 3.
[Shear]
The shear alarm sounds when the temperature exceeds the alarm setting for one
minute.
1) Tap [Temp. Shear Alarm Value] to display the software keyboard.
2) Set the value, then tap [9]. Go to step 3.
3. Tap the close button to finish.
Note: To disable this alarm, turn it off at step 2 of the above procedure.

2-15
2. CHART PLOTTER

2.10.4 Speed alarm

The speed alarm tells you when the speed of your ship is over or under the limit set.
Set the value at [Speed Alarm Value].

Note: Requires connection to appropriate sensor.

1. Tap [Speed Alarm] on the [Alarm] menu.
2. Tap [Over] or [Under].
3. Tap [Speed Alarm Value] to display the software keyboard.
4. Set the value for [Over] or [Under] then tap [9].
5. Tap the close button to finish.
Note: To disable this alarm, turn it off at step 2 of the above procedure.

2.10.5 Anchor watch alarm

The anchor watch alarm tells you that your ship has moved a distance greater than
the set value when the ship must not be moving.

Alarm : Alarm area

setting

Your ship's position where you

start the anchor watch alarm.

1. Turn on [Anchor Watch Alarm] in the [Alarm] menu.

2. Tap [Anchor Watch Alarm Value] to display the software keyboard.
3. Set the value, then tap [9].
4. Tap the close button to finish.
Note: To disable this alarm, turn it off at step 1 of the above procedure.

2-16
 2. CHART PLOTTER

2.10.6 Wind speed alarm

The wind speed alarm tells you when the wind speed is over or under the limit set. Set
the value at [Wind Speed Alarm Value].

1. Tap [Wind Speed Alarm] on the [Alarm] menu.

2. Tap [Apparent] or [True] as required.
[Apparent]: Triggers the alarm when the apparent wind speed exceeds the set
speed.
[True]: Triggers the alarm when the true wind speed exceeds the set speed.
3. Tap [Wind Speed Alarm Value] to display the software keyboard.
4. Set the wind speed value, then tap [9].
5. Tap the close button to finish.

2.10.7 Low fuel alarm

The low fuel alarm informs you when your fuel level drops below the setting percent-
age of fuel).

1. Turn on [Low Fuel Alarm] in the [Alarm] menu.

2. Tap [Low Fuel Alarm Value] to display the software keyboard.
3. Set the value, then tap [9].
4. Tap the close button to finish.
Note: To disable this alarm, turn it off at step 1 of the above procedure.

2.10.8 Other Alarm menu items

The followings are the alarm menu items not previously mentioned.
[Hardware Alarm]: The [OFF] setting disables hardware-related alarms.

[Notification Sound]: Activate or deactivate the notification sound (for "Waypoint

Crossing" (see section 5.10), "End of Route" (section 4.15) or fish finder alarms
(section 7.13)).
[Alarm Sound when NAVpilot is engaged]: Activate or deactivate the notification
sound when the autopilot is engaged to or disengaged from this system.

[Alarm Sound]: Disable or enable the buzzer.

[Sound Alarm Until Acknowledged ]: Turn this item on to sound the aural alarm until
an alarm is acknowledged (see subsection 2.10.9).

[Save Log File]: Save alert list to microSD card.

[Reset Default Settings]: Select this menu item to restore default settings for the
[Alarm] menu.

2-17
2. CHART PLOTTER

2.10.9 Alarms list

When an alarm is violated, you can see the name of the offending alarm on the
[Alarms] list. The list stores both warning and system messages. Open the home
screen, then tap [Lists] followed by [Alarms]. Active alarms are flashing and have a red
vertical bar at the let margin. Tap an active alarm to acknowledge it and stop the flash-
ing. After the cause of an alarm is removed, the alarm message is moved to [HISTOR-
IC] section. Tap the close button to close the list.

Message Date, time alarm generated

Depth Alarm

Color on Status bar

2.11 Track
The track (or movement) of your ship is
plotted on the screen with position data
fed from the internal GPS navigator (exter-
nal position-fixing device in case of Track
TZT19F). Your track lets you see how
your ship has moved over time.

The track is saved to the internal memory if track recording is activated. A line runs
between each track point. The internal memory stores a maximum of 30,000 track
points.

Track is saved when the power is turned off. Unnecessary track can be deleted. Track
can also be used to create a route.

2.11.1 How to start, stop recording the track

Start recording
Open the slide-out menu or tap the boat icon, then turn [Track] on.

Stop recording
Method 1: Tap the track, then tap [Stop Track].
Method 2: Open the slide-out menu, then turn [Track Recording] off.
Method 3: Tap the own boat icon, then turn [Track Rec.] off.

2-18
 2. CHART PLOTTER

2.11.2 How to show or hide the track display

Open the [Layers] menu and turn [Tracks] on or off.

2.11.3 Track recording interval

Tracks are recorded at specified time or distance intervals to the internal memory of
this unit.

A shorter interval gives a smoother, clearly reconstructed track, however the overall
distance/time that can be recorded is shorter.

When the positioning data source is one of the devices listed below, the following oc-
curs:

• TZT 3 internal GPS • SC-30

• TZT2 internal GPS v6.01 or after • SC-33
• GP-330B serial no. 4457-8875 or after • SCX-20

• tracks are plotted at very short intervals for five minutes immediately behind your
vessel, regardless of the recording interval selected, to give you a more accurate
and smooth track.

Uses your set interval setting

5 minutes
Uses very short interval
• track plotting reverts to the selected interval after the five minutes pass, or if record-
ing is stopped within the first five minutes.

For time-based intervals

1. Open the home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Ship & Track].
2. Tap [Track Interval]→[Time], then tap "<" to go back one layer in the menu.
3. Tap [Time Interval].

4. Tap a time interval.

5. Tap the close button to finish.

2-19
2. CHART PLOTTER

For distance-based intervals

1. Open the home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Ship & Track].
2. Tap [Track Interval]→[Distance], then tap "<" to go back one layer in the menu.
3. Tap [Distance Interval]. The software keyboard appears.
4. Input the desired interval, then tap [9].
5. Tap the close button to finish.

2.11.4 Track color

Track can be displayed in a single color or multiple colors. For multiple colors, you can
display the track according to one of the conditions shown below.

- Depth - SST Range

- SST Variation - Speed
- Bottom Discrimination - Depth Variation

Note: The bottom discrimination method requires a bottom discrimination capable

transducer connected to the bottom discrimination sounder BBDS1, or network
sounder DFF1-UHD.

From the home screen

1. Open the home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Ship & Track].
2. Tap [Track Color].
3. Tap [Fixed] or [Variable]. Tap "<" to go back one layer in the menu. For [Fixed],
go to the next step. For [Variable], go to step 5.
4. Tap [Fixed Color Setup] then tap a color. Go to step 10.

5. Tap [Variable Color] then tap an option.

[Depth]: Change the color of the track with depth.

[SST Range]: Change the color of the track with change in sea surface tempera-
ture.

2-20
 2. CHART PLOTTER

[SST Variation]: Change the color of the track according to variation in sea sur-
face temperature. The following is an example.
Temp. range (°F) Color Temp. range (°F) Color
16.60 to 16.80 Red 17.61 to 17.80 Orange
16.81 to 17.00 Yellow 17.81 to 18.00 Blue
17.01 to 17.20 Green 18.01 to 18.20 Red
17.21 to 17.40 Light-blue 18.21 to 18.40 Yellow
17.41 to 17.60 Purple 18.41 to 18.60 Green

[Speed]: Change the color of the track with speed.

[Bottom Discrimination]: Change the color of the track with bottom sediment.
[Depth Variation]: Change the color of the track with depth variation. The depth
at the start of track recording becomes the reference depth.
6. Tap [Variable Color Setup].
Color icon Threshold amount

For [Depth] For [SST Range] For [SST Variation]

For [Speed] For [Bottom Discrimination] For [Depth Variation]

7. For [Bottom Discrimination], tap [Mud], [Sand], [Rock] or [Gravel]. For others, tap
a color (seven choices).
8. Tap a color for each menu item.
[Depth]: Set the color for each depth range. For example, when the red icon is se-
lected in [Color 1], the track is red for depths from 5 to 10 ft.
[SST Range]: Set the color for each range of sea surface temperature. For exam-
ple, when the blue icon is selected in [Color 1] (temperature range: 10 to 15°F),
the track is blue for temperatures from 10 to 15°F.
[SST Variation]: Set the color for each temperature variation. Tap [Step 0.2°F],
then set each color. Do the same for [Step 2.0°F].
[Speed]: Set the color for each speed range. For example, when the blue icon is

2-21
2. CHART PLOTTER

selected in [Color 1], the track is blue for speed from 0 to 5 kn.
[Bottom Discrimination]: Set the color for each bottom sediment. For example,
when the blue icon is selected in [Mud], the track where mud is found is blue.
For [Depth], [SST Range], [SST Variation] and [Speed], you can change the
threshold amount for each color. Tap a threshold amount to display the software
keyboard. Set the value, then tap [9].
[Depth Variation]: Set the color for each depth variation. Tap [Step 2.0 ft], then
set each color. Do the same for [Step 20.0 ft], and [Step 200.0 ft].
Note: For [Depth] and [Speed], the track is painted in black when the respective
threshold is exceeded.
9. Tap X on the title bar to close the menu.

On the screen
1. Tap a section of track to display the pop-up menu.
2. Tap [Color].
3. Tap a color.

2.11.5 Track thickness

You can set the thickness of the track. If you are following the same track many times,
you can show the track in the thinnest width to prevent overlapping of track.

1. Open the home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Ship & Track].

2. Drag the slider at [Track Thickness] to set the level. (The thickness can also be
set with the software keyboard. Tap the keyboard in the [Track Thickness] field
then enter desired thickness.)
A setting of [1] is the thinnest; [4] is the thickest.
3. Tap the close button to finish.

2.11.6 How to create a route with past track (follow track)

You can use past track to create a route. The route is saved to the [Routes] list.

1. Tap the past track to use to create a route to show the pop-up menu.

2. Tap [Follow Track].

A route is created with past track. Points are automatically entered and arrows
(see "1" in the illustration on the next page) point in the direction of travel.
3. Enter route name, then tap [9].

2-22
 2. CHART PLOTTER

2.11.7 How to create a route with track currently being recorded

(track back)
You can create a route with track that is currently being recorded. This method can be
useful for retracing track; for example, when you need to retrieve crab pots or the like.
The route is saved to the [Routes] list.

1. Tap the current track or own ship mark to show

the pop-up menu.
2. Tap [Track Back].
3. Enter route name, then tap [9].
A route is then created as shown below.

• Points are created along the route. Arrows on

the route point in the direction of travel.
• A thick red dashed line runs between the starting
point ("1" in the figure below) and go to point ("2"
in the figure below). A solid yellow line shows the
shortest distance between current position and Pop-up menu when
go to point. track is selected
• Route points are highlighted in yellow.
• Arrival range and cross track error lines are shown.

Thick red dashed line: Course

Destination between first destination and the point
(1st waypoint) where Track Back starts.

Start point of Track Back ( 1 )

Waypoint

Cross-track
䐟
Arrows point in error lines
direction of travel
Arrival range

Yellow line: Shortest course from the

current position to the go to point
When you are following a track back route, the functions described below are avail-
able, from the pop-up menu. Tap the yellow line to display the pop-up menu. For de-
tails about each function, see chapter 5.

• [Stop Nav.]: Stop following the route.

• [Restart Nav.]: Restart following the route.
• [Insert]: Insert a waypoint.
• [Extend]: Extend a route from the last point on the route.
• [Name]: Enter a name for the route.
• [Rte Detail]: Open the [Route Detail] list.

2-23
2. CHART PLOTTER

2.11.8 How to delete tracks

If the screen becomes full of track, you can not know which is the newer track. Delete
the tracks you do not need.

How to delete a single track

Past tracks can be deleted individually. Tap the track, then select [Delete Track] from
the pop-up menu.

How to delete a specific part of a track

You can delete a track partially. Tap the part of a track to delete. Tap [Del From Here]
or [Delete Up to Here].

How to delete all tracks

1. Open the home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Ship & Track].
2. Tap [Delete All Tracks] on the [TRACK] window. The message "THIS ACTION
WILL PERMANENTLY DELETE ALL TRACK..." appears.
3. Tap [OK].
4. Tap the close button to finish.

Automatic deleting of tracks

The internal memory stores a maximum of 30,000 track points. When the memory for
track points becomes full, the equipment can automatically delete the oldest track
points to get space for new track points. To get automatic deletion of track do as fol-
lows:

1. Open the home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Ship & Track].

2. Turn [Automatic Track Deleting] on or off.
3. Tap the close button to finish.

2.11.9 How to find the number of track points used

On the home screen, tap [Settings]→[General]. Find [Track points] in the [DATA US-
AGE] section. In the example below. 15,377 track points out of 30,000 have been
used.

99/100

2-24
 2. CHART PLOTTER

2.12 Chart Plotter Menu

This section describes the [Chart Plotter] menu items, which are in the [Set-
tings]→[Chart Plotter] menu.

[Grid Interval]: Set the distance between grid lines. The options are [Off] (no lines),
[Very Small], [Small], [Medium], [Large], and [Very Large].

[Show Scale Slider]: Show or hide the scale slider.

[Tide/Current Icons Size]: Set the size of the icon for tide and current.

[Transparencies]

[NavData Transparency]: Set the degree of transparency for the navdata display.

[NavData Transparency]: Set the degree of transparency for the satellite photo over-
lay.

[Tide Range for PhotoFusion]: Set the degree of transparency for the tide range in the
satellite photo overlay.

[Tidal Currents Transparency]: Set the degree of transparency for the tidal currents
display.

2-25
2. CHART PLOTTER

[Radar Overlay]
[Radar Transparency]: Set the degree of transparency for the radar echo.

[Range Link]: Activate or deactivate matching the overlay with radar ranges.

[Echo Color]: Tap the color for the radar echo.

Depth Shading Values

[Depth Shading Transparency]: Set the degree of transparency for the depth shading
overlay.

For the menu items shown in the table, see the mentioned section.

Menu item Reference

[3D Display] See subsection 3.1.2.
• [Auto 3D Alti Exaggeration]
• [3D Alti Exaggeration]
[Depth Shading Values] See subsection 3.2.1.
• [Auto Depth Shading Color Scale]
• [Minimum Value]
• [Maximum Value]
• [Depth Color Shade]

[Restore Default Settings]: Tap this menu item to restore default settings for the [Plot-
ter Display] menu.

2.13 NAVpilot Series Auto Pilot

This section shows you to how to enable use of the NAVpilot with your system. For
how to use the NAVpilot to steer to a point, see subsection 4.15.4.

The FURUNO NAVpilot Series Auto Pilot installs in the NavNet TZtouch3 network to
get automatic steering when going to a point or a route. The following NAVpilot func-
tions can be controlled from a NavNet TZtouch3 display:

• Control operation of the NAVpilot from this equipment (see subsection 2.13.2).
• Select the NAVpilot steering mode (AUTO or NAV), referring to the NAVpilot’s Op-
erator’s Manual.
• Set up the NAVpilot (see subsection 2.13.4).
Note 1: When an alarm message for the NAVpilot appears, check the control unit of
the NAVpilot.
Note 2: To enter points or routes from your NAVpilot series Auto Pilot, see section
section 4.15.4 and section 5.11.11.

2.13.1 How to enable use of the NAVpilot

Open the [Settings]→[Routes] menu, then turn on [Navigate with AutoPilot]. When you
set a route or point as destination, the message" Do you want to navigate using the
NAVpilot?" appears.

2-26
 2. CHART PLOTTER

If [Alarm Sound when NAVpilot is Engaged] is turned on in the [Alarm] menu, a beep
sounds to tell you that the NAVpilot is engaged or disengaged. Note that the beep
sounds regardless of the [Alarm Sound] setting.

Note: The following PGN sentences should be turned on (in the [Initial Setup] menu)
to enable use of the autopilot with this system.
• 129283: Cross Track Error
• 129284: Navigation Data
• 129285: Navigation - Route/WP Information

2.13.2 How to show the NAVpilot control box in the data area
1. Tap [DATA] or [ROUTE] on the data area to select where to show the NAVpilot
control box.
2. Long-tap (single finger) a data box or an unoccupied area to select where to show
the NAVpilot control box. The [Edit NavData] menu appears.
3. Tap [Add NavData] to show the available data boxes.
4. Tap [NAVpilot] to show the NAVpilot control box in the area selected.
Note: The example figure below shows the Navpilot data box for the NAVpilot-300 se-
ries. The Turn/Menu button ( )is not shown on the NAVpilot-700 series, however
all other indications are the same.

POS

HDG
HDG

2-27
2. CHART PLOTTER

2.13.3 How to change the steering mode

You cannot switch to the window mode (NAVpilot-700 series only) or dodge mode.

Manual (stand-by) mode

The figure below shows an example of the manual (stand-by) mode.

HDG

Turn/Menu button
Shown only with connection
of NAVpilot-300.

NAV mode
Tap the manual mode screen to switch to the NAV mode. The figure below shows an
example NAV mode data box.

HDG
Point 1
Tap within this area to
switch to the manual
(stand-by) mode.

Turn/Menu button
Shown only with connection
of NAVpilot-300.

2-28
 2. CHART PLOTTER

AUTO mode
Tap [AUTO] on the manual mode to switch to the NAV mode. The figure below shows
an example AUTO mode data box.

Tap within this area to

Set course switch to the manual
(stand-by) mode.
Heading

HDG

Turn/Menu button
Shown only with connection
of NAVpilot-300.

Course setting buttons.

(Red=Port, Green=STBD)
Tap the single arrow for fine (1º) adjustments;
Tap the double arrow for step* adjustment.

* The steering step interval (2 - 30°) can be set with Home icon→[Set-
tings]→[Routes]→[NAVPilot Steering Step]. Use the slider bar or software keyboard.

Do one of the following to set course:

• Use the course setting buttons to set course.
Tap or for change in 1° increments.
Use the steering step interval buttons ( , ) to set course in step intervals.
• Tap the set course line to display the pop-up window
shown in the right-hand figure. Tap [Adjust]. Drag the Adjust
set course line to set course. Tap [Finish] to complete
the adjustment.

2-29
2. CHART PLOTTER

SABIKI mode (NAVpilot-300 only)

1. Tap the Turn/Menu button ( ) in the NAVpilot data box to show the NAVpilot
menu.
2. Tap [SABIKI Mode].

Mode

HDG

3. Use the set course buttons (see page 2-29) to change your course.

Turn mode, Fishing mode (NAVpilot-300 only)

1. Tap the Turn/Menu button ( ) in the NAVpilot data box to show the NAVpilot
menu.
2. Tap desired turn type. See the Operator’s Manual for the NAVpilot-300 for details.

2.13.4 How to change the NAVpilot settings

1. Tap the Turn/Menu button ( ) in the NAVpilot data box to show the NAVpilot
menu.
2. Tap [NAVpilot Settings] to show the NAVpilot settings menu. (Alternatively, the
screen shown below can be displayed by tapping Home icon→[Settings]→[Initial
Setup]→[NAVpilot-300(Processor)]...)

3. Change the settings as required, referring to the NAVpilot operator’s manual.

2-30
 2. CHART PLOTTER

2.14 My Friends (Social Network)

The My Friends feature marks (with a symbol), on the Plotter and Weather displays,
the locations of the vessels registered to the My Friends function (see 2.15.1). A ves-
sel must be equipped with NavNet TZ Touch 3 version 3.01 or higher, be logged into
your My TimeZero™ account and have My Friends activated. Only friends within the
WLAN range are shown.

2.14.1 How to setup My Friends

1. Open the [Settings]-[General] menu.
2. Login to your My TimeZero™ account at the [SOCIAL NETWORK] section.
3. At the [Nickname] field in the [MY FRIENDS] section, the name used to register
your My TimeZero™ account is shown. If desired you can change the name. Tap
the keyboard, then enter a name.
4. Tap [Manage My Friends] in the [MY FRIENDS] section.

Hello, John Smith

5. Tap [+ Add].
6. Enter friend’s e-mail address then tap [Send].
7. When the friend approves your invitation, The "You have xx friend" will reflect the
addition.

2.14.2 How to show or hide the My Friends display

On the chart plotter display or weather display, open the [Layers] menu, then turn [My
Friends] on or off as required.

When the My Friends display is active, the vessels that you have registered (see
subsection 2.14.1) are marked with a symbol, as shown in the figure below. Tap the
symbol to show detailed information about the vessel.

Furuno

Lat N 34°26.400’
Lon E 135°07.104’
My Friends Vessel’s data
symbol Furuno COG 179.7° (Name, geographical position,
COG, SOG)
SOG 20.0 kn

2-31
2. CHART PLOTTER

2.15 TZ iBoat Functions

With the TZ iBoat application, you can share user objects (points, routes, boundaries,
photos and catches) between your NavNet TZtouch3 and your iPad. For how to use
the application, see the manual published by Nobeltec.

Note 1: Operation of this application requires login to your My TimeZero™ account.

(see section 1.20).
Note 2: Before opening the application, connect your iPad with your wireless LAN net-
work (see section 1.19).

Creating points, routes and boundaries

Points (chapter 4), routes (chapter 5) and boundaries (chapter 4) can be entered or
created from both the iPad and your NavNet TZtouch3.

Registering catches
Catches (see "Log Catch" on page 4-4 for information) can only be entered from your
NavNet TZtouch3.

Photos
Photos taken with your iPad can be shared with your NavNet TZtouch3 and displayed
on your chart plotter screen. The photo location is shown on the plotter screen with the
photo icon ( ). For how to take a photo with your iPad, see the manual published
by Nobeltec.

2.16 Photos
Photos taken via the TZ iBoat application can georeferenced and can be displayed on
your chart plotter screen (see section 2.15).

Note: Before opening the application, connect your iPad with your wireless LAN net-
work (see section 1.19).

Importing photos
See section 9.3 for how to import photos. Imported photos appear on your plotter
screen with the photo icon ( ).

You can check how many photos are stored on your NavNet TZtouch3. Go to the
home screen, then select [Settings]→[General], then scroll the menu to show the [Da-
ta Usage] section.

At the [Photos] line, “currently saved photos” / “total available photo storage” indicates
the total number of photos versus the total available space for photos. In the following
example, a total of five photos are stored.

2-32
 2. CHART PLOTTER

Moving a photo on-screen

1. Tap the photo you want to move, then select “Move” from the displayed
pop-up menu. The move icon appears at the selected photo location,
similar to the figure shown to the right.
2. Drag and drop the icon to the new location, or tap the new location on-
screen.
3. Tap [End Move] at the top-right corner of the screen.

Viewing the photo list

From the home screen, tap [Lists]→[Photos] to show the [Photos] list.

Photo1

Photo2

Photo3
Sort buttons
Photo4

Photo5

To sort or search the list, see section 4.7.

2-33
2. CHART PLOTTER

Editing photo information

You can edit photo details from the editing screen.

Tap here to show the photo location at

the center of the Chart Plotter screen.

Editing is done with one of the following methods:

• Tap the photo icon to show the pop-up menu, then select [Edit].
• Select the photo you want to edit from the [Photos] list.
Referring to section 4.10.1, edit the coordinates, name and comment of the
photo as required.

Deleting photo information

You can delete photos with one of the methods:
• Tap the photo icon to show the pop-up menu, then select [Delete].
• Select [Delete] from the [Edit] menu.
• From the home screen tap [Settings]→[Points & Boundaries]→[Delete All User Ob-
jects]→[OK]. (See section 4.9.3 and section 5.7.3.)

2-34
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS

3.1 3D Display
The 3D display has native 3D chart design that allows full time 3D presentation. This
true 3D environment gives you all of the information you require with no restrictions on
the information you can see. You can plan your routes, enter points, etc. like on the
2D chart.

The 3D display provides a 3D view of land and sea around your ship. The 3D display
has most of the same information as the 2D display. With both presentations available
you can see the conditions around your ship from different angles. The 3D display
helps you navigate when you are in waters that you do not know. Also, most functions
of the 2D display, for example, destination setting, are available in the 3D display.

Point Boat icon

(your ship)

3D display

3-1
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS

3.1.1 How to activate the 3D display

1. To switch between the 2D and 3D displays, tap the 2D/3D switch at the bottom left
corner on the screen or drag upward/downwards as shown below. The icon is
filled in white when the 3D display is active.

Drag upwards: 2D→3D Drag downwards: 3D→2D

2. Tap the orientation mode switch to select an orientation mode.
3. Orientate the 3D display by dragging leftward or rightward with two fingers.

The 2D/3D display switch, orientation mode switch

The 2D/3D display switch alternates the 2D and 3D displays. The orientation mode
switch selects the orientation, North up or Head up. In the North up mode, North is at
0°. When you change the viewpoint on the 3D display, the orientation mode switch
shows the "North" icon. The arrow on the icon points toward North. To switch to North-
up orientation, tap the switch.

2D display: : North-up

3D display: 2D/3D Orientation

: Head-up
display mode switch
switch
: North

3-2
 3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS

3.1.2 How to make the 3D view clearer

In the 3D view, the features of the terrain can be more easily recognized by using the
emphasis function. The emphasis function has two settings, automatic and manual.
Select one following the procedure below.

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Chart Plotter].

2. Find the [3D DISPLAY] section.

3. Automatic method:
Turn on [Auto Alti 3D Exaggeration].
Manual method:
Turn off [Auto Alti 3D Exaggeration]. Use the slider or software keyboard at [3D
Alti Exaggeration] to set the exaggeration level.
High gives the highest level of exaggeration. The example below compares the
same picture in low and high exaggerations.

Low exaggeration High exaggeration

4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

3-3
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS

3.2 Overlays
Five overlays are available for the plotter display: depth shading, satellite, radar, tide
information, and tidal current.

3.2.1 Depth shading overlay

The depth shading overlay shows the depths in different color (the default settings are
red (shallow), yellow (medium) and blue (deep)). This overlay is available in both 2D
and 3D presentations. Use this overlay to find depths. To show the depth shading
overlay, open the [Layers] menu then turn [Depth Shading] on or off.

Depth shading

Minimum Maximum
value value

Manual
mode

You can turn the automatic depth shading

Auto color scale adjustment on or off (auto,
mode manual) by tapping the “A”.
Automatic mode:
Depth shading is set according to the
depth shading values set in the menu
(Settings→Plotter).
Manual mode:
1) Tap the minimum value (maximum
value) at left side (right side) of scale.
2) Drag the slider bar at right side of
screen to set value.
3) Tap [Done] to complete.

3-4
 3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS

Depth shading settings

The depth shading settings are in the [Settings]→[Chart Plotter] menu.

[Depth Shading Transparency]: Adjust the degree of transparency of the depth

shading overlay.

[Auto Depth Shading Color Scale]: Turn automatic depth shading color scale selec-
tion on or off.

[Minimum Value]: Set the minimum depth range for which to show depth shading,
with the software keyboard. This is available when [Auto Depth Shading Color Scale]
is set to [OFF].

[Maximum Value]: Set the maximum depth range for which to show depth shading,
with the software keyboard. This is available when [Auto Depth Shading Color Scale]
is set to [OFF].

[Depth Color Shade]: Select how to display the depth colors among [Classic Hue],
[Inverted Classic Hue], [Red Hue], [Blue Hue], [Green Hue] and [Yellow Hue].

Colors of the rainbow

Shades of red

3-5
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS

3.2.2 Satellite photo overlay

You can put the satellite photo for your area on the 2D and 3D displays. Open the
[Layers] menu then turn [Satellite Photo] on or off.

High resolution satellite images for the USA coastline are not provided standard, but
are available online for download at no cost. The illustration below shows the vector
chart with the satellite photo overlay.

How to set satellite photo transparency on water

You can set the degree of transparency for the satellite photo on the water.
1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Chart Plotter].
2. Find the [TRANSPARENCIES] menu, then drag the slider at [PhotoFusion Trans-
parency] to set the level (setting range: 0% to 80%).
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

3.2.3 Radar overlay

The radar overlay display puts the radar picture on the top of the navigation chart. To
display the radar overlay, open the [Layers] menu, then turn on [Radar Overlay].

3-6
 3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS

How to switch between stand-by and TX, sync overlay and radar ranges
Switch between stand-by and TX: Tap the [TX] icon at the bottom-left corner to set
the radar in transmit or stand-by state. The icon is filled in white when the radar is
transmitting; blue in stand-by.

Sync overlay and radar ranges: Open the Home screen, tap [Settings]→[Chart Plot-
ter], then turn [Range Link] ON or OFF as appropriate. With [Range Link] turned off
you can sync the ranges manually, with the Sync icon at the bottom-left corner.

TX : Stand-by
24 NM TX

TX : TX
Tap to sync radar and
overlay ranges.

How to set the level of the radar echo transparency

Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Chart Plotter]. Find the [TRANSPAREN-
CIES] menu, then drag the slider at [Radar Transparency] to set the transparency lev-
el.

How to adjust radar gain, sea, rain

The gain and sea and rain clutters can be adjusted from the navigation data display.
See sections 6.3 - 6.5.

How to select the echo color

Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Chart Plotter]→[Echo Color] ([RADAR
OVERLAY] menu). Tap [Multicolor], [Green], or [Yellow].

How to acquire a target for ARPA

A target can be acquired for ARPA. See subsection 6.28.2.

Note: The radar picture can look "out of focus" on long ranges when the range link is
active. This out of focus appearance does not indicate a problem, because it is a char-
acteristic of the digital zoom.

3-7
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS

3.2.4 Tide info overlay

Your system carries worldwide tide information, shown with tide icons, which you can
overlay on the plotter display. The tide icon ( ) appears at the locations of tidal record-
ing stations.

How to display the tide info overlay

Open the [Layers] menu, then tap [Tide Heights].

The arrow on the tide icon points upward or downward with tide direction. The tide icon
is gray and yellow according to the tide state. The tide icon is all yellow when the tide
is high completely and all gray when the tide is low completely.

Tide icon
(yellow
and/or
gray)

: Up arrow indicates the tide is going high. : Down arrow indicates the tide is going low.

: No arrow indicates no change in tide.

How to change the size of the tide icon

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Chart Plotter].
2. Drag the slider at [Tide/Current Icons Size] to set size (setting range: 50% to
150%).
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

How to show the tide information

Tap a tide icon to display the tide height graphic in a pop-
up window, an example of which is show in the right figure.

3-8
 3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS

How to display the tide graph

• Display tide graph for a tide station: Tap a tide icon then tap the pop-up window.
• Display tide graph for the tide station nearest the selected position: Tap the
desired position on the chart, then tap [Info]. If a tide station is not within 35 NM of
the location tapped, the tide graph does not appear.
• Display tide graph for the tide station nearest current position: Open the slide-
out menu or the Home screen, then tap [Tide].

Clock icon Time scale Tide height at the selected time

How to read the tide graph

• Vertical axis: Height, Horizontal axis: Time
• The information is mostly accurate under moderate weather conditions. However,
storms and weather fronts can influence forecasted tide times and heights.
• Drag the time scale at the bottom of the screen sideways then read the tide height
at the selected time (drag to the left to display the future information, right for the
past information).
• To set the time scale to the current time, tap the clock icon at the bottom left-hand
corner of the screen. The color of the clock mark turns gold.

Clock icon for the current time Clock icon other than the current time

• To exit the screen, tap the close button.

3-9
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS

3.2.5 Tidal current overlay

In North America, the tidal current data from NOAA can be overlaid on the chart plotter
screen.

How to display the tidal current overlay

Open the [Layers] menu, then turn [Tidal Currents] on. Tidal current icons (arrows) of
more than one color appear on the screen and are pointing in various directions.

Tidal current icons

Tidal current icon

The arrows point in the direction of tidal current movement. The color of the arrows
indicate the tidal current speed:
- Yellow, slow
- Orange, medium
- Red, fast

How to change the size of the tidal current icon

Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Chart Plotter]. Drag the slider at [Tide/
Current Icons Size] to set size (setting range: 50% to 150%). Tap the close button on
the title bar to finish.

How to show the tidal current information

Tap a tidal current icon to display the tidal current infor-
mation for the position selected. An example is shown
below.

3-10
 3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS

How to display the tidal current graph

Tap a tidal current icon to display the pop-up window. Tap [Graph] on the pop-up win-
dow to show the [Current] graph window

Clock icon Time scale Tidal current speed at the selected time

About the tidal current graph

• The vertical axis is the speed of the current; the horizontal axis is the time of the
current.
• The information is mostly accurate under moderate weather conditions. However,
storms and weather fronts can influence forecasted tidal current directions and
speeds.
• To see tidal current speed at a selected time, drag the time scale at the bottom of
the screen sideways then read the tidal current speed at the selected time. Drag to
the left to display the future information, right for the past information.
• To set the time scale to the current time, tap the clock icon at the bottom left-hand
corner of the screen to show the clock mark in yellow-white.

Clock icon for the current time Clock icon other than the current time

• To return to the chart plotter display, tap the Close icon at the top-right-corner of the
screen.

3-11
3. 3D DISPLAY, OVERLAYS

This page is intentionally left blank.

3-12
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4.1 About Points & Event Marks

In navigation terminology, a point is any location you mark on the chart plotter, radar,
sounder or weather display. A point can be a fishing spot, reference point or other im-
portant location. You can use a point you have entered to set as a destination.

This unit has 30,000 points (including event marks and MOB marks) into which you
can enter position information.
A point is used to mark a location. When you enter a point, it is put on the screen with
the default point icon (see section 4.5.1), as shown in the figure below.

Default point icon

(chart plotter, radar and weather displays Default point icons for
(black circle in yellow circle) fish fish finder display

The event mark marks current position. Like with a point, you can use an event mark
to set a destination.

For the TZT12F, the event mark is entered with the

EVENT/MOB key, and is marked on the screen with the
default event mark icon. See section 4.5.2.
A point or event mark is saved to the [Points] list with po-
sition, color, shape, etc. In the default setting, all points
and event marks are shown on the display Default event mark icons
You can edit points and event marks on the screen and
from the [Points] list.

Note 1: Event marks are handled the same as points.

Note 2: Points can be shared with other NavNet TZtouch3 units via LAN. Data is
shared automatically; no operation is required.

4-1
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4.2 How to Enter Points, Event Marks

4.2.1 How to enter a point (plotter and radar displays only)

Method 1: Directly on-screen
1. Tap the position on the screen where to put a point.

2. Tap [New Point] on the pop-up menu.

The default point icon is put at the position selected, and the point is saved to the
[Points] list.

Method 2: Manual input (chart plotter, radar, weather)

Open the slide-out menu, then tap [Position Entry]. The position shown is latitude/lon-
gitude of the center of the displayed area. Edit the position as required. Tap [9] to reg-
ister the point and close the keyboard.

Cursor (light blue)

Latitude and
Longitude for
displayed screen’s
center.

Position display format

Select position display
format from pull-down
menu.

Switch coordinate: Set point as

Move cursor N↔S, E↔W destination

4-2
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

Method 3: Register point on the Points list

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Lists]→[Points] to show the [Points] list.
2. Tap the [Add Point] button at top of the screen. The [Point] screen shows the lat-
itude and longitude of the point to be registered and its location (on the preview
screen).
3. Edit the point referring to section 4.10.2.
4. Tap X on the title bar to close the menu.

Method 4: Input from external equipment

External equipment (fish finder, etc.) can output points to this equipment. TLL data
(NMEA 0183 format) from the external equipment is output to this equipment via an
NMEA data converter (IF-NMEA2K2, option). The latitude and longitude position of
the point is marked with the event icon.

4.2.2 How to enter an event mark

Method 1: EVENT/MOB key (TZT12F only)
Press the EVENT/MOB key. The event mark is automatically named as “WPXXX”
(XXX=3 digit number, sequential). You can turn off automatic naming (only the icon is
shown) of a point. See section 4.12.

Method 2: Creating Events window

At the top left corner, tap the event icon to show the [Creating Events] window. Tap
desired event mark.

Event
mark

New

Method 3: Two-finger tap

An event mark can be entered by tapping the screen with two fingers. To enable this
function, open [Settings]→[General]. Set [Two Finger Tap Function] (or [Two Finger
Long Tap Function] for [Event Mark] (see section 1.16). Then, tap (long tap if the func-
tion is set up for long tap) the screen with two fingers to show the [Creating Events]
window. Tap desired mark.

4-3
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

Log Catch
You can log the specifics of a catch (species, size, weight) together with an event
mark, from the [Creating Events] window.

1. Open the [Creating Events ]window, following method 2 or method 3 in this sec-
tion, then tap [New].

Log Catch

Species

Ruler Scale
icon icon

CANCEL

2. Tap [Species] to show the [Species] list. Tap applicable species in the list.
A maximum of four species can be shown in the [Creating Events] window. When
that amount is exceeded, the eldest species is deleted from the window.
3. Tap the Ruler icon to show the software keyboard. Enter length, then tap 9 to con-
firm entry.
4. Tap the Scale icon to show the software keyboard. Enter weight, then tap 9 to
confirm entry.
5. Tap [OK] on the [Creating Events] window.
You can see the number of catches you have logged on the [DATA USAGE] section
in the [General] menu. In the example below, two catches have been logged.

4-4
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4.3 How to Display Point, Event Mark, Catch Infor-

mation
Tap a point, event mark, or catch mark to display its basic information (latitude, longi-
tude, range from own ship, bearing from own ship, depth (event mark only).

Point information Event mark information Catch information

4.4 How to Enter a Comment for an Event Mark

You can automatically attach a comment to an event mark. The comment is saved to
the [Points] list, and the default comment is [None] (no comment). To apply a com-
ment, do as follows:
1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Points & Boundaries]→[Data to Be
Recorded in Event Comment].
2. Tap an option.
[None]: No comment
[Date]: Date
[SST]: Sea surface temperature
[Date and SST]: Date and sea surface temperature
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

4-5
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4.5 Default Point, Event Mark Settings

4.5.1 Default point settings

The equipment saves a point in the shape, color and size assigned on the [Points &
Boundaries] menu. If the default point settings are not to your liking, change them as
shown in the procedure below.

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Points & Boundaries].

2. Tap [Default Point Symbol].

3. Tap required symbol, then tap [<] to return one layer in the menu.
4. Tap [Default Point Color] to show the color options for points.

5. Tap required color, then tap [<] to return one layer in the menu.

4-6
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

6. To change point size. operate the slider bar or software keyboard at [Point Size]

7. Tap [Icons Set] to select the icons set to use.

8. Select [Modern] or [Classic], referring to the figure below.

[Modern] point [Classic] point

9. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

4.5.2 Default event mark settings

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Points & Boundaries].
2. Tap [Default Event Mark 1 Symbol].

3. Tap required symbol, then tap [<] to return one layer in the menu.
4. Tap [Default Event Mark 1 Color] to show the color options for points.

5. Tap required color, then tap [<] to return one layer in the menu.

4-7
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

6. Process Event Mark 2 - 6 similar to how you processed Event Mark 1.

7. Tap the close button to close the menu
Note: If you do not require event marks 2 - 6, turn on [Record Event1 Automatically]
in the [Points & Boundaries] menu. In this case, the pop-up menu does not appear
when you register an event mark. See section 4.2.2.

4.6 How to Find Number of Points Used

Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[General]. Find [Points] in the [DATA US-
AGE] section. In the example below, 3 of 30,000 points have been used.

99/100

4-8
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4.7 Points List

All points are stored in the [Points] list. The following point data is saved for each point.

• Name • Position (latitude/longitude) • Color

• Icon • Comment • Distance from own ship

4.7.1 How to show the Points list, process points

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Lists]→[Points] to open the [Points] list.

Sort options

2. Tap the appropriate sort button at the top of the list.

How to sort points

The [Points] list can be sorted by the following methods:
[Date] Sort by date in oldest-to-newest order.
[Name]: Sort by point name in alphabet order.
[Icon]: Sort by icon shape order.
[Color]: Sort by color order.
[Range]: Sort by range from own ship from nearest to farthest.

How to search points

1) Tap the magnifying glass icon on the [Points] list to show the software key-
board.

2) Enter a search string (full name, 2 - 3 characters), then tap [9].

The [Points] list shows the matches found.

4-9
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

Search by alphabet
1) Tap [Name] if it is not already selected.
2) Tap appropriate alphabet on the list.

Tap

A search keyboard appears, with the alphabet search-able alphabet(s) colored

blue.

3) Tap the alphabet to search.

Search by icon or color:
1) Tap the [Icon] (or [Color]) button if it is not already selected.
2) Tap icon (or color).

Tap Tap

Search by icon Search by color

4-10
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

Respective search display appears.

Search by icon Search by color

3) Tap the icon (or color) to search.
The [Points] list shows the tapped icon (or color).
3. Tap the point to confirm or edit to show the Edit screen.

4. Tap the item (name, comment, color, icon) to edit. See XXX??? for how to edit
points.
5. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

4.8 How to Move Points

You can move a point by two methods, on the screen and from the [Points] list.

4.8.1 How to move an on-screen point

1. Tap the point to move, then select [Move] from the pop-up menu. The
icon shown right is put on the point.
2. Drag and drop the point to its new location.
3. Tap [End Move] at the top right-hand corner of the screen to finish.
Note: A point can be moved to the position you specify. Tap point and [Edit], then en-
ter the latitude and longitude position from the keyboard.

4-11
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4.8.2 How to move a point using the pop-up window

1. Tap the point to move to show the pop-up window. See section 4.3.
2. Tap the latitude and longitude information at the top of the window to show the
software keyboard.
3. Change the latitude and longitude as necessary, the tap [9]. The position of the
point is then centered on the screen.

4.8.3 How to move a point using the Points list

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Lists].
2. Tap [Points] to open the [Points] list.
3. Tap the point to move to show the editing window.
You can also edit the position of a point from the screen. Tap the point then tap
[Edit] on the pop-up menu.
4. Tap [Lat Lon] to display the numeric keyboard.
5. Enter the position then tap [9] to confirm.
6. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

4.9 How to Delete Points

You can delete points by two methods, on the screen and from the [Points] list

Note: The point currently set as a Goto point cannot be deleted.

4.9.1 How to delete an on-screen point

Tap the point to delete, then tap [Delete] on the pop-up menu.

4.9.2 How to delete a point from the Points list

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Lists].
2. Tap [Points] to open the [Points] list.
3. Tap the point to delete, then tap [Delete]. The point disappears from both the
screen and the [Points] list.
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

4.9.3 How to delete all points

You can delete points and routes collectively except for the points included in the ac-
tive route.

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Points & Boundaries].

2. Tap [Delete All User Objects].
3. You are asked if you are sure to delete all user objects. Tap [OK].
Note: The “Cancel” icon does not appear when deleting all points.
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

4-12
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4.10 How to Edit Points

4.10.1 How to edit an on-screen point

1. Tap the point to edit, then tap [Edit] on the pop-up window.

Note: The [ACTIONS] section changes according to route presence, absence.

This figure above shows the items available when one or more routes have been
registered.
2. To change position, tap [Lat Lon] to show the software keyboard.
Edit position

Switch coordinates
(N↔S, E↔W).

Units: Open the pull-down menu to change the position display format.

1) Tap numeric keys to enter position; tap the alphabet (N, S, E, W) to switch co-
ordinates.
2) Use the software keyboard to edit the position.
3) Repeat steps 1) - 2) to change the position.
4) Tap [9] to finish
3. To change point name, tap [Name] to show the software keyboard. See
section 1.15.
1) On the point name field, tap the alphanumeric character to change.
2) Use the software keyboard to enter alphanumeric character.
3) Repeat steps 1) - 2) to change the name.

4-13
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4) Tap [9] to finish.

4. To change point comment, tap [Comment] to show the software keyboard. After
changing the comment, tap [9] to finish.
5. To change point color, tap [Color]. Tap desired color, then tap [<] on the title bar
to go back one layer in the menu.
6. To change point icon, tap [Symbol]. Tap desired symbol, then tap [<] on the title
bar to go back one layer in the menu.
7. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

4.10.2 How to edit a point from the Points list

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Lists]→ [Points] to show the [Points] list.
2. Tap the point to edit.
3. Do steps 2 - 6 in section 4.10.1 to edit the point.
4. Tap the close button to finish.

4.11 How to Move a Point to the Screen Center

You can easily place a point at the center of the plotter display from the [Points] list.
1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Lists].
2. Tap [Points] to open the [Points] list.
3. Tap [Name], [Icon], [Color] or [Range] at the top of the list to sort the list.
4. Tap the point to find then tap [Find On Chart].
The menu closes and the selected point is put at the center of the screen on the chart
plotter display.

Note: If a split screen is in use when this procedure is initiated, the split screen is re-
placed with the full screen chart plotter display, then the point is put at the center of
the full screen display.

4.12 How to Show or Hide All Points, Points Names

Points
Open the [Layers] menu, then turn [Points] on or off.

Points names
Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Points & Boundaries]. Turn [Display
Points Names] on or off.

4-14
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4.13 How to set Point Naming Functions

In the default setup, a point or event mark is automatically assigned the name
“WPXXX” (XXX=three-digit number, sequential order, starting with 001). If you do not
need automatic numbering or you want to change the prefix “WP” to something else,
follow the procedure below.

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Points & Boundaries].

2. Turn [Automatic Naming] ON (automatic naming enabled) or OFF (automatic
naming disabled) is required.
3. To change the name prefix, tap [Automatic Naming Prefix] to show the software
keyboard.
4. Enter desired name prefix, then tap [9]
5. ×Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

4.14 How to Set Point Density

The screen can become cluttered if all points are shown. To prevent this, set point
density as shown below to limit the number of points to show.

1. On the Home screen, tap [Settings]→[Points & Boundaries]→[Point Density] to

show the following options menu.

2. Tap desired point density. [Low] is the lowest point density, and [Full] displays all
points.
3. Tap X on the title bar to close the menu.

4-15
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4.15 How to Go to a Point

Tap the point (including MOB mark) to go to among the three methods shown below.

• Select the point on the screen

• Select a position on the screen
• Select the point from the [Points] list
After you have selected a point, you can do the following.

• Restart the cross-track error (XTE) indication.

• Stop and restart Goto. (Tap the boat icon to display the pop-up menu. Tap [Stop
Nav] and [Restart Nav] respectively.)
• Set how the autopilot behaves when you reach your destination (requires connec-
tion to a NAVpilot series autopilot).
Note: Before you try to go to a point, make sure that the path to the point is clear. Make
sure to zoom your chart to check for hazards which appear on a smaller scale.

4.15.1 How to go to an on-screen point

1. Tap the desired point to show the pop-up menu.
2. Tap [Goto].

Arrival area Go to point

marker Purple line: Course
between the go to point
and the point where the
[Go To] function starts.
Yellow line: Shortest
XTE (Cross-track Error) course from the current
position to the go to point.
Boat icon (current position)

XTE lines (Red: port, Green: starboard)

How arrival is determined

Arrival area
Cross line Cross line

[Circle and Cross Line] [Circle] [Cross Line]

Ship arrives to arrival area or ship Ship arrives to Ship passes an imaginary
passes an imaginary perpendicular arrival area. perpendicular line passing
line passing through center of through center of destina-
destination waypoint. tion waypoint.

4-16
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

The following occurs:

• The Goto point is highlighted.

• A purple line and a yellow line extend from the boat icon. The purple line is the
course to follow to get to the point. The yellow line is the shortest course from the
current position to the Goto point.
• The navigation bar (provides destination information) appears at the top of the dis-
play.
Distance to Time to go to next STOP (navigation)
waypoint waypoint* button

Restart (navigation) Bearing to Targeted time of

button waypoint arrival*
* These figures are the same when navigating to a point.

For how to use the [Restart] and [STOP] buttons, see section 4.16.
• The waypoint switching method is determined according to the respective setting on
the menu. Select the format by [Settings]→[Routes]→[WPT Switch Mode]. Select
[Circle and Cross Line], [Circle] or [Cross Line].
• The XTE lines, red for port side, green for starboard side, appear. You can show or
hide these lines with [Cross Track Error Lines] in the [Settings]→[Routes] menu.
Note: If you want to be notified when you reach the Goto point (the end of a route),
turn on [End of Route Notification] in the [Routes] menu (see subsection 5.11.9). The
message "End of Route" appears when you reach the end of a route. For the arrival
timing, see subsection 5.11.5.

4.15.2 How to go to a position selected on screen

You can set a position as a point to go to without saving the point. The point is erased
when the navigation is canceled or the power is turned off.

1. Tap the position to set as the Goto point to show the pop-up menu.
2. Tap [Goto].

Arrival area Goto point

Purple line: Course between the

Goto point and the point where the
“Goto” function starts.
XTE (Cross-track Error) Yellow line: Shortest
course from the current
position to the Goto point.

XTE lines
PORT XTE line (Red), STBD XTE line (Green)

4-17
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

The following occurs:

• The Goto point is highlighted.

• A purple line and a yellow line appear on the boat icon. The purple line is the course
to follow to get to the point. The yellow line is the shortest course from the current
position to the Goto point.
• The navigation bar (provides destination information) appears at the top of the dis-
play.
Distance to Time to go to next STOP (navigation)
waypoint waypoint* button

Restart (navigation) Bearing to Targeted time of

button waypoint arrival*
* These figures are the same when navigating to a point.

For how to use the [Restart] and [STOP] buttons, see section 4.16.
• The waypoint switching method is determined according to the respective setting on
the menu. Select the format by [Settings]→[Routes]→[WPT Switch Mode]. Select
[Circle and Cross Line], [Circle] or [Cross Line].
• The XTE lines, red for port side, green for starboard side, appear. You can show or
hide these lines with [Cross Track Error Lines] in the [Settings]→[Routes] menu.
Note: If you want to be notified when you reach the Goto point (the end of a route),
turn on [End of Route Notification] in the [Routes] menu (see subsection 5.11.9). Then
the message "End of Route" appears when you reach the end of a route. For the ar-
rival timing, see subsection 5.11.5.

4-18
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4.15.3 How to go to a point selected from the Points list

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Lists]→[Points] to open the [Points] list.
2. If you need to sort the list, use one of the sort buttons at the top of the list.
3. Tap the point to use.
4. Tap [Goto].
The following occurs:

• The Goto point is highlighted in the [Points] list.

• A purple line and a yellow line appear on the point. The purple line is the course to
follow to get to the point. The yellow line is the shortest course from the current po-
sition to the Goto point.
• The navigation bar (provides destination information) appears at the top of the dis-
play.
Distance to Time to go to next STOP (navigation)
waypoint waypoint* button

Restart (navigation) Bearing to Targeted time of

button waypoint arrival*
* These figures are the same when navigating to a point.

For how to use the [Restart] and [STOP] buttons, see section 4.16.
• The waypoint switching method is determined according to the respective setting on
the menu. Select the format by [Settings]→[Routes]→[WPT Switch Mode]. Select
[Circle and Cross Line], [Circle] or [Cross Line].
• The XTE lines, red for port side, green for starboard side, appear. You can show or
hide these lines with [Cross Track Error Lines] in the [Settings]→[Routes] menu.
Note: If you want to be notified when you reach the Goto point (the end of a route),
turn on [End of Route Notification] in the [Routes] menu (see subsection 5.11.9). Then
the message "End of Route" appears when you reach the end of a route. For the ar-
rival timing, see subsection 5.11.5.

4-19
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4.15.4 How to use the NAVpilot to steer to a point

When you select a point to follow and a FURUNO NAVpilot is engaged and activated
in the system, the message "DO YOU WANT TO NAVIGATE USING THE NAVPI-
LOT?" appears. Tap [Yes] to have the NAVpilot steer the vessel, then the NAVpilot
automatically goes into the NAV mode.

For the NAVpilot-300, you are asked to select a navigation mode. Select [Precision]
or [Economy]. ([Cancel] stops the NAV mode.) After selecting a mode, the NAVpilot-
300 automatically goes into the NAV mode.

Precision mode: Keeps XTE within 0.01 NM

Economy mode: Keeps XTE within 0.03 NM

Note: The example figure below shows the NAVpilot’s display in the NAV mode. See
section 2.13.3 for details.

Bow
Point 1

Turn/Setting
Appears when NAVpilot-300
is engaged.

4.15.5 How to display the point information for the active Goto point
1. Tap the yellow line that runs between own ship and the
Goto point to show the pop-up menu. Note that the pur-
ple line can also be tapped to show the pop-up menu.

2. Tap [Detail] to show the [Route Detail] window.

3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

Description of Route Detail window

Colored vertical bars: The bars at the left edge of the screen are colored according
to the status of the Goto point.
Gray: Starting point
Yellow: Goto point

4-20
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

[ID]: Point no. ([Start] or [Goto])

[BTW]: Bearing to Goto point
[SPEED]: Speed to Goto point
[DISTANCE]: Distance from starting point
[TOTAL]: Total distance from start to Goto point
[TTG]: Time to go to the Goto point, using speed shown in [SPEED] column.*
[TOTAL]: The time from start to the Goto point.*
* Calculated by the value in the [SPEED] column.

4.16 How to Restart or Cancel Navigation to a Point

4.16.1 How to restart navigation to a point

When you go to a point, you can restart the
Line 2 (restart)
navigation to the point from the current loca-
tion.

When you steer to keep away from an obstruc-

tion or the ship drifts, you go off course as
shown in Line 1 in the figure. If you do not need Line 1
to return to the original course, you can go to Obstacle
the point from the current position as shown in Original course
Line 2 in the figure.

You can restart navigation by two methods:

From navigation bar

Tap the [Restart] button in navigation bar.

From the pop-up menu

1. Tap the purple line or the yellow line of the route to display the pop-up menu.
2. Tap [Restart]. The route start position for the route moves to the current position.

4.16.2 How to cancel navigation to a point

From navigation bar
Tap the [STOP] button in navigation bar.

From the pop-up menu

1. Tap the purple line or the yellow line of the route to display the pop-up menu.
2. Tap [Stop Nav]. The route start position for the route moves to the current position.
The set course, yellow line, XTE lines, arrival area, and the navigation bar are erased
from the screen.

From the slide-out menu

Open the slide-out menu, then tap [Stop Nav].

4-21
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4.17 Boundaries
Boundaries can be marked anywhere on the chart plotter screen, and can be used to
denote net position, avoidance areas, etc. Boundaries can be shown or hidden and
edited. Additionally, an audiovisual alarm can be set to alert when your vessel ap-
proaches a boundary.

Boundaries created with TIMEZERO Marine Software can be imported.

4.17.1 How to create a boundary

A boundary is available in three forms: area, circle, line. A boundary can be stored in
the unit as a screenshot and shared on a “cloud” (internet connection required) and
the local network.

Method 1: How to create a boundary on the screen

1. Tap the location where you want to place a boundary.
2. Tap [New Boundary] on the pop-up window.
3. Tap [Area], [Circle] or [Line] as appropriate. An icon cor-
responding to the boundary type selected appears at
the location selected at step 1.
4. Do one of the following depending on the boundary type
selected.
Area boundary
1) Tap the location for the next point of the area. A yellow line runs between the
1st location and the 2nd.
2) Tap the location for the next point of the area.
Repeat this step to complete the area. You can drag an icon to change the po-
sition of a point.

Point #3

Point #2
Point #4
(ending point)

Point #1
(starting point)

3) After selecting the ending point, tap [End Boundary] at the top-right corner.

4-22
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

Circle boundary
1) Tap the location for the circle area. A yellow circle appears with circle resizing
icons. Drag the icons to change the location and radius of the circle.

Resize icon
Drag to resize the
radius of circle. Reposition icon
Drag to reposition
the circle.
2) After arranging the circle, tap [End Boundary] at the top-right corner.
Line boundary
1) Tap the location for the next point of the area. A yellow line runs between the
1st location and the 2nd.
2) Tap the location for the next point of the area.
Repeat this step to complete the area. You can drag an icon to change the po-
sition of a point.

Point #1
(starting point) Point #3 Point #5
(ending point)
Point #2
Point #4

3) After selecting the ending point, tap [End Boundary] at the top-right corner.
The boundary line is placed at the center of the screen.

Method 2: How to create a boundary from the Boundaries list

1. On the Home screen, tap [Lists]→[Boundaries] to show the [Boundaries] list.
2. At the top of the screen, tap [Add Area] or [Add Line] depending on the type of
boundary you want to make.
3. Use the software keyboard to enter the latitude and longitude position of the start-
ing point, then tap [9].
The point entered at center of the preview screen.
4. Tap[ Add Point].
5. Enter the latitude and longitude position of the next point, then tap [9].
Repeat this step to complete the boundary.
6. Tap [<] on the title bar to go back one layer in the menu.
7. Refer to section 4.17.5 to edit the boundary.
8. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

4.17.2 How to show or hide all boundaries

On the Layers menu, turn [Boundaries] [ON] or [OFF].

4-23
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4.17.3 How to set default boundary attributes

You can set the color, line type and transparency of boundaries on the [Points &
Boundaries] menu.

1. On the Home screen, tap [Settings]→[Points & Boundaries]. Scroll to find the
[BOUNDARIES] section.

2. Tap [Default Boundary Color].

3. Tap the color desired, then tap [<] on the title bar to go back one layer in the menu.
4. To change boundary transparency, adjust the slider bar at [Default Boundary
Transparency].
5. Tap [Default Boundary Contour].

6. Tap the line type desired.

7. Tap the close button at the top of the screen to finish.

4-24
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4.17.4 Boundaries list

Boundaries are stored on the [Boundaries] list. From the list you can find information
about boundaries and edit boundaries. The following data is stored for each boundary
created.

• Boundary name
• Boundary comment
• Boundary color
• Boundary line type
• Boundary transparency
• Alarm status
• Distance from own ship
• Boundary latitude and longitude position (circle only)
• Boundary radius (circle only)

How to display the Boundaries list

1. On the home screen, tap [Lists]→[Boundaries] to show the [Boundaries] list.

Sort methods

2. To sort the list, do as shown below.

List sorting methods

[Date]: Sort by date
[Name]: Sort by name
[Color]: Sort by color
[Range]: Sort by range from own ship

4-25
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

How to search boundaries

Boundaries can be searched by entering name, alphabet and color.

Search by name
1) Tape the magnifying glass at the top of the screen.

2) Enter the name (2-3 characters) of the boundary to search for, then tap [9].
Boundaries matching the name entered appear in the list.
Search by alphabet
1) Tap [Name] at the top of the list.
2) Tap the alphabet to search.

Tap

The alphabet search screen appears, showing, in blue, the alphabets avail-
able for search.

3) Tap the alphabet to search.

The list is sorted with the alphabet selected at the top of the screen.

4-26
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

Search by color
1) Tap [Color] at the top of the list.
2) Tap the color to search.

Tap

The color search screen appears, showing the colors available for search. The
alphabets under which boundaries are stored are shown in blue.

3) Tap the color to search.

The list is sorted with the color selected at the top of the screen.

4-27
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

3. To find information about a boundary or edit a boundary, tap the boundary entry
in the list.

Edit screen for Area, Line boundary

Edit screen for Circle boundary

4. Tap respective item (Latitude, Longitude circle only), Radius (circle only), Name,
Comment, Color, Contour, Transparency to change its data.
5. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

4-28
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4.17.5 How to edit an on-screen boundary

On-screen boundaries can be edited as shown in this section.

Note: The entire area boundary must be present on the display in order to display it.
Zoom to fit the boundary within the screen.
1. Tap the boundary to edit to show the pop-up menu.

2. Tap [Edit] to show the Edit screen.

Edit screen for Area, Line boundary

Edit screen for Circle boundary

Go to step 3 to edit a circle, or go to step 7 to edit a line or area.

3. To change circle position, tap [Lat Lon].
4. Use the software keyboard to enter new position, then tap [9].
5. To change circle radius, tap [Radius].

4-29
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

6. Use the software keyboard to enter new radius, then tap [9].
7. To change the name, tap [Name].
8. Enter new name, then tap [9].
9. To change the comment, tap [Comment].
10. Enter new comment, then tap [9].
11. To change the color, tap [Color].
12. Tap color desired, tap [9], then tap [<] on the title bar to go back one layer in the
menu.
13. To change line type, tap [Contour].
14. Tap line type desired, tap [9], then tap [<] on the title bar to go back one layer in
the menu.
15. To change boundary transparency, tap [Transparency].
16. Adjust the slider bar at [Transparency], or enter desired value with the software
keyboard at [Transparency].
17. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

4.17.6 How to add a point to a boundary

You can add points to a line or area type boundary.
1. Tap the boundary to which you want to add a point(s).
2. Tap [Edit Points] on the pop-up menu.
Icons appear on the boundary.
3. Tap the position where to add a point, and an icon appears at that position. If nec-
essary, drag the icon to reposition the new point.
4. Tap [End Boundary] at the top-right corner to finish.

4.17.7 How to move a point on a boundary

You can move a point on a boundary by two methods, on-screen and on the [Bound-
aries] list.

How to move an on-screen point

1. Tap the boundary to which you want to add a point(s).
2. Tap [Edit Points] on the pop-up menu.
Icons appear on the boundary.
3. For area or line type boundary: Drag the icon to new location.
For circle boundary: Drag the “resize” or “relocate” icon to new location.
4. Tap [End Boundary] at the top-right corner to finish.

How to move a point from the Edit screen

1. Tap the boundary to which you want to add a point(s).
2. Tap [Edit] on the pop-up menu to show the Edit menu.
3. Tap [Edit Points] to show the [Boundary Detail] screen.
4. Tap the point whose position you want to change to show the [Position] screen.
5. Tap [Lat Lon] to show the software keyboard.

4-30
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

6. Use the software keyboard to enter new position, then tap [9].
7. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

4.17.8 How to delete a point from a line or area boundary

You can delete a point from a line or area boundary.

1. Tap the line or area boundary to process.

2. Tap [Edit Points] on the pop-up menu.
Icons appear on the boundary.
3. Tap the icon belonging to the point to delete, then tap the [Delete] indication.
4. Tap [End Boundary] at the top-right corner to finish.

4.17.9 How to set an alarm for a boundary

How can get an audiovisual alarm when your vessel approaches a boundary within
the specified distance.

1. Open the [Alarm] menu, then find and set [Own Ship Alarm Zone] to [ON].
2. Tap [Own Ship Alarm Zone Warning] to show the software keyboard.
3. Enter the distance for the alarm, then tap [9]. When your vessel is within this dis-
tance to the boundary, the audiovisual alarm is released.
4. Tap the close button on the title bar.
5. On the chart plotter tap the boundary for which you want to get the alarm, and a
pop-up menu appears.
6. Turn [Alarm] to [ON]. Note that the alarm for a boundary can be turned on/off from
the Edit screen.
When your vessel is within the distance set at step 3, a black dashed black line
runs between the boat icon and the boundary as shown in the figure below.

Boundary (area type)

䟿

Bow
Notification icon

COG 250m Range and bearing from

12.5° own ship to the boundary

Black dashed line

A black dashed line runs between
the boat icon and the notification
icon. This line shows the shortest
distance between your vessel and
the boundary.

Boat icon (current position)

• The status bar at the top of the screen shows the message “Near Alarm Zone:
Area” (or Circle, or Line), and the audio alarm sounds. The audio alarm can be
silenced by tapping the status bar.

4-31
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

• The boundary is highlighted.

• A dashed black line runs between the boat icon and the notification icon. This
line shows the shortest distance between own ship and the boundary.
• The range and bearing to the boundary are overlaid on the black line.
• If the Data box has the item [Boundary Alarm Zone], the distance to the bound-
ary appears in the Data box, like the example shown below.

Nearest Zone

4.17.10 How to find the number of boundary points used

Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[General]. Find [Areas & Lines] and [Cir-
cles] in the [DATA USAGE] section. In the example below, three areas/lines and two
circles have been used.

4.17.11 How to display a boundary at the screen center

Do the following to move a boundary to the screen center.

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Lists]→[Boundaries] to show the [Boundaries]

list.
2. Tap the boundary that you want to place at the screen center.
3. Tap [Find on Chart].
The chart plotter display appears, with the selected boundary at the screen center.

4.17.12 How to delete boundaries

How to delete an on-screen boundary
Tap a boundary line to show the pop-up menu. Tap [Delete] to delete the line from the
screen.

How to delete a boundary on the Boundaries list

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Lists]→[Boundaries].
2. Tap the boundary to delete.
3. Tap [Delete].

4-32
 4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

4. Tap the close button on the title bar to close the menu.

How to delete all boundaries

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Points & Boundaries]→
2. Tap [Delete All User Objects]. The message "THIS ACTION WIL DELETE PER-
MANENTLY ALL USER OBJECTS. ARE YOU SURE TO CONTINUE?" appears.
3. Tap [OK].
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to close the menu.

4-33
4. POINTS, BOUNDARIES

This page is intentionally left blank.

4-34
5. ROUTES

5.1 What is a Route?

In order to sail from one point to another, it is necessary to change the course several
[Link] line that connects any two points on a journey is called a “leg” and the total
legs on a journey is called a “route”. When you steer along a route, your NavNet TZ-
touch3 automatically switches to the next point on the route, and provides information
for steering, such as direction and distance to a point.

The equipment can store a maximum of 200 routes, with a maximum of 500 points per
route. With many routes on-screen, the display can become cluttered. To prevent this,
Inactive routes are collapsed and marked with the "sleeping route" icon, pictured be-
low.

Once you have created a route, you can “navigate” along that route. The route used
for navigation is called the “active route”. During route navigation, the route leg cur-
rently being navigated is displayed as a solid purple line with several moving arrows
that move in the direction to follow. Route legs which have been navigated are marked
with a light gray line.

On-screen routes can be edited from the pop-up menu. The following editing features
are available:

• Insert route points in a route

• Move route points in a route
• Delete route points from a route
• Extend a route
• Find information about a route
• Delete a route
• Restart navigation after setting new course
• Follow a route in the reverse direction
Note: Active routes can be shared with other NavNet TZtouch3 units via LAN. Data is
shared automatically; no operation is required.

5-1
5. ROUTES

5.2 How to Create a Route

5.2.1 How to create a route by selecting positions

1. On the chart plotter screen, tap the location for the 1st
point in the route to display the pop-up menu.

2. Tap [New Route]. The flag mark ( ) appears on the se-

lected position and the route information box appears (at
the top of the screen).
3. Tap the next route point in the route. A light-blue line with
arrow runs between the previous route point and the next
route point. The arrow points in the direction of route
flow.
4. Tap the next route point in the route.
Repeat this step to enter all route points. The route infor-
mation box shows the point’s range and bearing, the dis-
tance to final destination, and the time-to-go to the last
point.

Navigation bar
- RNG: Range between last two points - DTA: Distance to arrival
- BRG: Bearing between last two points - TTA: Time to arrival

Route name Route point (The number

indicates the order of entry.) Distance and bearing
between two points

Route leg
1st route point
(starting point) Drag and drop to change
location of point
5. At the last route point, tap [End Route] at the top right-hand corner of the screen
to complete the route.
6. The window for entering route name appears. Enter route name, then tap [9] to
confirm. The route information box shows, to the last waypoint, the range, time-to-
go, estimated time of arrival, and SOG.
Note 1: The route created above is called an "inactive route". When you create a new
route or tap another route, that route becomes a "sleeping route".

RTE 2018-01-01

Inactive route Sleeping route

Note 2: The points used to create a route by the above method are not saved to the
[Points] list.

5-2
 5. ROUTES

5.2.2 How to create a route with points

You can create a route with points (including event marks) you have previously en-
tered.

1. Tap a point to display the pop-up menu.

2. Tap [New Route]. The flag mark as below appears on
the point. The flag mark appears on the selected posi-
tion and the route information box appears (at the top of
the screen).

3. Tap the point to be the next route point. A light-blue line

with arrow runs between the previous point and the next
route point. The arrow points in the direction of route
flow.
4. Tap the point to be the next route point.
Repeat this step to enter all route points. The route information box shows the
point’s range and bearing, the distance to final destination, and the time-to-go to
the last point.
Navigation bar
- RNG: Range between last two points - DTA: Distance to arrival
- BRG: Bearing between last two points - TTA: Time to arrival

Route name Distance and bearing

between two points

1st route point Route leg

(starting point)
Drag and drop to change
location of point
5. At the last route point, tap [End Route] at the top right-hand corner of the screen
to complete the route.
6. The window for entering route name appears. Enter route name then tap [9] to
confirm. The route information box shows, to the last waypoint, the range, time-to-
go, estimated time of arrival, and SOG.
Note: The route created above is called an "inactive route". When you create a new
route or tap another route, that route becomes a "sleeping route".

Inactive route Sleeping route

5-3
5. ROUTES

5.2.3 How to create a route from the Points list

1. Go to the Home screen, the tap [Lists]→[Points].
2. Tap the point to be the first point in the route.
3. Tap [Add to Route], the tap [<] on the title bar to return one layer in the list.
4. Repeat steps 2-3 to enter all required points. The route is drawn on the preview
screen on the right-hand side.
5. Tap the close button on the title bar to close the [Points] list.

5.3 How to Edit a Route

5.3.1 How to insert a route point on a route

You can insert a new route point on a route leg as follows.

1. Tap a position on a route leg where to insert a route

point.
2. Tap [Insert] on the pop-up menu. The compass symbol
marks the position selected. The route point is num-
bered according to its position in the route, and the suc-
ceeding route points are renumbered.

3. Tap [End Move] at the top right-hand corner of the screen.

5-4
 5. ROUTES

5.3.2 How to move a route point on a route

You can move a route point on a route as follows.

1. Tap a route point on a route to display the pop-up menu.

For example, point #3 in the figure below will be moved.

2. Tap [Move]. The selected route point is highlighted.

3. Move the route point to the new position by dragging the route point or tapping the
new position.

4. Tap [End Move] at the top right-hand corner of the screen.

5.3.3 How to delete a point (incl. route point) on a route

You can delete a point on a route.

1. Tap the point to show the pop-up menu.

2. Tap [Delete]. The selected point is deleted, and the succeeding route points are
renumbered.
Note: If the point tapped at step 1 is a point icon, only the point icon is erased. To
erase the route point, do steps 1 and 2 again.

5.3.4 How to extend a route

You can extend a route from the last route point on the route.

1. Tap a route leg to display the pop-up menu.

2. Tap [Extend].
3. Tap a position. A light-blue line with arrow runs from the last route point to the se-
lected position.
4. Repeat step 3 to enter more route points, if necessary.
5. At the last route point, tap [End Route] at the top right-hand corner of the screen
to complete the route and save the route to the [Routes] list.

5-5
5. ROUTES

5.4 Routes List

The created routes are stored in the [Routes] list, where you can edit or see the route
data. The list stores the following route data for each route:

• Name of route
• Total distance of route
• Color of route
• Comment for route
• Each number of each route point
• Bearing to steer
• Planning route speed (see section 5.15)
• Distance between legs and total distance
• TTG between legs and total TTG

How to open the Routes list

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Lists]→[Routes] to open the [Routes] list.

Route search buttons

2. To search the list, follow the applicable procedure below.

5-6
 5. ROUTES

How to search routes

Routes can be searched by name, alphabet, color, length, and range.
Search by name
1) Tap the magnifying glass icon at the top of the screen to show the software
keyboard.

2) Enter search string (route’s full name, or 2-3 characters), then tap [9].
The route searched appears in the [Routes] list.
Search by alphabet
1) Confirm that the sort method is selected to [Name].
2) Tap the appropriate alphabet in the list.

Tap

The search keyboard appears, with the search-able alphabets shown in blue.

3) Tap the alphabet to search.

5-7
5. ROUTES

Search by color
1) Confirm that the sort method is selected to [Color].
2) Tap the appropriate route color.

Tap

The color search display appears.

3) Tap the color to search. The routes corresponding to the color tapped appear
in the [Routes] list.
3. Tap a route to find detailed information or to edit the route.

4. Tap the applicable item ([Name], [Length], [From], [To], [Color],[ Comment]) to edit
its content.

5-8
 5. ROUTES

5. To find detailed information about a route, tap [Route Detail] to show route details.

Vertical bar

[ID]: Point no. ([Start] or [Goto])

[BTW]: Bearing to Goto point
[SPEED]: Speed to Goto point
[DISTANCE]: Distance from starting point
[TOTAL]: Total distance from start to Goto point
[TTG]*: Time to go to the Goto point, using speed shown in [SPEED] column.
[TOTAL]*: The time from start to the Goto point.
* Shown only when navigating a route
Note: Detailed information can also be displayed as follows:
• From the Home screen, tap [Lists]→[Planning Route Detail].
• Tap an on-screen route, then tap [Edit]→[Route Detail] on the pop-up menu.

6. To edit a route from the [Route Detail] screen, tap the point to edit.

[Lat Lon]: Edit the latitude and longitude position of the point.
[Name]: Change the name of the point.
[Start Nav]: Start navigation from the point selected.
[Find on Chart]: Show the route of the selected point at the center of the chart plot-
ter display.
[Delete]: Delete the selected point. Control is returned to the [Route Detail] screen
and the points of the route are re-numbered.
7. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

5-9
5. ROUTES

5.5 How to Find Number of Routes Created

Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[General]. Find [Routes] in the [DATA
USAGE] section. In the example below, 10 routes out of 200 have been created.

5.6 How to Find a Route on the Chart

You can easily find the location of a route from the [Routes] list. The selected route is
put at the center of the active plotter display.

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Lists].

2. Tap [Routes] to open the [Routes] list.
3. Tap a route then tap [Find On Chart] from the options. The menu closes then the
selected route is put at the center of the plotter display.
Note: If a split-screen chart plotter display is in use when searching for a route on the
chart, the full-screen chart plotter display is restored and the route appears at the cen-
ter of the screen.

5.7 How to Delete a Route

You can delete routes individually or collectively. An active route cannot be deleted.

5.7.1 How to delete a route on the screen

Tap a route leg of the route to delete to show the pop-up menu, then tap [Delete].

Note: A route currently selected for navigation cannot be deleted.

5.7.2 How to delete a route from the Routes list

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Lists]→[Routes].
2. Tap the route to delete then tap [Delete]. The route disappears from both the
screen and the [Routes] list.

5-10
 5. ROUTES

3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

5.7.3 How to delete all routes

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Points].
2. Tap [Delete All Points & Routes] menu.
3. You are asked if you are sure to delete all routes (and points). Tap [OK].
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

5.8 How to Show or Hide All Routes

All routes (including the route information box) can be shown or hidden. Open the
[Layers] menu, the turn [Routes] on or off as required.

Note 1: An active route cannot be hidden from the screen unless route following is
stopped.
Note 2: Inactive routes can be placed at either the arrival or departure location. Open
the Layers menu, then activate [Departure] or [Arrival] (below the [Routes] flipswitch).

5.9 How to Set Route Density

If you display all your routes, the screen can become cluttered with routes. To prevent
this, set route density as shown below to limit the number of routes to show.

1. On the Home screen, tap [Settings]→[Routes]→[Routes Density] to show the fol-

lowing options menu.

2. Tap desired route density. [Low] is the lowest route density, and [Full] displays all
routes.
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to close the menu.

5-11
5. ROUTES

5.10 How to Follow a Route

Before you follow a route, make sure that the path to the route is clear. Make sure to
zoom your chart to check for hazards that do not appear on a smaller scale.

5.10.1 How to follow an on-screen route

1. Tap a route leg of the route to follow to show the pop-up menu.
2. Tap [Start Nav]. The route now looks something like the one show in the figure
below.

Arrow points in direction

Arrival area to follow route Route leg (purple line)

Boat icon Set course to next point XTE line

(current position) (light-purple) Red: port
Green: starboard

The following occurs:

• The color of the route becomes purple, and arrows on the route point in the direction
in which to follow the route.
• The Goto point (1st route point) is highlighted.
• A solid purple line with arrows connects between current position and the points on
the route. This line indicates the set course. A solid yellow line runs between runs
between current position and the destination. This line shows the shortest distance
to the destination.
• Points are switch according the waypoint switching mode set on the menu. To se-
lect the mode, go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Routes]→ [WPT Switch
Mode]. Select [Circle and Cross Line], [Circle], or [Cross Line] as appropriate.
• The XTE lines, red for port side, green for starboard side, appear. You can show or
hide these lines and set their width with [Display XTE Lines] and [XTE Value] re-
spectively in [Routes] menu.
Note: If you want to be notified when you reach a Goto point, turn on [Waypoint Cross-
ing Notification] on [Routes] of the menu (see subsection 5.11.8). Then the message
"Waypoint Crossing" appears when you reach a Goto point. For the arrival timing, see
subsection 5.11.5.

5-12
 5. ROUTES

5.10.2 How to follow a route selected from the Routes list

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Lists]→[Routes].
2. Tap the route to follow then tap [Goto].
The following occurs:

• The color of the route becomes purple, and arrows on the route point in the direction
in which to follow the route.
• The Goto point (1st route point) is highlighted.
• A solid purple line with arrows connects between current position and the points on
the route. This line indicates the set course. A solid yellow line runs between runs
between current position and the destination. This line shows the shortest distance
to the destination.
• Points are switch according the waypoint switching mode set on the menu. To se-
lect the mode, go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Routes]→ [WPT Switch
Mode]. Select [Circle and Cross Line], [Circle], or [Cross Line] as appropriate.
• The XTE lines, red for port side, green for starboard side, appear. You can show or
hide these lines and set their width with [Display XTE Lines] and [XTE Value] re-
spectively in [Routes] menu.
Note: If you want to be notified when you reach a Goto point, turn on [Waypoint Cross-
ing Notification] in the [Routes] menu (see subsection 5.11.8). Then the message
"Waypoint Crossing" appears when you reach a Goto point. For the arrival timing, see
subsection 5.11.5.

5.10.3 How to start navigation from a route point

1. Tap the route point of the route from where to start navigation. The pop-up menu
appears; tap [Start Nav] on the pop-up menu.
2. Tap [Start Nav].
In the example figure below, route point “3” was tapped.

After tapping a route point, the following occurs:

• The route point "3" is selected to start navigation from, and is highlighted. Route
points other than No. 3 are connected with a purple line. The arrows on the route
point in the direction of route flow.
• The line between route points 1 and 2 and 2 and 3 are greyed out.

5-13
5. ROUTES

• A solid purple line with arrows connects between current position and the points on
the route. This line indicates the set course. A solid yellow line runs between runs
between current position and the destination. This line shows the shortest distance
to the destination.
• The arrival area marker appears if activated on the menu (see subsection 5.11.5).
• The XTE lines, red for port side, green for starboard side, appear. You can show or
hide these lines and set their width with [Display XTE Lines] and [XTE Value] re-
spectively in [Routes] menu.
Note 1: If you want to be notified when you reach a Goto point, turn on [Waypoint
Crossing Notification] in the [Routes] menu (see subsection 5.11.8). Then the mes-
sage "Waypoint Crossing" appears when you reach a Goto point. For the arrival tim-
ing, see subsection 5.11.5.
Note 2: You can also start navigating a route from any location on a route leg. Tap
anywhere on a route leg to show the pop-up menu, then tap [Start from Here] to have
that location become the destination.

5.10.4 How to show the detailed information about a route

1. Tap a route leg of the route to show the pop-up menu.
2. Tap [Detail] to show the [Route Detail] window.

3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

About the Route Detail window

The colored bars at the left edge of the window denote the status of each route point.
Gray: A route point already transited.
Yellow: The route point your vessel is currently heading toward.
Purple: Route points other than the current destination.

[ID]: [Start], or route point number

[BTW]: Bearing To Waypoint
[SPEED]: Speed used to calculate route details
[DISTANCE]: Distance to waypoints
[TOTAL]: Total distance of route
[TTG]: Time to Go between each route point*
[TOTAL]: Total time to go from start*
* Calculation based on [SPEED] value.

5-14
 5. ROUTES

5.11 Operations Available When You Follow a Route

5.11.1 How to restart navigation

When you follow a route, you can restart the
navigation to the next route point on the route Line 2
from current location.

When you steer to keep away from an ob-

struction or the ship drifts, you go off course
as shown in Line 1 in the figure. If you do not Line 1
need to return to the original course, you can Obstacle
go to the route point from the current position Original course
as shown in Line 2 in the figure.

There are two methods two restart navigation:

From the navigation bar

Tap the [Restart] button.

From the pop-up window

1. Tap a route leg, route course or the “shortest distance” line (yellow) to show the
pop-up window.
2. Tap [Restart].
The route start position for the route moves to the current position.

5.11.2 How to follow a route in the reverse direction

You can follow a route in reverse order. This helps you return along the same path.

Note: This function is not available for an active route.

1. Tap the route that you want to transverse in the opposite order to show the pop-
up window.
2. Tap [Reverse].
The arrows on the route legs are in reverse direction and the numbers of the route
points are in reverse order.

5.11.3 How to stop following a route

From the navigation bar
Tap the [STOP] button.

From the pop-up window

1. Tap a route leg, route course or the “shortest distance” line (yellow) to show the
pop-up window.
2. Tap [Stop Nav].
The arrival area, XTE lines, set course (purple line) and yellow line are erased
from the screen. The default color for the route is restored.
Note: You can also stop following a route from the Slide-out menu, with [Stop Nav].

5-15
5. ROUTES

5.11.4 How to skip a point on a route

You can skip a route point to go to the succeeding route point in the route. Open the
Slide-out menu, the tap [Route] and [Skip Next]. The current route point is skipped
then the next route point becomes the destination. The skipped route point is greyed
out.

5.11.5 Waypoint switching mode

When you arrive to a route point, your unit automatically changes to the next route
point according to the waypoint switching mode selected on the menu.

[Cross Line]: Change the waypoint when the ship moves through an imaginary cross
line (vertical line) that passes through the center of the destination point.
[Circle]: [Circle]: Change the waypoint when the ship comes within the circle.
[Circle and Cross Line]: Change the waypoint when one of the above two conditions
is met.

Arrival area
Cross line The value for the circle Cross line
radius is set in [Switching
Circle Radius].

[Circle and Cross Line] [Circle] [Cross Line]

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Routes]→[WPT Switch Mode].

2. Tap [Circle and Cross Line], [Circle] or [Cross Line]. For [Circle and Cross Line] or
[Circle], go to step 3. For [Cross Line], go to step 6.
3. Tap [<] on the title bar to go back one layer in the menu.
4. Tap [Switching Circle Radius] to show the software keyboard.
5. Enter the radius for the circle, then tap [9]
6. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

5.11.6 How to automatically zoom a route

You can get automatic range change after you have moved past the Goto point. Use
this feature to find the next Goto point in the route when the next Goto point is not with-
in the current display range.

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Routes].

2. Turn [Route Auto Zoom] on or off.
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

5-16
 5. ROUTES

5.11.7 XTE lines

The color of the XTE line is red for the port side, green for the
starboard side. You can show or hide these lines and set their
distance from own ship as follows.

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Routes].

2. Turn [Cross Track Error Lines] on or off. For [ON], go to the
next step. For [OFF], tap the close button on the title bar to
finish.
3. Tap [Cross Track Error Value] to display the software key-
board. XTE lines
(Red: port,
4. Set the distance of the XTE lines from your ship then tap [9]. Green: starboard)
The XTE alarm sounds (if active) when your ship veers off
course by the amount set here.
5. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

5.11.8 Waypoint arrival notification

The waypoint arrival notification feature releases audio and visual notifications when
your ship reaches a Goto point. For the arrival timing, see subsection 5.11.5. The no-
tification message "Waypoint Crossing" appears. Activate or deactivate this feature as
follows.

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Routes].

2. Turn [Waypoint Crossing Notification] on or off.
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

5.11.9 End of route notification

The end of route notification feature releases audio and visual notifications when your
ship reaches the end of a route. For the arrival timing, see subsection 5.11.5. The no-
tification message "End of Route" appears. Activate or deactivate this feature as fol-
lows.

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Routes].

2. Turn [End of Route Notification] on or off.
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

5.11.10 How stop continue navigation at end of route

When you arrive at the final destination, you can keep the destination and route active.
For example, if you set a destination on a small reef and continue fishing while going
back and forth between the destinations, this function can save you from having to set
the destination many times.

1. Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Routes]→[End of Route Operation].

2. Tap [Continue Navigation].
Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Routes]→[End of Route Operation].
The route is not canceled when arriving at the final destination, and the set course,
XTE lines, bearing and range are displayed. For how to cancel the route see sec-

5-17
5. ROUTES

tion section 5.11.3. If an autopilot is connected, the ship turns after passing the
final destination and continues to sail around the final destination.
Note: The rudder may be suddenly turned depending on the make of autopilot
and vessel speed.
To cancel route navigation after reaching the final destination, select [Stop Navi-
gation].
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

5.11.11 Steering a route with the NAVpilot

When you select a point to follow and the NAVpilot-700 series is engaged and activat-
ed (see subsection 2.13.1) in the system, the message "DO YOU WANT TO NAVI-
GATE USING THE NAVPILOT?" appears. Tap [Yes] to have the NAVpilot steer the
vessel, then the NAVpilot automatically goes into the NAV mode. For the NAVpilot-
300, you are asked to select a navigation mode. Select [Precision] or [Economy].
([Cancel] stops the NAV mode.) After selecting a mode, the NAVpilot-300 automati-
cally goes into the NAV mode.

Precision mode: Keeps XTE within 0.01 NM

Economy mode: Keeps XTE within 0.03 NM

Note: The example figure below shows the NAVpilot’s display in the NAV mode. See
section 2.13.3 for details.

Tap this area to switch to

manual (standby) mode.

Turn/Menu button.
Appears in all modes for
NAVpilot-300 series only.

5-18
 5. ROUTES

5.12 SAR Operations

The SAR (Search And Rescue) feature facilitates search and rescue, and MOB (Man
Over Board) operations. This feature requires several installation menu changes and
requires a qualified technician to make the necessary menu changes. To active this
feature, contact your local dealer.

1. On the chart plotter display, tap the location where you want to start SAR opera-
tions.
2. On the pop-up menu, tap [New SAR Pattern].

3. Tap [Commence Search Point] to show the software keyboard. Input the coordi-
nates for the starting location, then tap [9].
4. Tap [SAR Track Spacing Setup] to show the software keyboard. Set the distance
between the SAR tracks, then tap [9].
5. Tap [Starboard] or [Port] to select the direction in which to start the SAR pattern.
6. Tap the type of pattern you want to use. The following figures show examples for
each of the patterns.

5-19
5. ROUTES

Type Sample Pattern

Parallel/Creeping Line

Section length and bearing 20

200m
0
0.0°
600m
90.0°

200m
0.0°
600m
270.0°

200m
0.0° Section length
600m set at step 4
90.0°

Commence point Search bearing

Sector Search

200mm 2
200m 200mm 2
200m
210.0
0.0
.0° 33
30.0° 210.
0.0
.0° 33
30.0°

200m 200m
90.0° 90.0°

Commence 200mm 2
200m
point 210.0
0.0
.0° 33
30.0°
Search bearing 200m
90.0° Section length
set at step 4

Section length and bearing

Expanding Square

Section length and bearing

400m
270.0°
600m
200m
0.0°
0.0°
400m 200m
180.0° 90.0°

Commence
point 600m
90.0°

Search bearing Section length

set at step 4

5-20
 5. ROUTES

The screen shows the SAR and the SAR area, a dashed rectangle.

7. To change the search commence point, drag the icon marked with “1” in the figure
above.
8. If necessary, change the bearing search area. Drag the icon resting on the SAR
area, or tap the desired location on the screen.
9. Tap [End SAR] to finalize the SAR area.
10. Tap [OK] to start SAR operations.
If the NAVpilot-700 series is engaged and activated (see subsection 2.13.1) in the
system, the message "DO YOU WANT TO NAVIGATE USING THE NAVPILOT?"
appears. Tap [Yes] to have the NAVpilot steer the vessel, then the NAVpilot auto-
matically goes into the NAV mode. For the NAVpilot-300, you are asked to select
a navigation mode.
11. Select [Precision] or [Economy]. ([Cancel] stops the NAV mode.)
Precision: Keeps XTE within 0.01 NM
Economy: Keeps XTE within 0.03 NM

5.13 Fuel Level Indicators

This equipment provides indicators that show both the approximate location where
you may run out of fuel and the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel. This
function requires the NMEA 2000 sentence PGN127489 (Engine Fuel Rate).

Fuel max range indicator (on route)

The fuel pump icon marks on the current route how far you can travel on the remaining
fuel. To show this marker, tap [Settings]→[Routes]→[Fuel Max Range]→[ON].

Fuel range indicator (ring about own position)

The fuel range indicator draws a circle about own ship, the radius of the circle equiv-
alent to the distance you can travel with the remaining fuel. To show this indicator, tap
[Settings]→[Ship & Track]→[Fuel Range Ring]→[ON].

5-21
5. ROUTES

5.14 Laylines
A layline is the best course for route, calculated using wind speed and direction*1,
heading*1, own ship speed*1 and tidal currents*2.
*1 Appropriate sensors for these data are required to use the layline feature.
*2
Item set at section 5.14.1.

Laylines

Laylines

5.14.1 How to enable/disable the layline feature

Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Routes]. Turn [Laylines] on or off as re-
quired.

If you want to show tidal offsets on laylines, turn on [Tidal Offset for Laylines].

5.14.2 How to show layline data in the data area

1. Open the data area, then tap [DATA] (at the bottom of the data area).
2. Tap the location in the data area where you want to show the layline data, and the
[Add NavData] menu appears.
3. Tap [Layline Information]. Data for port-side and starboard-side appears in the
data area.

5-22
 5. ROUTES

5.14.3 How to change the polar wind file

Your NavNet TZtouch3 comes with a pre-installed polar wind file. This file contains
data for sailboats, helping to improve sailing performance, by applying the data to the
laylines. Polar files can be downloaded from the MyTimeZero™ cloud service and im-
ported to the NavNet TZtouch3.

1. From a your PC (internet connection required), access the following site (without
quotation marks) “[Link]
2. Login to your MyTimeZero™ account.

3. Download the required polar file and save the file to a USB flash memory.
Note: MicroSD card cannot be used.
4. Connect the USB flash memory to the TZtouch3 USB cable.
5. On the TZtouch3, Go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Files]. The Files
menu appears.
6. Tap [Import Wind Polar]. The list of available polar wind files appears.
7. Tap the file you want to import, then tap [OK].
8. Check that the select file’s name appears in the menu, directly below [Import Wind
Polar].
9. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

5-23
5. ROUTES

5.15 Routes Menu

This section provides descriptions for the items in the [Routes] menu not previously
mentioned.

:[Default Route Color]: Select the color of the routes. The options are red, blue, green,
yellow, magenta, orange, cyan, or black & white.
[Route Thickness]: Select the thickness of the routes.

[Route Density]: Select the quantity of routes to show on the chart plotter display.

[Ask to Enter Route Name]: Show the software keyboard to enter route name after you
create a route. The default setting is "ON".

[Intelligent Route Waypoint Centering]: When you create a route, center a route point
each time it is selected on the screen.

[Cruising Speed for Planning]: Set the default cruising speed for routes (see
section 5.4).

[Reset Default Settings]: Select this menu item to restore default settings for the
[Routes] menu.

5-24
6. RADAR
This chapter provides the information necessary for radar operation, which requires a
radar sensor.

Radar-related settings can be accessed in the two ways shown below. In this manual,
this operation is written as “Open the [Radar] menu.”

• From the Home screen, tap [Settings]→[Radar].

• From the [Layers] menu, tap [Radar Settings].

Note: To change the radar source, go to the Home screen, tap [Settings] and [Radar],
select [Radar Source], then tap desired radar source.

6.1 How to Transmit, Set

the Radar in Stand-by
Tap the [TX] icon at the bottom right cor-
ner of the screen to put the radar in trans- Stand-by TX
mit or stand-by state. The icon is filled in
white when the radar is in transmit state. [TX] icon
(Transmit, stand-by can also be controlled
from the pop-up menu with [TX/STBY].)
: Stand-by
If you do not require the radar for some
time, set the radar in stand-by to save the : TX
magnetron from unnecessary use.

TX channel selection (w/DRS-NXT series radar sensor)

In the default setting, the best TX channel is automatically selected at random among
three channels. However, if interference is received from the radar of a nearby ship,
open the [Radar] menu, then set [TX Channel] to [1], [2] or [3], the channel where the
interference is smallest.

6.2 Tuning
By design the radar receiver is tuned automatically after the radar is set to transmit. If
you require fine tuning, do the following to tune manually:

1. Open the Home screen, then tap

[Settings]→[Radar].
2. The default tuning method is auto-
matic. Turn off [Auto Tuning] to
enable manual tuning.
3. Drag the slider at [Manual Tuning]
to set the value.
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

6-1
6. RADAR

6.3 How to Adjust the Gain

You can adjust the gain (sensitivity) of the radar receiver. The correct setting shows
some background noise on the screen. If you do not use enough gain, weak echoes
are erased. If you use more gain than necessary, the background noise hides both
weak and strong targets.

The gain can be adjusted from the data area or the pop-up menu.

Method 1: pop-up menu

Automatic adjustment:

1. Tap the radar display to show the pop-up menu then tap [Radar Adjust].
2. Turn [Auto Gain] off.
Manual adjustment:

1. Tap the radar display to show the pop-up menu then tap [Radar Adjust].
2. Turn [Auto Gain] off.
3. Tap [Manual Gain].
4. Use the slider bar to adjust the gain: Drag the knob, drag the gain indication box,
or tap the “+” or “-” symbol.
5. Tap [Done] at the top of the screen to finish.

Current
setting

Tap
Manual
adjustment

Automatic: Turn [Auto Gain] ON.

Manual: Turn [Auto Gain] OFF.
Tap [Manual Gain].

6-2
 6. RADAR

Method 2: Radar Control data box in data area

The gain can be adjusted from the data area, with the [Radar Control] box in the [RA-
DAR] data box.

1. Tap [RADAR] at the bottom of the data area.

2. tap the [M/A] flipswitch of [Gain].
[M] means manual; [A] means Automatic. Tap the flipswitch to switch between au-
tomatic and manual gain adjustment. For manual adjustment go the step 3.
3. Tap the numeric indication of [Gain].
4. Use the slider bar to adjust the gain: Drag the knob, drag the gain indication box,
or tap the “+” or “-” symbol.
5. Tap [Done] at the top of the screen to finish.

8 XXXXX Tap

Tap [M/A] icon to Current

alternate between setting
auto and manual.

XXXXX Tap
XXXXX

Manual
adjustment

All items set for

manual adjustment

6-3
6. RADAR

6.4 How to Reduce the Sea Clutter

The reflected echoes from waves appear at the central part of the screen and have
the name "sea clutter". The sea clutter increases in width as the height of waves and
the height of the antenna above the water increase. If the sea clutter is strong, targets
can be hidden inside the clutter, like in the right-hand figure.

Sea clutter at Sea control adjusted;

screen center sea clutter suppressed

When the sea clutter hides targets, adjust the sea control (automatically or manually)
to reduce the clutter. Like with gain, sea clutter can be adjusted from the pop-up menu
or data area. See the procedures in section 6.3.

For automatic sea clutter suppression, there are two methods: [Advanced] and
[Coastal]. [Advanced] provides for standard suppression of sea clutter and is intended
for normal use. [Coastal] suppresses sea clutter further than does [Advanced] and
paints land and target echoes thicker. Use [Coastal] when you are cruising along a
coastline.

To select an automatic sea clutter suppression method, open the [Layers] menu, tap
[Advanced] or [Coastal] at [Auto Sea Mode].

6.5 How to Reduce the Rain Clutter

When your ship is in or near rain or snow, the reflections from rain or snow appear on
the screen. These reflections have the name "rain clutter". When the rain clutter is
strong, targets in or near the rain clutter are hidden in the clutter. Reflections from the
rain clutter are easily identified from true targets by their wool-like appearance.

The rain control breaks the continuous display of rain or snow reflections into a ran-
dom pattern. The rain control also helps to reduce the target clutter in good weather
in busy harbors. When the rain clutter hides targets, adjust the rain control (automatic
or manual) to reduce the clutter.

Like with gain, rain clutter can be adjusted from the pop-up menu or data area. See
the procedures in section 6.3.

6-4
 6. RADAR

6.6 Range Scale

The range setting controls the size of the area (in nautical miles, kilometers or statute
miles) that appears on your screen. The range appears at the bottom right-hand cor-
ner of the screen.

How to zoom in or out the range scale

The range scale can be selected two ways, as shown below. The slider bar can be
shown or hidden with [Show Scale Slider] in the [Settings]→[Radar] menu.

Zoom in

Zoom in Zoom out

Method 1: Pinch screen
Zoom out

Method 2: Drag slider knob

(or tap bar or “+”, “-” symbols

6.7 Orientation Mode

The orientation mode determines how you view the
Heading line
positional relationship between your ship and other
targets and the state of movement. There are two
orientation modes, head up and north up.

Head up: A display without azimuth stabilization in

which the line that connects the center with the top
of the screen indicates your heading. Targets are
shown at their measured distances and in their di-
rections relative to your heading.

North up: Targets are shown at their measured

Heading line
distances and their true (compass) directions from
your ship. North is at the top of the screen. The
heading line changes its direction according to
your heading.

North up requires a heading signal. When the

heading signal is lost, the radar automatically
switches to the head up mode. To display the
heading signal, reset the heading sensor. If neces-
sary, reselect the display mode after the heading
sensor is restored.

6-5
6. RADAR

How to select an orientation mode

To select an orientation mode, tap the orientation mode icon [HU] (or [NU] whichever
is shown) at the bottom right corner of the screen to show [HU] (Head-up) or [NU]
(North-up).

Head-up: HU

North-up: NU
Orientation mode icon

6.8 How to Measure the Range and Bearing from

Your Ship to a Target
You can measure the range or bearing to a target by the following four methods.

Range Bearing
measurement measurement
EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) No Yes
Fixed range rings Yes No
Ruler Yes Yes
Tap Yes Yes
VRM (Variable Range Marker) Yes No

6.8.1 How to display the range rings

The range rings are the concentric solid circles about your ship. Use the fixed range
rings to get a rough estimate of the range to a target.

To show or hide the range rings, open the [Layers] menu, then turn [Radar Rings] on
or off.

To measure the range with the range rings, count the number of rings between the
center of the screen and the target. Check the range ring interval and estimate the dis-
tance of the echo from the inner edge of the nearest ring.

6-6
 6. RADAR

6.8.2 How to set the number of the range rings to show

1. Open the [Radar] menu.
2. Tap [Rings Interval].

3. Tap a number. [Automatic] automatically selects the number of rings according to

the range scale.
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

6.8.3 How to select the range rings mode

To select the range rings mode, open the [Radar] menu, then set [Bearing Scale
Mode] to [True] or [Relative].

6-7
6. RADAR

Head up mode
Heading
60

330
340
350 0 10
20
30
line 30
40
50 70
80
90

40 20 100
320
310 50 10 110

0 120

290
300 60

70
North (“0”) 350 130

280 80 340 140

270 90 330 150

260 100
Boat 320 160

250 110 icon 310 170

120 300 180

240

130 290 190

230
280 200
220
210 150
140
Bearing 270 210
200 160 260 220
250 240 230
190 180 170
scale

Relative: Bearing scale is fixed and “0” is True: Bearing scale rotates according to
at the top of the screen. the movement of your ship.

North up mode

50 60 70 0
350 10
40 80 340 20
30 90 330 30
20 100 320 40

0
10 110

120
Heading 310

300
50

60

350 130 line 290 70

340 140 280 80

330 150 270 90

320 160 Boat 260 100

310 170 110

300 180
icon 250

240 120

290 190 230 130

280 200
270 210 Bearing 220
210 150
140

260 220 200 160

250 240 230
scale 190 180 170

Relative: Bearing scale rotates according True: Bearing scale is fixed and “0” is at
to the movement of your ship. the top of the screen.

6.8.4 How to measure the range and bearing to an object

Tap an object to get its range and bearing from own ship. Read the range and bearing
in the pop-up menu.
Range and bearing
to object

Object

6-8
 6. RADAR

6.8.5 How to measure the range with the VRM

The VRM is a dashed ring so that you can identify the VRM from the fixed range rings.

Method 1: Using the EBL/VRM box in the data area

1. Referring to section section 1.9.3, add the [EBL/VRM] data box to the [RADAR]
data area.
2. Display the data area, then tap [RADAR].
3. Tap the VRM indication in the [EBL/VRM] data box.
4. Operate the VRM so that it rests on the inner edge of the target. Drag the VRM on
the radar display, drag the slider bar, drag the VRM indication box, or tap the “+”
or “-” symbol. The current VRM range is shown in the VRM indication box.
5. Tap [End VRM] at the top of screen to finish.
6. To clear the VRM, open the pop-up menu, the tap [VRM]→[Clear].

Range to
object

Drag
Drag
VRM
VRM

XXXXX

OR

Tap [End VRM]

Range to to anchor VRM
Tap object and exit.
EBL/VRM
box

Drag slider or tap bar

(or tap +, - symbol).

6-9
6. RADAR

Method 2: Using the pop-up menu

1. Tap the radar display to show the pop-up menu, then tap [VRM]→[Adjust].
2. Operate the VRM rests on the inner edge of the target. Drag the VRM on the radar
display, drag the knob on the slider, drag the VRM indication box, or tap the “+” or
“-” symbol. The current VRM range is shown in the VRM indication box.
3. Tap [End VRM] at the top of screen to finish.
4. To clear the VRM, open the pop-up menu, the tap [VRM]→[Clear].

Acquire

New Point

Goto

Radar Adjust Range to

object
VRM

Auto Sea Mode

VRM

Radar Filters
Drag
Drag
VRM
VRM
EBL

VRM
OR
Tap [End VRM]
to anchor VRM
Tap screen to show and exit.
pop-up menu. Range to
Tap [VRM]. object
VRM

VRM

Drag slider or tap bar

(or tap +, - symbol).

Tap [Adjust].

6-10
 6. RADAR

6.8.6 How to measure the bearing with the EBL

Method 1: Using the EBL/VRM box in the data area
1. Referring to section section 1.9.3, add the [EBL/VRM] data box to the [RADAR]
data area.
2. Display the data area, then tap [RADAR].
3. Tap the EBL indication in the [EBL/VRM] data box.
4. Operate the EBL so that it passes through the center of the target Drag the EBL
on the radar display, drag the knob on the slider, drag the EBL indication box, or
tap the “+” or “-” symbol. The current EBL bearing is shown in the EBL indication
box.
5. Tap [End EBL] at the top of screen to finish.
6. To clear the EBL, open the pop-up menu, the tap [EBL]→[Clear].

Drag
EBL

Bearing
to object

XXXXX
OR

Tap [End EBL]

to anchor EBL
and exit.
Tap
EBL/VRM
box
Bearing
to object
Drag slider or tap bar
(or tap +, - symbol).

6-11
6. RADAR

Method 2: Using the pop-up menu

1. Tap the radar display to show the pop-up menu, the tap [EBL]→[Adjust].
2. Operate the EBL so that it passes through the center of the target Drag the EBL
on the radar display, drag the knob on the slider, drag the EBL indication box, or
tap the “+” or “-” symbol. The current EBL bearing is shown in the EBL indication
box.
3. Tap [End EBL] at the top of screen to finish.
4. To clear the EBL, open the pop-up menu, the tap [EBL]→[Clear].

Drag
EBL

Bearing
to object
Tap

OR

Tap [End EBL]

to anchor EBL
and exit.

Bearing
Tap to object
Drag slider or tap bar
(or tap +, - symbol).

6.8.7 How to select the EBL reference

You can select the EBL reference from [True] or [Relative]. [True] means the bearing
is in reference to the north. [Relative] means the bearing is relative to the heading of
your ship. True bearing requires a heading sensor.

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Radar].

2. Tap [EBL Reference].
3. Tap [True] or [Relative].
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

6-12
 6. RADAR

6.9 How to Measure the Range and Bearing Between

Two Targets
You can measure the range and bearing between any two targets with the “ruler” fea-
ture, which you can access from the slide-out menu.

1. Open the slide-out menu then tap [Distance] to display the ruler, which has two
drag-able circles connected with a line.

Range Bearing Speed Over the Ground Time To Go

Starting
location
Icon End
Drag to change location. location

2. Drag the circles to set them on the objects for the measurement. The range and
bearing between the objects, SOG and TTG appear at the top of the screen.
3. Tap [Cancel Ruler] at the top right-hand corner of the screen to erase the ruler and
the indications.

6.10 How to Off-center the Picture

You can off-center your position to expand the view field without selecting a larger
range scale. The position can be off-centered in the bow, stern, port or starboard di-
rection, but not more than 75% of the range in use.

Pan the radar display by dragging with a finger. To return your ship to the center of the
screen, tap [Center Radar] at the top right-hand corner of the screen.
Appears when ship is not at the center of the screen.

330 30

320 40

310 50

300 60
0
350 10
340 20
290 70 330 30

320 40
280 80
310 50

270 90
300 60

260 100
290 70

250 110
280 80

240 120
270 90

230 130
260 100
220 140

210 150 110

250

Normal picture Picture off-centered in stern direction

6-13
6. RADAR

6.11 Heading Line

The heading line indicates your heading in all orientation
modes. This line connects between your position to the outer
edge of the radar display. The line is at zero degrees on the
bearing scale in the head-up mode. The orientation of the line
changes in the north-up mode with the movement of your ship.
If it is hard to identify the echoes on the heading line, you can
hide the heading line and range rings for a few seconds. Open
the pop-up menu, then tap [HDG Line Off] to hide the heading
line and range rings. The heading line and the range rings re-
appear after approx. 5-6 seconds.

6.12 How to Reduce Radar Interference

Radar interference can occur when your ship is near the radar of another ship that op-
erates on the same frequency band with your radar. The interference shows on the
screen in many bright dots. The dots can be random or in the shape of dotted lines
that run from the center to the edge of the screen. You can identify the interference
from the normal echoes, because the interference does not appear in the same loca-
tion at the next rotation of the antenna.

Turn off the interference rejector when there is no interference to prevent the loss of
weak targets.
To use the interference rejector, Open the [Layers] menu, then turn [Interference
Rejection] on or off.

6-14
 6. RADAR

6.13 Echo Average

The sea clutter reduction circuit can remove wanted echoes. If this occurs, use the
echo average feature. Echo average reduces the brilliance of targets within sea clutter
to allow you to better discriminate targets from sea clutter.

Note 1: Echo average requires heading and position data.

Note 2: Do not use echo average during heavy pitching and rolling, to prevent loss of
targets.
Note 3: Before using echo average, properly adjust the sea clutter.
Note 4: In the dual radar display, echo average works only on the left half screen.
To turn the echo average feature on or off, open the [Layers] menu, then turn [Echo
Averaging] off or on as required.

Echo Average OFF Echo Average ON

6.14 Guard Zone

The guard zone provides aural and visual alarms against targets (ships, islands, land-
masses, etc.) that enter the area you set.

6.14.1 How to set a guard zone

Note: You can not set the guard zone with a remote control unit (MCU-002, MCU-004
or MCU-005). Use the touch operation to set the guard zone. The available range
changes with the radar sensor.
DRS4D-NXT: 0-24 NM
X-class radar sensors: 0-16 NM
1. Open the [Layers] menu.
2. Turn on [Guard Zone 1] or [Guard Zone 2].
A dotted white line guard zone appears.
3. Tap on a line of the guard zone, and the pop-up menu
appears.

6-15
6. RADAR

4. Tap [Resize]. Drag icons appear at the corners of the guard zone.

5. Drag the icons to adjust the guard zone.

Note: To create a 360 degree zone about own ship, set all four drag icons in the
same direction.
6. Tap [Done] at to finish. The icons disappear.

How to set a guard zone with TZT12F, remote controller (MCU-002/004/005)

A A

Only the icon at

Move the
the top is Press the
position of A
displayed in red. RotoKeyTM
using cross Changed
or joystick
cursor. position of
to confirm
guard zone
the position.
㻭
Changed
position of
guard zone

Move the B
B position of B Press the RotoKeyTM
using cross B or joystick to confirm
Red icon is
displayed at cursor. the position, and then
the B position. tap [Done] at the top
A right of the screen.
Position A is confirmed.

6.14.2 How to activate or deactivate a guard zone

1. Tap on a line of the guard zone to show the pop-up menu.
2. Turn [Alarm] on or off. The alarm is active when the guard zone lines are solid and
the lines are dashed when the alarm is deactivated.
When a target (including target with echo trail) enters an active zone, the aural alarm
sounds (if active), the target flashes, and the message "TARGET ALARM" flashes in
the status bar. Tap the status bar to silence the aural alarm and stop the flashing mes-
sage. The message remains in the status bar and the target continues to flash until
the target leaves the guard zone or the alarm is deactivated.

You can mute the audio alarm by turning off [Alarm Sound] in the [Settings]→[Alarm]
menu. (see subsection 2.10.8).

6.14.3 How to hide a guard zone

Open the [Layers] menu and turn [Guard Zone 1] or [Guard Zone 2] off. The guard
zone is erased from the screen.

6-16
 6. RADAR

6.15 Watchman
The watchman feature transmits the radar for one minute at a specified time interval
(5, 10 or 20 minutes) to monitor the guard zone. If a target is found in the guard zone,
the watchman is canceled and the radar continues to transmit. This feature helps you
watch for targets in the area you set when you do not continuously require the radar.
TX ST-BY TX ST-BY

1 min 5, 10 or 1 min 5, 10 or
20 min 20 min

Watchman starts

1. Set a guard zone. See section 6.14. (Watchman does not operate unless a guard
zone is active. Set Watchman when the radar is in transmit state.)
2. Open the [Radar] menu.
3. Tap [Watchman].

4. Tap a watchman rest interval.

5. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.
6. On the radar display, tap the screen to show the pop-up menu. Turn [Watchman]
on to activate the watchman function.

6-17
6. RADAR

6.16 Echo Trail

Echo trails show the movements of radar targets relative or true to your ship in imita-
tion afterglow, in a color different from the echo color. This function helps alert you to
possible collision conditions.

Note: In the dual radar display, echo trail works only on the left side screen (shown as
(1) in the figure to the right).

6.16.1 How to show, hide echo trails

Tap the screen to show the pop-up menu, then set [Echo Trail] to [OFF] or [ON] as
required.

6.16.2 How to clear echo trails

Tap the screen to show the pop-up menu, then select [Clear Trail].

6.16.3 How to select echo trail length

1. Open the [Radar] menu.
2. Set [Trail Length].

3. Tap desired length.

4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish

6-18
 6. RADAR

6.16.4 How to select the echo trail mode (reference)

Trail movement can be set for relative or true.
Relative trails: Show the relative movements between targets and your ship.
True motion trails: Show the movements of targets according to the targets over-the-
ground speeds and courses. True trails require position and heading information.

True echo trails Relative echo trails

(No smearing of (Targets moving
stationary targets) relative to own ship)

1. Open the [Radar] menu.

2. Tap [Trail Mode]

3. Tap [True] or [Relative] as required.

4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

6.16.5 How to select echo trail color

1. Open the [Radar] menu.
2. Set [Trail Color].

3. Tap desired color.

4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish

6-19
6. RADAR

6.16.6 How to select echo trail shading

The afterglow of the target trails can be shown in a single tone or gradual shading.

Target

[Single] trail [Multi] trail

1. Open the [Radar] menu.

2. Set [Trail Shade].

3. Select [Single] or [Multi] as appropriate.

4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

6.17 How to Show, Hide or Cancel an Active Route

You can show, hide the active route on the radar display. Open the [Layers] menu then
turn [Routes] on or off.

To cancel route navigation, tap any part of the route then tap [Stop Nav] on the pop-
up menu.
320 40

310 50

300 60

290 70

280 80

270 90

260
Active route 100

250 110
㻝

240 120

230 㻞 130
㻟
220 140

210 150

200 160
190 180 170

6.18 How to Show or Hide the Own Ship Icon

You can show or hide the boat icon on the radar display.
1. Open the [Radar] menu.
2. Turn [Own Ship Icon] on or off.
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

6-20
 6. RADAR

6.19 Echo Color

Echo color is available in colors of green, yellow or multicolor. [Multicolor] displays
echoes in colors of red, yellow and green, corresponding to signal levels of strong, me-
dium and weak.

1. Open the [Radar] menu.

2. Tap [Echo Color].

3. Tap desired color.

4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

6.20 Background Color

You can select the background color for daytime and nighttime operations.

1. Open the [Radar] menu.

2. Tap [Day Background Color] or [Night Background Color] menu.

Day Background Color

Night Background Color

3. Tap desired color.

4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

6-21
6. RADAR

6.21 Dual-Range Display

The dual-range display scans and displays two different radar ranges at the same
time, with a single antenna. There is no time delay between the two pictures and, with
the magnetron radar, you have separate control of each picture. (The solid state radar
has some restrictions. See the table below for details.) This feature lets you keep a
close watch on close-range targets and far targets.

Long range display Short range display

Note: Radar sensor DRS4DL/DRS4DL+ does not have the dual-range display.
To get the dual-range display, set dual-range displays on the Home screen. See
subsection 1.7.1 for the procedure. You can put the dual-range displays in the two-
way and three-way split screens.

Most radar functions can be adjusted independently. The table below shows radar
function and operability in the dual range mode, for both the magnetron radar and the
solid state radar. Note that, in the worst case, the maximum detection range may de-
crease by approx. 10 dB with the solid state radar.

• Active route (show, hide) • Radar TX*

• Rain clutter suppression • Gain adjustment
• Heading line, range rings (temporarily erase) • Sea clutter removal
• Range change • AIS/ARPA (show, hide)
• Operation mode (head-up or north-up) • Range rings (show, hide)
• Auto sea mode ([Advanced] or [Coastal] • Bird mode
Operation mode (head-up or north-up) •

6-22
 6. RADAR

* The no.1 screen is independent of the no.2 screen when the no.2 screen is in stand-
by. However, when the no.2 screen goes to transmit state, so does the no.1 screen.

(2) (1)
(1) (2) (1) (1)
(2) (2)
Two-way split
Three-way split

(1) (2) (1) (1) (1) (1)

(2) (2) (2) (2) (1) (2)

Four-way split

6.22 Bird Mode

The Bird mode, which requires the radar sensor DRS6A X-Class/DRS12A X-Class/
DRS25A X-Class, sets up the radar for optimal detection of flocks of birds, which indi-
cates the presence of schools of fish. Additionally, the bird mode can be used to detect
distant rain clouds.

Gain, sea clutter and rain clutter are automatically adjusted according to the bird mode
setting.

The use of echo trail and echo average functions together with the bird mode make it
easier to distinguish bird echoes from other echoes. With echo average, echoes from
birds are emphasized. With true echo trails, moving vessels show long, steady trails.
Unlike those targets, bird echoes appear randomly and show random, short trails.

Unstable, short No trail from

trails from a flock stationary targets
of birds

Echo trail from

moving vessel

The bird mode has three settings. Select the option according to the severity of the
sea clutter.

6-23
6. RADAR

To select the bird mode setting, open the [Layers] menu, tap [Bird Mode], then se-
lect [Calm], [Moderate], or [Rough].

[Calm]: Suitable in calm conditions where sea clutter is weak. Applies low sea clutter
reduction to show weak bird echoes. When sea clutter is strong, bird echoes may be
hidden inside the sea clutter.

[Moderate]: Suitable where sea clutter is moderate. Applies medium sea clutter re-
duction.

[Rough]: Suitable in rough weather conditions where sea clutter is strong. Applies
high sea clutter reduction. Weak bird echoes may be suppressed in this setting.

To turn off the bird mode, select [Off]. When the bird mode is active, the bird mode
icon appears to the right of the TX/STBY switch, as shown below.

Usage precautions
• The Bird mode is available with the radar sensors DRS6A X-Class, DRS12A X-
Class, DRS25A X-Class. The radar sensor DRS4DL/DRS4DL+ does not support
the Bird mode.
• Do not use the Bird mode in rough weather.
• Do not use the Bird mode during a voyage. The Bird mode settings are not suitable
in a voyage.
• ARPA performance may be reduced when the Bird mode is active.
• Radar Adjust (Gain, Sea, Rain) and Auto Sea Mode cannot be adjusted when the
Bird mode is active.
• Schools of fish that attract birds tend to dive suddenly, which may result in unstable
or disappearing echoes.

6.23 Target Analyzer

The target analyzer analyzes echoes and displays targets in different colors to help
you distinguish targets that are moving and approaching own ship. Use this function
to distinguish targets from heavy rain or snow.

Note 1: Requires one of the following radar sensors and GPS position data.
• DRS4D-NXT • DRS12A-NXT
• DRS6A-NXT • DRS25A-NXT

Note 2: [Radar Adjust] (Gain, Sea, Rain) and [Auto Sea Mode] cannot be adjusted
when the Target Analyzer is active.
Note 3: The Target Analyzer works only against moving targets. Stationary targets,
such as a buoy, are not identified as an approaching target.
Note 4: A certain processing time is necessary to detect a moving target.

6-24
 6. RADAR

Note 5: When the radial component* of target velocity (see below for description) is
50 kn or higher, the target may be painted in a wrong color. For example, an approach-
ing target whose speed is 50 kn or higher should be painted in red, but is painted in
green.
* Radial component of target velocity: The target velocity can be separated into two
components, the radial and transverse components, as in the figure below. The radar
is only able to sense the motion directly along the radial, either towards or away from
the radar, because the transverse component has no effect on the phase of the return-
ing electromagnetic wave.

Transverse Radial
component

Total
velocity
Radial component
Radar measures the
radial component of
velocity only

Radar

The Target Analyzer function is activated, deactivated from the [Layers] menu. Select
[Target], [Rain] or [Off] as appropriate. Targets are shown in colors according to the
setting on the [Layers] menu, as shown in the table below.

Setting Target Rain Echo color

[Off] OFF OFF Echoes are painted according to the echo color
selected in section 6.19.
[Target] ON OFF Moving targets: Red
Other targets: Green
[Rain] ON ON Rain: Blue
Moving targets: Red
Other targets: Green

6-25
6. RADAR

The figure below shows an actual radar image with the target analyzer activated.

Approaching
target (red)

Target Analyzer: OFF Target Analyzer: Target Mode

Approaching
targets (red)

Rain (blue)

Target Analyzer: Rain Mode

Operating mode and range

Range Range
(Target Analyzer OFF) (Target Analyzer ON)
Single range display 0.063 - 72 NM 0.063 - 24 NM
Dual range display 0.063 - 12 NM 0.063 - 12 NM

6-26
 6. RADAR

6.24 Connecting With FAR-2xx7/FAR-15xx Series Ma-

rine Radars
Your NavNet TZtouch3 can connect with the FAR-2xx7 series and FAR-15xx series
Marine Radars. The following radar type and software version restrictions apply. FAR-
15xx series: Non IMO-types only with software version 01.19, or later. FAR-2xx7 se-
ries: C-types only with software version 04.08, or later.
Note: Polygon acquisition zones must be also be disabled at the radar.
Available from the
Radar function Remarks
TZtouch3
Split-screen display Not available
Display AIS target data Available
ARPA automatic acquisition Not Available
ARPA manual acquisition and re- Available Up to 100 targets.
moval
AUTO RAIN Not available
AUTO SEA Available ON/OFF operation only, setting adjust-
ment must be done at the radar.
Automatic gain adjustment Not available
Manual rain/snow clutter removal Available
Manual gain adjustment Available
Toggle transmit and standby Available
modes
Interference Rejector Available
Tuning, antenna sped and other Not available
post-installation adjustments
Radar source selection, display of Available
echoes
Selection of range unit Not available Fixed at [NM].
Changing the range Available Following ranges only: 0.125, 0.25, 0.5,
0.75, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, 32,
48, 96 (nm).
Watchman feature Not available
ACE GAIN Available* *: This function is only available for the
FAR-15xx series and requires ACE GAIN
to be enabled from the radar.

6-27
6. RADAR

6.25 RezBoost
The azimuth resolution of the radar echoes can be switched in the range of 1-2 times,
with the radar sensor DRS4D-NXT/DRS6A-NXT. Four settings are available, [Stan-
dard], [Enhanced1], [Enhanced2], or [Enhanced 3]. Select [Enhanced 3] for better
echo resolution.

1. Open the [Layers] menu.

2. Select [RezBoost].
3. Select desired setting, referring to the figure below for information.

Standard setting Enhanced 1 setting

Conventional radar echoes Sharper than standard by 1.2 times
Equivalent to 3.4° beam width

Enhanced 2 setting Enhanced 3 setting

Sharper than standard by 1.5 times Sharper than standard by 2 times
Equivalent to 2.7° beam width Equivalent to 2.0° beam width

Operating mode and range

Single range: 0.063 to 72 NM, Target Analyzer ON, single range: 0.063 to 24 NM
Dual range: 0.063 to 12 NM, Target Analyzer ON, dual range: 0.063 to 12 NM

6-28
 6. RADAR

6.26 Radar Menu

This section provides the descriptions for the radar menu items not mentioned earlier.

RADAR INITIAL SETUP section

[Antenna Rotation]: Starts or stop antenna rotation. For the serviceman. See the in-
stallation manual.

[Antenna Heading Align]: Compensates for error in positioning of the antenna unit at
installation. See the installation manual for the adjustment procedure.

[Main Bang Suppression]: Reduces main bang, the clutter appearing at the screen
center. See the installation manual for the adjustment procedure.

[Enable Sector Blanking]: Sets the area(s) where to prevent transmission. For ex-
ample, set the area where an interfering object at the rear of the antenna would pro-
duce a dead sector (area where no echoes appear) on the display. See the installation
manual for the procedure.

ANTENNA POSITION section

[Longitudinal (from bow)], [Lateral (-Port)]: Set the position of the radar antenna in re-
lation to the bow and port.

Other items
[Antenna Height]: Set the height of the radar antenna above the waterline. Not avail-
able (grayed out) with the radar sensor DRS4DL/DRS4DL+.

[Auto Tuning]: Activate or deactivate auto tuning for the connected radar. Not avail-
able (grayed out) with the radar sensor DRS4D-NXT.

6-29
6. RADAR

[Tuning Source]: For dual range display, select the range to use as the manual tuning
source. Not available (grayed out) with the radar sensor DRS4DL/DRS4DL+, DRS4D-
NXT.

[Radar Monitoring]: Show various voltage levels, and ARPA data. For the service
technician.

[Radar Optimization]: Automatically adjust magnetron output and tuning for the con-
nected radar. Be sure to do this after replacing the magnetron. Not available
(grayed out) with the radar sensor DRS4D-NXT.
[ARPA Advanced Settings]: Sets ARPA parameters. For the service technician only.
Do not change the settings. Set [TX/STBY] to [ON] to access. Not available (grayed
out) with the radar sensor DRS4DL/DRS4DL+, FAR-2xx7 series radar antenna.

[Set Hardware to Factory Default]: For the service technician only.

[Reset Default Settings]: Restore default settings for items other than those in the [RA-
DAR INITIAL SETUP] section.

6.27 How to Interpret the Radar Display

6.27.1 False echoes

Echo signals can appear on the screen at positions where there is no target or disap-
pear where there are targets. You can identify false targets when you understand why
the false echoes appear. A description of false echoes follows.

Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a large
ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes can be seen on the
screen at two, three or more times the true range of the target as shown below. You
can reduce and sometimes remove these multiple echoes if you decrease the gain, or
correctly adjust the sea clutter.
True echo

Target
Own ship
Multiple echo

6-30
 6. RADAR

Virtual image
A large target near your ship can show at two positions on the screen. One of the po-
sitions is the true echo reflected by the target. The other position is a false echo which
is caused by the "mirror effect" of a large object on or near your ship. See the figure
shown below for an example of this type of false echo. If your ship gets near a large
metal bridge, for example, a false echo appears on the screen. The echo disappears
after move some distance from the bridge.
Target ship Route for direct reflection

Own ship

True
echo
Bridge

Route for
Mirror image indirect reflection
of target ship False
echo

Sector blanking
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna stop the radar beam. If
the angle opposite the antenna is more than one or two degrees, a sector or shadow
sector appears on the screen. Targets are not displayed within the sector.
Wharf and its echo
Radar position
Radar position Wharf and its echo

Sector blanking
occurs because Sector blanking occurs
wharf is hidden because obstruction
behind ship. (like mast) is in path of
radar beam.
Size of blanking sector depends
Large ship
on size of obstruction and range.

6-31
6. RADAR

Sidelobe echoes
Each time the radar transmits, some radiation leaves on each side of the beam. This
lost energy has the name "sidelobes" If a target is detected by both the sidelobes and
the mainlobe, the sidelobe echoes can appear at both sides of the true echo at the
same range. Sidelobes normally show only on short ranges and from strong targets.
You can reduce sidelobes if you reduce the gain, or correctly adjust the sea clutter.
Mainlobe (beam)

True target

Sidelobe Sidelobe

Antenna False echoes by sidelobes

6.27.2 Search and rescue transponder (SART)

A ship in distress uses a radar-SART to show a series of dots on the radar display of
nearby ships to indicate distress. A SART transmits when it receives a radar pulse
from any X-Band (3 cm) radar within a range of approximately 8 nm. When a SART
receives a radar pulse, the SART transmits a response across all the radar frequency
band.

Screen A: When SART is distant Screen B: When SART is close

Radar antenna beamwidth
Echo from SART
(Lines of 12 dots
are displayed in
concentric arcs.)

Own ship position Own ship position

Position of Position of
SART 1.5 NM SART
24 NM

How to detect the SART response

• Use the range scale of 6 or 12 NM.
• Turn off all the automatic clutter filters.
• Turn off the interference rejector.

6-32
 6. RADAR

6.27.3 RACON (Radar Beacon)

A RACON is a radar transponder that sends a characteristic signal when the RACON
receives a radar pulse (normally only the three-centimeter band). If the RACON signal
is sent on the same frequency as that of the radar, the signal appears on the radar
display. The RACON signal appears on the radar in one of two methods:

• A line that starts just after the position of the RACON

• A Morse code signal displayed with a line just after the position of the RACON.

Racon

6-33
6. RADAR

6.28 ARPA Operation

The ARPA (Automatic Radar Plotting Aid) shows the movement of a maximum of 30
radar targets. The targets can be acquired manually or automatically. All 30 targets
can be acquired manually when the ARPA acquisition area is not active. If the ARPA
acquisition area is active, that total is equally divided between manual and auto acqui-
sition.

ARPA requires speed and heading data.

Note 1: The DRS4DL radar sensor does not have the ARPA function.
Note 2: The maximum number of targets acquirable depends on the radar model.
DRS6A-NXT/DRS4D-NXT: Max. 60 targets (30 automatic, 30 manual)
Other radar models: Max. 30 targets

WARNING CAUTION
No one navigational aid should be relied The plotting accuracy and response of
upon for the safety of vessel and crew. this auto plotter meets IMO standards.
The navigator has the responsibility to Tracking accuracy is affected by the
check all aids available to confirm following:
position. Electronic aids are not a
substitute for basic navigational · Tracking accuracy is affected by course
principles and common sense. change. One to two minutes is required to
restore vectors to full accuracy after an
· This auto plotter automatically tracks an abrupt course change. (The actual amount
automatically or manually acquired radar depends on gyrocompass specifications.)
target and calculates its course and speed, · The amount of tracking delay is inversely
indicating them by a vector. Since the data proportional to the relative speed of the
generated by the auto plotter are based on target. Delay ranges from 15 - 30 seconds
what radar targets are selected, the radar for high relative speed; 30 - 60 seconds for
must always be optimally tuned for use low relative speed.
with the auto plotter, to ensure required
targets will not be lost or unwanted targets Display accuracy is affected by the
such as sea returns and noise will not be following:
acquired and tracked.
· Echo intensity
· A target does not always mean a · Radar transmission pulsewidth
landmass, reef, ships or other surface · Radar bearing error
vessels but can imply returns from sea · Gyrocompass error
surface and clutter. As the level of clutter · Course change (your ship or target)
changes with environment, the operator
should properly adjust the Sea, Rain and
Gain to be sure target echoes are not
eliminated from the radar screen.

6.28.1 How to show or hide the ARPA display

From the radar display or chart plotter display, pen the [Layers] menu, then turn [AR-
PA Targets] on or off (hides ARPA symbols).

6-34
 6. RADAR

6.28.2 How to manually acquire a target

You can manually acquire a target from both the radar display and the radar display
overlay. Up to 30 targets can be acquired manually. Tap the target to acquire to show
the pop-up menu, then tap [Acquire].

After you acquire a target, the radar marks the target with a broken square and a vec-
tor appears within 30 s (default setting). The vector indicates the direction of the target.
Within 90 s after you acquire the target, the first tracking step is finished and the target
is tracked continuously. At this point, the broken square changes to a solid circle.

ARPA Symbol Meaning ARPA Symbol Meaning

At acquisition of the tar- 30 s after the acquisi-
Vector
get. tion, the plotting symbol
changes to a small cir-
cle, which indicates
Color: green Color: green steady-state tracking. A
vector (dashed line)
shows the direction of
the target.
A lost target is indicated A target that meets the
by a diamond symbol, criteria of the CPA/
created from two equal TCPA alarm is changed
Color: green triangles. to a dangerous target.
Color: red

Note 1: For successful acquisition, the target must be within 0.05 to 16 NM from your
ship and not hidden in sea or rain clutter.
Note 2: When the capacity for manual acquisition is reached, you cannot acquire
more targets. Cancel tracking of non-threatening targets to acquire additional targets
manually.

6.28.3 How to automatically acquire a target

Any target that enters the ARPA acquisition area is acquired and tracked automatical-
ly. When a target enters the area, the buzzer sounds. To disable the buzzer, set
[Alarm] to [OFF] in the pop-up menu at step 2 in the below procedure.

1. Create a guard zone referring to section 6.14.

2. Tap a line on the guard zone to show the pop-up menu.
Turn on [Auto Acquire]. The dotted lines for the guard
zone turn into solid lines.
3. Turn on [Auto Acquire].
The dotted lines for the guard zone turn into solid lines.

6-35
6. RADAR

6.28.4 How to automatically acquire targets by Doppler

With acquisition by Doppler active, you can track up to 100 targets in total as follows.
- 40 targets by auto acquire by Doppler
- 30 targets by auto acquire by guard zones
- 30 targets by manual tracking

When automatic acquisition by Doppler is activated, approaching targets (ships, rain

clutter, etc.) within 3 NM from own ship are automatically acquired by the Doppler cal-
culated from the radar echo.

This feature, when active, runs in the background immediately after the start of trans-
mission. Targets are acquired in order of distance from own ship, from nearest to fur-
thest. Once a target is acquired, tracking continues regardless of subsequent Doppler
behavior, even if the target becomes stationary. Targets can still be manually acquired
provided that the capacity for automatic acquisition has not been reached.
Auto acquisition by Doppler is [OFF] in the default setting. To activate this feature,
open the [Radar] menu, then turn on [Auto acquire by Doppler].

This feature requires the radar sensor DRS4D-NXT/DRS6A-NXT and position and
heading inputs.

6.28.5 How to display target data

You can find the bearing, range, etc. of an ARPA target. Tap the ARPA target to get
its simple information in the pop-up menu. For detailed information, tap the ARPA tar-
get to display the pop-up menu, then tap [Info].

Simple information Detailed information

6-36
 6. RADAR

6.28.6 How to stop tracking targets

You can stop tracking ARPA targets individually or all together.

Individual target
Tap the ARPA target to display the pop-up menu, then tap [Cancel] to stop tracking
and delete the ARPA target from the screen.

All targets
Open the slide-out menu, tap [ARPA], then tap [Cancel All] to delete all targets from
the screen.

Tide
Cancel All

Clear Lost
NavData

6.28.7 ARPA list

The [ARPA] list displays data for all ARPA targets being tracked.

How to show the ARPA list

To show the list, go the Home screen, then tap [Lists]→[ARPA]. The color bars at the
left side of the list denote ARPA symbol status, green for tracking or lost target, red for
dangerous target.

Id Range Refresh

ID/Status Range/Bearing

Tracking
Sort methods
ID/Status Range/Bearing

Tracking
ID/Status Range/Bearing

Tracking
ID/Status Range/Bearing

Lost
ID/Status Range/Bearing

Bar

To sort the list, tap appropriate sort method button at the top of the list.
[ID]: Sort by ID no.
[Range]: Sort by range, closest to furthest from own ship.
[CPA]: Sort in CPA order.
The [Refresh] button updates target data.

6-37
6. RADAR

How to show detailed ARPA target information

Tap the target on the [ARPA] list to see its information.

Find on Chart

How to put an ARPA target at the center of the plotter display

Tap a target on the list. Tap [Find on Chart] to put the ARPA target at the center of the
chart plotter display.

6.28.8 How to clear lost targets

Tracking of a target cannot be continued when the echo from that target becomes lost.
A lost target can be tracked after it is reacquired. Lost targets can be erased individu-
ally or collectively.

Individual target
Tap the target to display the pop-up menu, then tap [Clear] to remove the target from
the screen.

Clear all targets

Open the slide-out menu, tap [ARPA], then tap [Clear Lost] to delete all lost targets
from the screen.

6-38
 6. RADAR

6.28.9 CPA/TCPA alarm

This alarm helps you keep your ship away from collision by warning of targets on a
collision course. The ARPA continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest
Point of Approach (CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each tracked target.
When both the predicted CPA and TCPA are less than their set values, the target sym-
bol turns red, the alarm sounds and the flashing message "CPA/TCPA Alarm" appears
at the top of the screen.

CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set correctly according to the size, tonnage, speed,
turning performance and other characteristics of your ship.

How to set the CPA/TCPA alarm

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Targets].
2. Turn on [CPA/TCPA Alarm].
3. Tap [CPA Alarm Value] or [TCPA Alarm Value] to display the software keyboard.
4. Set the value, then tap [9] to confirm.
5. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

How to acknowledge the CPA/TCPA alarm

The CPA/TCPA alarm sounds when the CPA and TCPA of an ARPA target are within
the CPA/TCPA alarm range. The alarm indication "CPA/TCPA Alarm" appears and
flashes at the top of the screen. To acknowledge the alarm and stop the audio alarm
and flashing of the indication, tap the indication "CPA/TCPA Alarm" (see
subsection 2.10.9). (The ARPA vector must be displayed at least 30 seconds to cal-
culate CPA and TCPA.)

How to deactivate the CPA/TCPA alarm

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Targets].
2. Turn off [CPA/TCPA Alarm].
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

6-39
6. RADAR

6.28.10 CPA graphic display

The CPA graphic display shows the CPA between own vessel and the selected ARPA
(or AIS) target with a line, called the "CPA line." Whenever you change your vessel’s
course and speed, you can see the new CPA between your vessel and the selected
ARPA target.

To activate or deactivate the CPA graphic display, open the [Targets] menu and turn
[CPA Graphic Display] on or off.

To find the CPA of a ARPA target on the radar or CPA line

plotter display, tap the ARPA target. The CPA Own ship
line connects between your vessel and the CPA
of the ARPA target. The color of the line is the
same as that of the target symbol. To find the
CPA of another ARPA target, select it, and the
CPA line moves to the newly selected target.
(Only only line can be displayed at a time.) The
example at right shows the appearance of the ARPA target
5
CPA line on the radar display.

If the CPA/TCPA alarm is generated while the CPA line is in use, the CPA line and the
symbol of the selected target turn red.

The CPA graphic display is not available in the following conditions:

• The CPA line is turned off. The line can be turned off by tapping the CPA line (or
own ship icon* or target) to show the pop-up menu, then select [CPA].
* Plotter display only
• The feature is turned off.
• The TCPA is a minus (-) value.
• The target is a lost target.
• The CPA and TCPA of the target cannot be calculated (no speed or heading data
for own ship).

6-40
7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)
This chapter describes the functions of the built-in fish finder.

The fish finder is set up from the [Fish Finder] menu, which can be opened by the fol-
lowing two methods.

• From the Home screen, tap [Settings]→[Fish Finder].

• With the fish finder display active, open the [Layers] menu, then tap [Fish Finder
Setting].
Unless otherwise written, this manual uses the first method.

Note 1: To change the fish finder source, open the [Fish Finder] menu, tap [Fish Find-
er Source], then tap the source to use. The source can also be selected from the [Lay-
ers] menu with [Fish Finder Source].
Note 2: The names of menu items change according to the fish finder source.

7.1 How the Fish Finder Operates

The fish finder calculates the distance between its transducer and underwater objects
like fish, lake bottom or seabed. The results are shown in different colors or shades of
gray according to echo strength.

The ultrasonic waves transmitted through water move at a constant speed of approx-
imately 4800 feet (1500 meters) per second. When a sound wave "hits" an underwater
object like fish or sea bottom, part of the sound wave is reflected toward the source.
To find the depth to an object, the fish finder calculates the time difference between
the transmission of a sound wave and the time the reflected sound wave is received.

The picture displayed by the fish finder contains a series of vertical scan lines. Each
line is a "picture" of the objects under the boat. The series of pictures are put side-by-
side across the screen to show the contours of the bottom and echoes from fish. The
amount of history of objects that have moved under the boat can be less than a minute
to more than one minute depending on the picture advance speed.

7-1
7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.2 How to Transmit, Go to Stand-by

From the Home screen, tap the Fish Finder icon to activate the fish finder. Open the
[Layers] menu, then tap the flipswitch [TX/STBY]. Select [ON] to transmit; [OFF] to go
to stand-by. "Stand-by" appears at the screen center when in stand-by.

7.3 How to Select a Display

Your fish finder has four display modes, single frequency, dual frequency, bottom lock,
and bottom zoom. A-scope or bottom discrimination displays can also be displayed to-
gether with each of the four display modes.

7.3.1 Single frequency display

The single frequency display shows either the low-frequency or high-frequency picture
over the entire screen. Select a frequency according to your purpose, considering the
description below.

High
Low freq.
freq.

• A low frequency gives a wide detection area. Use the low frequency for general
search and to find bottom conditions.
• A high frequency gives better resolution. Use the high frequency to inspect a school
of fish in detail.

How to select a single frequency display

1. Tap the screen to show the pop-up menu.
2. Tap [Mode].
3. Turn on [Single Freq.].

7-2
 7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

How to switch between the low- and high-frequency displays

You can switch between the low-and high-frequency displays
from the pop-up menu. Open the pop-up menu, tap [Frequen-
cy], then turn on [HF] or [LF] as appropriate.

Note: Using the same method mentioned above, you can

switch the video on the dual frequency display and zoom dis-
play.
Dual frequency display: Swaps the low-frequency and high-frequency images (de-
fault setting: low frequency on the left and high frequency on the right).
Zoom display: Switches between single images (low frequency or high frequency).

7.3.2 Dual frequency display

The dual frequency display provides both low and high frequency pictures, the low fre-
quency on the left half (default). Use the dual frequency display to compare the same
picture with two different sounding frequencies.

Low Low
frequency frequency

Freq. Detection Bottom

Beamwidth Resolution
RADAR

(kHz) range tail

DAR
AR
R

Low Wide Low Deep Long

m
40.4 LF/HF
50/200 kHz
High Narrow High Shallow Short

How to select the dual frequency display

Tap the screen to show the pop-up menu. Tap [Mode], then turn on [Dual Freq.]. The
frequency selected with [Frequency] appears on the right half of the screen.

How to set separate ranges for the low- and high-frequency displays
1. Open the [Fish Finder] menu.
2. Turn on [Split Range]. A message informs you that ACCU-FISH™ will be disabled
when the split range is used.
3. Tap [OK].
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.
5. Pinch the high- and low-frequency displays to change their range.
Note: The slider bar can be used to adjust the range of the image shown on the
left-half of the screen.

7-3
7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.3.3 Zoom displays

Zoom mode expands selected area of the single frequency picture. Two modes are
available: bottom lock and bottom zoom.

How to activate, deactivate a zoom display

Tap the screen to open the pop-up menu. Tap [Mode], then turn on [Bottom Lock] or
[Bottom Zoom]. To quit the zoom display and go to the single frequency display, open
the pop-up menu, tap [Mode], then turn on [Single Freq.].

Bottom lock display

The bottom lock display provides a compressed normal picture on the right half and a
7 to 400 feet (2 to 120 meter) wide layer in contact with the bottom is expanded on the
left half. This display helps you separate the fish near the bottom from the bottom
echo. You can select the bottom lock range with [Bottom Lock Range Span] in the
[Fish Finder] menu.

Bottom lock display Single freq. display

School of fish
Zoomed school
of fish Zoom marker

This area zoomed

and displayed on
left 1/2 of screen.
m
20.5 BL/HF
200 kHz

Bottom shown as a straight line

Bottom zoom display

The bottom zoom display expands the bottom and the fish near the bottom according
to the zoom range selected on [Zoom Range Span] in the [Fish Finder] menu. This
display helps you find the density of the bottom. A short echo tail normally indicates a
soft bottom (sand bottom, etc.). A long echo tail indicates a hard bottom.

Bottom zoom display Single freq. display

Bottom

Zoom marker

Zoom marker
m automatically
20.5 BZ/HF
200 kHz follows change in
depth.

7-4
 7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.3.4 A-scope display (display only)

The A-scope display appears at the right of the screen and is available in any display
mode. This display shows the echoes at each transmission with the amplitudes and
tone in balance with their intensities. This display helps you identify possible fish spe-
cies and bottom structure.

Weak reflection
(small fish or noise)

Fish
echo

m Strong
20.5 HF
200 kHz
reflection
(bottom)
Single frequency display A-scope
display

How to show or hide the A-scope display

Tap the screen to show the pop-up menu, then turn [A-Scope] on or off.

A-scope peak hold

You can show the peak-hold amplitude image on the A-scope display. With [A-Scope
Peak Hold] turned on, the image is slowly erased to help discern amplitude condition
more easily.

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Fish Finder].

2. Turn on [A-Scope Peak Hold].
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

7-5
7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.3.5 Bottom discrimination display

The bottom discrimination display, which requires a bottom discrimination capable
transducer or Bottom Discrimination Sounder BBDS1 or Network Fish Finder DFF1-
UHD, identifies probable bottom composition. The display is available in all screen di-
visions, single or dual frequency mode, and occupies the bottom 1/6 of the screen in
the full screen display.

Use this feature with ship speed 10 knots or less and depths between 5 and 100 m.

Note 1: Composition estimate accuracy may be affected when the transducer is not
parallel with the seabed.
Note 2: Picture advance speed become slow while the bottom discrimination display
is active.

Reliability bar
Reliability of
Bottom bottom discri-
m
discrimination
display 576 LF/HF
50/200 kHz
mination display
shown with colors.
- Green: Normal
Rock Gravel Sand Mud - Yellow: Caution
- Background color:
Sand and rock are the most likely bottom type in this example. Abnormal

How to activate or deactivate the bottom discrimination display

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Fish Sounder].
2. Tap [Fish Finder Source].
3. Tap [TZT12F], [TZT16F], [TZT19F], [BBDS1] or [DFF1-UHD] as applicable.
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.
5. Turn [Bottom] on or off from the [Layers] menu.

How to display bottom discrimination display information

Tap the bottom discrimination dis-
play to show bottom discrimina-
tion information, an example of
which is shown right.
The bottom discrimination display
can be turned off from the pop-up
menu with [Bottom].
The percentage of
main bottom type
is also displayed in
the graph.

7-6
 7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.4 How to Select the Range

The range can be selected automatically or manually. To set the range selection meth-
od, tap the screen to show the pop-up menu, then set Auto Range to [ON] (automatic)
or [OFF] (manual) as appropriate.

Automatic range selection: The range is automatically changed to display the bot-
tom echo. The slider bar for range adjustment is turned off on modes other than bot-
tom lock* and bottom zoom*.

* The range for the bottom lock and bottom zoom displays can be adjusted with the
slider bar.

Manual range selection: Pinch the screen to change the range. Additionally, you can
adjust the range with the slider bar at the right side of the screen. Drag the slider knob,
or tap the [+] or [-] symbol at the top, bottom of the bar. The slider bar can be disabled
with [Show Range Slider] in the [Fish Finder] menu.

How to shift the display range

You can shift the display range up or down to see deep or shallow place. This function
is disabled during auto range [Link] shift the display range, drag the screen up
or down.

7.5 How to Adjust the Gain

Gain can be adjusted automatically (two methods, fishing, cruising) or manually.

7.5.1 Automatic gain adjustment

The automatic gain adjustment feature is convenient when you don’t have the time to
adjust the gain because you are busy with other tasks. With the automatic gain mode
activated, gain, clutter, and TVG are automatically adjusted. The main functions of the
automatic mode are as shown below.

• The gain is automatically adjusted to show the bottom echo in reddish-brown color.
• The clutter function removes weak echoes such as noise and plankton.
• TVG is automatically adjusted.
• The gain between low- and high-frequencies is automatically adjusted.
There are two types of automatic gain adjustment, fishing and cruising.
[Auto Fishing]: The gain is automatically adjusted to emphasize weak echoes from
schools of fish. Use this mode for fishing.
[Auto Cruising]: The gain is automatically adjusted to suppress weak echoes and
emphasize the bottom echo. Use this mode for cruising.

To select an automatic gain adjustment mode, tap the screen, tap [Adjust], then turn
on [Auto Fishing] or [Auto Cruising] as appropriate.

7-7
7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.5.2 Manual gain adjustment

To enable manual gain adjustment, tap the screen, tap [Adjust], then turn on [Manual].

The gain controls how echoes of different strengths are displayed. Set the gain to
show a slight amount of noise on the screen. Increase the gain for greater depths and
lower the gain for shallow waters. The figures below show examples for gain set too
high, too low and with a proper setting, for reference.

Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low

You can adjust the gain two ways.

Method 1: Pop-up menu

Current
1. Tap the fish finder display to show the pop-up setting
menu, then tap [Adjust].
2. Tap [HF] or [LF ]as appropriate.
3. Using the slider bar at right edge of the screen,
drag the handle or tap the [+] or [-] symbol.
4. Tap [Done] at the top of screen to finish. Drag the drag
handle or tap
[+] or [-] symbol.

Method 2: Fish Finder/or Multi beamSonar box in the data area

Follow the procedure in section 1.9.2, section 1.9.3 to add [Fish Finder Gain Control]
or [Multi-Sounder Gain Control] box in the data area. Then, do as follows:

1. Show the fish finder display, multi-beam sounder display, side scan display, or
cross-section display. Tap [FISH FINDER] or [DFF3D] at the bottom of the data
area.
2. Tap [HF Gain], [LF Gain], then [M](Manual) or [A](Automatic). Tap [M]/[A] to alter-
nately select Manual, Automatic. For manual gain adjustment, go to the next step.
3. Tap the numeric of the gain frequency tapped in step 2.
4. Use the slider bar at the right edge of the screen to adjust the gain - drag the knob
or tap the [+], [-] symbols.

7-8
 7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

5. Tap [Done] at the top-right corner of the screen to finish.

Jan 15, 2019 XXXXX

Tap

Tap [M/A] icon to

Current
switch between
setting
auto mode and
manual mode.
XXXXX

XXXXX
Tap

Manual
adjustment

[HF] mode in fish finder screen

7.6 How to Reduce Clutter

Low intensity "spots" of noise appear over most of the
screen like in the illustration shown right. These spots are
caused by sediment in the water or noise. You can reduce
this type of noise with the clutter function.

Note: This function is not available in the auto mode.

Method 1; Layers menu

1. Open the [Layers menu].
2. Drag the slider at [Clutter] to set the level. The larger the
setting, the greater the degree of reduction.

Method 2: Fish Finder menu

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Fish Finder].
2. Drag the slider at [Clutter] to set the level. The larger the setting the greater the
degree of reduction.
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

Method 3: Data area

Follow the procedure in section 1.9.2, section 1.9.3 to add [Fish Finder Gain Control]
or [Multi-Sounder Gain Control] box in the data area. Then, do as follows:
1. Show the fish finder display, multi-beam sounder display, side scan display, or
cross-section display. Tap [FISH FINDER] or [DFF3D] at the bottom of the data
area.
2. Tap [Clutter].
3. Use the slider bar at the right edge of the screen to adjust the gain - drag the knob
or tap the [+], [-] symbols.
4. Tap [Done] at the top right-corner of the screen to finish.

7-9
7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.7 Picture Advance Speed

The picture advance speed controls how quickly the vertical scan lines move across
the screen. A fast advance speed expands the size of a school of fish horizontally on
the screen. A slow advance speed shortens the school of fish. Use a fast advance
speed to see the hard bottom. Use a slow advance speed to see the smooth bottom.

CAUTION
The picture is not refreshed when
picture advancement is stopped.

Cruising in this state in shallow

waters may ground the vessel.
Fast Slow

Note: The picture advances slightly slower when using ACCU-FISH™ or the bottom
discrimination feature.
1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Fish Finder].
2. Tap [Picture Advance].
3. Tap a picture advance speed. [1/16] is the slowest advance speed (16 transmis-
sions per one image feed) and [4] is the fastest speed (4 transmissions per one
image feed). [Stop] stops picture advance, and is useful for taking a photo of the
screen.
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.
Picture advance speed can also be set from the [Layers] menu.

7-10
 7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.8 How to Reduce Interference

Interference from other fish finders and electrical equipment appears on the screen as
shown in the illustration. When these types of interference appear on the screen, use
the interference rejector to reduce the interference. Turn off the interference rejector
when there is no interference, so that you do not erase weak echoes.

Interference from Interference from

other sounder electrical equipment

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Fish Finder].

2. At Turn [Interference Rejection], tap [Low], [Medium], [High] or [Auto]. [High] pro-
vides the greatest interference rejection. [Auto] automatically selects suitable in-
terference setting. [Off] disables the interference rejector.
Note: If two sounders (especially, CHIRP transducer) in the network are used si-
multaneously, refer to the table below for interference rejector setting information.
Unit Interference rejector setting
Other CHIRP sounder Set to [Medium] or [High].
DFF-3D If the DFF-3D and the internal sounder are set to
[High], the interference rejector can be adjusted from
the internal sounder, from the [Layers] menu).

3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

The interference rejector can also be set from the [Layers] menu.

7.9 How to Erase Unnecessary Echoes

You can erase unnecessary echoes that fill the en-
tire screen. Weaker echoes are erased sequentially
to show only strong echoes and clear the picture. Weak
echoes
1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Set-
tings]→[Fish Finder].
2. Operate the slider bar of [Color Erase] to set the
level of echo erasure.
Echoes are erased in sequential strength.
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.
The [Color Erase] function can also be set from the
[Layers] menu.

7-11
7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.10 How to Measure Range, Depth to an Object

You can measure the range and depth to an object with the VRM.

Tap an object to display the VRM. Read the range and depth in the pop-up menu.

Range and depth

to VRM
VRM

7.11 Echo History Display

You can view past echoes which are off the screen. Swipe the screen to the right to
display past echoes. To return to the active display, tap [Cancel Hist] at the top right-
hand corner of the screen.

7-12
 7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.12 How to Balance Echo Strength

Depending on local ultrasound characteristics, the reflection from a school of fish in
deep water may appear in weaker colors than that from a school in shallow water even
though their strengths are equal. To show the schools of fish in equal strengths (col-
ors), use the TVG. The gain level is adjusted according to TVG level and TVG dis-
tance*, so that echoes of the same strength are displayed in the same colors.
* DFF-3D only.

Note: This function is not available in the auto mode.

The figure shows an example display with proper TVG setting.

0 ft 0 ft

Echoes of the same size Echoes of the same size

are displayed in different are displayed in same
sizes and colors sizes and colors.
depending on depth.

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Fish Finder].

2. Drag the slider in [TVG HF] (or [TVG MF], [TVG LF]) to set the level. The TVG’s
function changes according to the fish finder model used, as shown in the table
below.
Fish finder TVG setting method
DFF1, DFF1-UHD, BBDS1, The higher the setting the stronger
DFF-3D (version 1.04 or earlier) the targets in shallow water.
Internal sounder (TZT12F, TZT16F, TZT19F), The higher the setting the weaker
DFF3 (version 1.05 or later) the targets in shallow water.

3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

7-13
7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.13 Fish Finder Alarms

Two types of fish alarms release audio and visual alarms to tell you that echoes from
fish are in the area you selected. These alarms are [Fish Alarm] and [Fish Alarm for
Bottom Lock].

The [Fish Alarm] function tells you when an echo above some strength (selectable) is
within the alarm range you specify.

The [Fish Alarm for Bottom Lock] function tells you when fish are within some distance
from the bottom. The bottom lock display must be active to use this alarm.

7.13.1 How to set an alarm

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Fish Finder]. Scroll the menu to
show the [FISH FINDER ALARMS] section.
2. [Fish Alarm]: Tap [Range Minimum Value] or [Range Maximum Value] below
[Fish Alarm] to display the software keyboard.
[Fish Alarm for Bottom Lock]: Tap [Range Minimum Value] or [Range Maximum
Value] below [Fish Alarm for Bottom Lock] to display the software keyboard.

3. Set the start depth in [Range Minimum Value], the end depth in [Range Maximum
Value].
[Range
Surface
Maximum Value]
[Range Minimum (from bottom)
Value] (from sea
Alarm Range
R surface) Alarm [Range Minimum
[Range Maximum Range Value] (from bottom)
Value] (from sea Bottom
surface)

Fish
h Alarm Fish Alarm for Bottom Lock
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

7-14
 7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.13.2 How to activate or deactivate an alarm

Fish alarm
1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Fish Finder].
2. Turn [Fish Alarm] on or off.
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.
The fish alarm can also be activated or deactivated with [Fish Alarm] on the pop-up
menu.

Bottom lock fish alarm

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Fish Finder].
2. Turn [Fish Alarm for Bottom Lock] on or off.
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.
Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Fish Finder]. Turn [Fish Alarm for Bot-
tom Lock] on or off.

7.13.3 Alarm sensitivity

You can select the echo strength that releases the fish alarms.

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Fish Finder].

2. Tap [Fish Alarm Level].
3. Tap which echo strength releases the fish and bottom lock alarms. Low releases
the alarm against weak-to-strong echoes.
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

7-15
7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.14 ACCU-FISH™
The ACCU-FISH™ feature, which requires an ACCU-FISH™ capable transducer (see
Appendix 3 for compatible transducers), Bottom Discrimination Sounder BBDS1 or
Network Fish Finder DFF series, calculates the length of each fish and shows a fish
symbol and depth value or fish length.

Usage guidelines

• The information provided by this feature is intended for reference only. It does not in-
dicate the exact length of a fish.
• ACCU-FISH™ is available for use on both the high and low frequencies.
• The intensity of an echo depends on fish species. If the indicated length is different
from the true length, you can apply an offset. See section 7.14.2.
• Two frequencies are transmitted alternately without reference to the current display
mode.
• Use this feature with ship speed of 10 knots or less and depth between 2 and 100 m.
• This feature cannot be used with the inside-hull transducer since a fish may not be
detected depending on the frequency of the transducer. Even if a fish is detected, the
fish length indicated may be smaller than the actual length.
• ACCU-FISH™ uses both low and high frequency echoes for the measurements re-
gardless of the frequency mode in use.
• Echoes from a school of fish can be in more than one layer, which can cause wrong
length indication.
• The fish symbol indication is not shown when the bottom echo is not shown on the
screen.
• The split range feature is inoperative when ACCU-FISH™ is on.

7.14.1 How to set ACCU-FISH™

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings] →[Fish Finder].
2. Tap [ACCU-FISH Info].
3. Tap [Fish Size] or [Depth]. Tap [<] on the title bar to go back one layer in the menu.
[Fish Size]: Show length of fish.
[Depth]: Show depth of fish.
4. Tap [ACCU-FISH Symbols].
5. Tap [Solid], [Striped] or [Off] (turn off fish symbol).
Solid Solid Striped Striped
(small) (large) (small) (large)

154 ft 237 ft 154 ft 237 ft Depth (or Fish Size)

Fish size Solid Striped

Large fish symbol (more than 51 cm (20.08 inch))

Small fish symbol (10 to 50 cm (3.9. to 19.69 inch))

6. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

7-16
 7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.14.2 Fish size correction

The fish size shown on the screen can be different from the true size. If the size is
wrong, add an offset to the measured value to get a more accurate indication on the
screen.

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Fish Finder].

2. Drag the slider at [ACCU-FISH Size Correction] to set correction percentage (set-
ting range: -80% to 100%).
Setting Revised size Setting Revised size
+100 Two times -65 1/3
+50 1.5 times -75 1/4
-50 1/2 -80 1/5

3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

7.14.3 How to turn the fish symbol indication on or off

Tap the screen to open the pop-up menu. Turn [ACCU-FISH] on or off. Fish symbols
and their depth values or fish lengths appear on the screen. If you selected [Off] at
step 5 in subsection 7.14.1, the fish symbols are hidden and only the depth values or
fish lengths appear.

7.14.4 How to display the fish information

Tap a fish symbol to display the information (size, depth, bearing and range) about the
fish.

7.14.5 How to set the minimum size of ACCU-FISH™ symbols

If you are in an area where there are many fish, the screen may become congested
with ACCU-FISH™ symbols. To prevent this, you can set the minimum size for the
symbols.

1. Open the [Fish Finder] menu.

2. Tap [ACCU-FISH Minimum Size] to show the software keyboard.
3. Enter the minimum size (0 to 79.98 (inch)), then tap 9.
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

7-17
7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.15 RezBoost™
With connection of a RezBoost™ capable transducer, echo resolution can be im-
proved. In the example below, it is difficult to distinguish fish from the bottom. With [En-
hanced] RezBoost™, however, fish near the bottom are clearly seen.

Enhanced mode Standard mode

RezBoost™ is available with the transducers listed in Appendix 3.

Note: To enable RezBoost™ set the fish finder source as [TZ12F], [TZT16F] or
[TZT19F] as applicable.
1. Open the [Layers] menu.
2. Set [RezBoost] to [Enhanced].
To deactivate RezBoost, select [Standard] at step 2 in the procedure.

7.16 White Edge

The white edge function gives the seabed echo a white edge, making it easier to dif-
ferentiate bottom-feeding fish from the seabed itself.

Note 1: The white edge function is compatible with the internal fish finder, as well as
the following transducers and their software versions. Use of other transducers or soft-
ware versions is not recommended.
Transducer Software version
BBDS1 0252379-02.01, or later
DFF1 0252353-03.01, or later
DFF1-UHD 0252405-03.01, or later
DFF3 0252362-02.01, or later
DFF-3D 0252440-01.03, or later

Note 2: White edge is not available when a TZT9, TZT14 or TZTBB is connected in
the same network.
To activate the white edge function, do the following:

1. Open the [Layers] menu.

2. At [White Edge], tap the desired width for the white edge. The higher the number
the greater the width.
To deactivate the white edge function, tap [Off] at step 2 in this procedure.

7-18
 7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

Note: With the DFF-3D’s triple beam display, white edge is available only with the
downward picture.

White
edge

7.17 Temperature Graph

With connection of a water temperature sensor, you can plot sea surface temperature
over time. Open the pop-up menu and turn on [Temperature]. The temperature graph
runs across the screen from right to left, the latest temperature at the right edge. The
temperature scale is at the left edge of the display. The unit of measurement (°C or
°F) can be selected with [Temperature] in the [Units] menu.

Temperature graph
Temperature scale

7-19
7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.18 Preset Frequency with Fish Finder Power Ampli-

fier DI-FFAMP
The optional DI-FFAMP lets you preset three distinct frequencies.

Note 1: The DI-FFAMP does not support the bottom discrimination display, ACCU-
FISH™ or RezBoost™.
Note 2: The present frequency function is only available when the transducer is se-
lected by model or TDID ([Fish Finder]→[Transducer Setup]→[Transducer Setup
Type]→[Model] or [TDID]). See the Installation Manual for details.
1. Open the [Fish Finder] menu.
2. Tap [Preset Frequency Setup (DI-FFAMP)].

3. Tap [Preset Frequency 1 Setup] (or 2, 3).

4. Tap [TX Mode HF] or [TX Mode LF]

5. Select [Auto], [FM (CHIRP)], or [CW] as appropriate.

[Auto] automatically adjusts CHIRP center frequency and frequency bandwidth
according to the depth. For [Auto], go to step 10. For [FM (CHIRP)] or [CW] go to
step 6.
6. Tap [Center Frequency HF] or [Center Frequency LF] to show the software key-
board.

7-20
 7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7. Set the center frequency, then tap [9]. For [FM] go to step 8. For [CW] go to step
10.
8. Tap [Chirp Width HF] or [Chirp Width LF] to show the software keyboard.
9. Set the chirp frequency bandwidth, then tap [9].
Note: A new frequency is applied after changing it and returning to the fish finder
display.
10. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.
You can switch the frequencies from the pop-up menu.
Tap the fish finder display to open the pop-up menu,
then tap [Frequency]. Select [Preset 1] (2 or 3) as ap-
propriate.

For other, related menu settings, see section 7.19.

7.19 Fish Finder Menu

This section describes the fish finder functions not described in previous sections.
Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Fish Finder] to show the menu.

7-21
7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

[Fish Finder Source]: Set the fish finder to use (TZT12F, TZT16F, TZT19F, BBDS1,
DFF1, DFF3, DFF1-UHD). When using the built-in fish finder, select [TZT12F],
[TZT16F] or [TZT19F] as applicable. You can switch the fish finder source with [Fish
Finder Source] in the [FISH FINDER INITIAL SETUP] section.

[Day Background Color]: Select the background color for use during daylight hours.
The options are [White], [Light Blue], [Black] and [Dark Blue].

[Night Background Color]: Select the background color for use at nighttime. The op-
tions are [Black] and [Dark Blue].

[Echo Color Levels]: Select the number of colors shown on the screen. The selec-
tions are [8 Colors], [16 Colors] and [64 Colors].

[Zoom Reference Lines]: Show or hide the zoom marker, which appears in the bot-
tom lock and bottom zoom modes.
[Cancel Smoothing]: When you select [OFF], smoothed echoes are displayed, how-
ever, the screen resolution is lower. To get higher screen resolution and greater detail,
select [ON].

[Bottom Range Shift Area]: Select the area where to show the bottom echo, when
[Auto Range] is active. For example, setting 75% would place the bottom echo at a
position equivalent to 75% from the top of the screen.

[Heaving Correction]: Turn to apply heaving correction, to stabilize the picture in

heavy seas.
[Note]: Requires connection of a satellite compass™. This function is inoperative with-
out a satellite compass.

[Transmit Rate Manual]: Change the TX pulse repetition rate in 21 levels (21 is high-
est power.). Use 20 in normal use. Lower the TX rate in shallow waters to prevent the
second reflection echo.

[Fish Finder Transmit]: Turn on or off the sounder transmission.

Fish Finder initial setup

7-22
 7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

[Zero Line Rejection]: Turn the zero line (transmission line) on or off. When turned
on, the transmission line disappears, which allows you to better watch fish echoes
near the surface. The length of the transmission line changes with transducer used
and installation characteristics.
Note: If the sounder source is [DFF3], adjust [Zero Line Range] (below) to set the area
where to reject the zero line.

[Zero Line Range]: This feature adjusts the transmission line so that the transmission
line disappears when the menu item [Zero Line Rejector] is turned on. Available with
DFF3 and DI-FFAMP. The setting range is 1.4 to 2.5 for DFF3; 1.4 to 3.8 For DI-
FFAMP. For a long tail, increase the value. If the transmission line does not disappear,
lower the TX power. Applicable to Network Sounder DFF3.

[Transducer Draft]: Set the distance between the transducer and the draft line to
show the distance from the sea surface (Setting range: 0.0 to 99.9 ft).

[Salt Water]: Select [ON] to use this equipment in salt water.

[Fish Finder Source]: Select the fish finder used.

[Transducer Setup]: Select the method to setup the transducer, by model, manually,
or TDID (transducer ID). See the installation manual for details.

[Transmission Format]: Select whether to transmit high frequency and low frequency
simultaneously or with a time difference (DI-FFAMP exclusive menu item). [Parallel]
transmits the frequency simultaneously. [Sequential] transmits with a delay between
transmissions. Use [Sequential] if [Parallel] is generating interference.

[Transmission Power]: Interference can appear on the screen when the fish finder
on your ship and one on a another ship have the same TX frequency. To prevent this
interference, lower your TX power and ask the other ship to lower their TX power. For
the DI-FFAMP, the setting range is 0 (off) to 10. For the DFF1-UHD the settings are
“minimum” and “maximum”.
[External KP]: Turn on to sync with external keying pulse, for DFF3, DFF1-UHD, DI-
FFAMP. The default setting uses the internal sync pulse. For external keying pulse
synchronization, set this item to [ON].

[Bottom Level HF (MF, LF)]: The default bottom level setting (0) determines that two
strong echoes received in sequence are bottom echoes. If the depth indication is not
stable in the default setting, adjust the bottom level here. The setting range is -40 to
40. If vertical bars appear on the bottom line in the bottom expansion display, lower
the bottom level until the vertical bars disappear. Be careful not to lower the level ex-
cessively; bottom fish may be judged as the bottom echo.

[Gain Offset HF (MF, LF)]: If the gain setting is wrong, or there is a difference in the
gain between the low and high frequencies, you can balance the gain for the two fre-
quencies here.

[Auto Gain Offset HF (MF, LF)]: If the auto gain offset is wrong, or there is a differ-
ence in the gain between the low and high frequencies, set an offset here to balance
auto gain for the two frequencies.

[STC HF (MF, LF)]: Delete unnecessary echoes (plankton, air bubbles, etc.) near the
surface that hide the fish near the surface. The setting range is 0 to 10, and 0 is off.
10 deletes unnecessary echoes from the surface to approximately 16 ft. Make sure

7-23
7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

you do not use more STC than necessary, because you can erase the small echoes
near the surface. (For DFF3, DFF1-UHD)

[Frequency Adjust HF (MF, LF)]: You can adjust the TX frequency of both the low-
and high-frequency transducers. Use this feature when your fish finder and another
fish finder operate on the same frequency, causing interference. Change the frequen-
cy of your transducer by enough percentage points to remove the interference. (For
DFF3)

[TX Pulse HF (MF, LF)]: The pulse length is automatically set according to range and
[Link] a short pulse for better resolution and a long pulse when detection range is
important. To improve resolution on zoom displays, use [Short 1] or [Short 2]. [Short
1] improves the detection resolution, but the detection range is shorter than with [Std]
(pulse length is 1/4 of [Std]). [Short 2] raises the detection resolution, however detec-
tion range is shorter (pulse length is about 1/2 of [Std]) than [Std]. [Std] is the standard
pulse length, and is suitable for general use. [Long] increases the detection range but
lowers the resolution (about 1/2 compared to the [Std] pulse length). (For DFF3, DI-
FFAMP)

[Rx Band HF (MF, LF)]: The RX bandwidth is automatically set according to pulse
[Link] decrease noise, select [Narrow]. For better resolution, select [Wide]. (For
DFF3)
[Temperature Port]: Select the data source for water temperature (For DFF3, DFF1-
UHD).
[MJ]: The water temperature data from the water temperature/speed sensor.
[Low Frequency]: The low frequency measured water temperature.
[High Frequency]: The high frequency measured water temperature.

[Fish Finder Demo Mode]: Activates, deactivates the fish finder demo mode, which
provides a fish finder display with data stored in the memory. Connection of the trans-
ducer is not required. Requires connection to the internal fish finder, DFF1, BBDS1,
DFF3, DFF1-UHD, or DI-FFAMP.
[Off]: Disables the fish finder demo display.

[Set Hardware to Factory Default]: Select this menu item to restore default settings
for the unit selected in [Fish Finder Source] (excludes TZTL12F/15F and TZT2BB).

[Reset Default Settings]: Select this menu item to restore default settings for the
[Fish Finder] menu.

7-24
 7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

7.20 Interpreting the Display

Zero line
The zero line (transmission line) shows the position of the transducer. The line disap-
pears from the screen when the range is shifted.
Zero
line

Range shifted

Bottom echoes
The strongest echoes are from the bottom, and are normally shown in reddish-brown
or red. The colors and the width change with bottom material, depth, sea condition,
installation, frequency, pulse length and sensitivity.
Difference in depth Difference in sensitivity

Second
bottom echo

Bottom contour
The tail from a hard bottom is longer than the tail from a soft bottom, because the hard
bottom reflects more of the ultrasonic pulse. An echo from shallow water gives a stron-
ger reflection than the echo received from deep water. A longer bottom tail appears
on slopes, because of the difference in travel time at both edges of the beam angle.
For the rough bottom, echoes are reflected on many different planes, which displays
echoes in many layers, giving a 3D effect.
Soft bottom Hard bottom Rough bottom

7-25
7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

Nature of a bottom
The nature of a bottom is known from the intensity
and length of the bottom tail. To find the nature of
a bottom, use a long pulse length and normal gain.
For the hard and rough bottom, the bottom echo is
reddish-brown with a long tail. For the mud or sand
bottom, the bottom echo has less red and with a
short tail. A bottom with a lot of small particles can
give a long tail on the low frequency picture.
Mud & sand Rock base

Fish volume
The size and density of a school of fish are indi-
cators of the quantity of fish.
Large school
Small school

Size of school of fish

Size of a school of fish

Usually the size of fish echoes on the screen is proportional to the actual size of the
school of fish. However, if two fish echoes appear at different depths with the same
size, the school of fish at the shallower depth is larger because the ultrasonic beam
widens as it propagates and a school of fish in deep water is displayed larger.
School depth and sounding time

Sounding time for a shallow school of fish

S
Sounding
g time
e for a deep
p school of
o fish

7-26
 7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

Density of a school of fish

If two schools appear with the same color at different depths, the one in deeper water
is denser because the ultrasonic wave attenuates as it propagates and the school of
fish in deep water tends to be displayed in a weaker color.
Difference in signal strength

Less reddish Reddish

(Sparse echo) (Dense echo) Strong echo

ak echo
Weak o

Fish echo

Bottom fish
The echoes from the bottom are stronger than the
Bottom fish echo
bottom fish echoes so that you can distinguish be-
tween them by colors. The bottom echoes are
normally shown in reddish-brown or red, the bot-
tom fish echoes in weaker color.

Plankton
Plankton, seen on the screen as a mass of green
or blue dots, appears between the transmission
line and the seabed. Plankton move down in the School of fish
day and up at night. Because fish feed of the Plankton
plankton, you can observe schools of fish within
the plankton layer.

Current rip
When two ocean currents of different speeds di-
rections and water temperatures meet, a current
rip occurs. A current rip appears on the screen as
Current rip
shown in the right illustration.

7-27
7. FISH FINDER (SOUNDER)

Surface noise
When the sea is rough or the ship moves over a
wake, surface noise can appear at the top of the
screen. Surface noise

Air bubbles in the water

When the sea is rough or the ship makes a quick Ultrasonic wave
turn, there can be blank spots in the bottom echo blocked by air bubbles
(see the right illustration). These blank spots are
caused by air bubbles which stop the movement
of the sound wave. These air bubbles can occur
with the low frequency ultrasonic waves.

Unstable bottom echo

The bottom echoes can have a saw-tooth ap-
pearance. This occurs in heavy weather because
pitching and rolling changes the direction of the Unstable bottom echo
ultrasonic pulses and the vertical motion of the
ship causes the distance to the bottom to change.

False echo
When an ultrasonic pulse is transmitted, some energy leaves from each side of the
beam. This energy has the name "sidelobe". Echoes from sidelobes show on the
screen as false images like in the illustration shown below.

Mainlobe

Sidelobe False image

7-28
8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D
This chapter describes the display screens (modes) available with the Multi Beam So-
nar DFF-3D, which displays images of the underwater and the ocean floor with high
precision. Four display screens are provided, multi-sounder, side scan, cross section,
and 3D sounder history.

8.1 Display Screens Overview

Multi-sounder display
From the home screen, tap the Multi Sounder icon to show the multi-sounder display.

The multi-sounder display operates similar to the conventional fish finder, providing in-
formation about the seabed and underwater conditions. The video display scrolls from
the right to left with the passing of time.

The echoes appearing at the right edge of the display are the latest echoes. Echoes
from individual fish, schools of fish and the seabed are shown. With the gain set prop-
erly, the distance to the seabed appears on the screen. Past echoes can be displayed.

The gain, clutter suppressor and TVG are adjusted according to the mode selected,
auto fishing or auto cruising. Manual adjustment of those controls is also possible.

The single beam presentation displays the information detected by the downward-
looking beam. The triple beam presentation displays the information detected by the
port beam, starboard beam, and downward-looking beam.

Depth scale

Bottom
echo Transducer down

Depth

Frequency A-scope

Single beam display

8-1
8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D

Depth scale

Bottom Port Downward Starboard

echo

Depth

Frequency

Triple beam display

Side scan display

From the home screen, tap the Side Scan icon to show the side scan display.

The side scan display shows the echoes received from the port and starboard direc-
tions.

The side scan display starts from the center of the vessel, and traces in the port and
starboard directions. The most recent echoes are at the top of the screen and the old-
est are at the bottom of the screen.
The side scan display is different from the other modes employed by this equipment -
it clearly displays the shape of echoes (fish bed, etc.).

Depth scale

Bottom Bottom

Underwater Underwater

Depth Frequency

Port side echoes Starboard side echoes

8-2
 8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D

Cross section display

PORT OwnShip STBD

From the home screen, tap the

Cross Section icon to show the
School of
cross section display. fish
The cross section display shows
Seabed
seabed and underwater conditions.

This multi beam sonar uses a 120°

beam (downward to port 60°; downward to starboard 60°), providing highly accurate
underwater images.

Horizontal range scale

Transducer
Underwater position
Depth
scale
Bottom Port Downward Starboard
echo

Grid
Depth Frequency

3D sounder history display

From the home screen, tap the 3D History icon to show the 3D sounder history dis-
play.

The 3D sounder history provides a 3D graphic of the past seabed and underwater
echoes detected by your vessel. The display can be used to detect schools of fish.

Horizontal range
Own ship scale

Depth scale

School of fish

Bottom

Depth Frequency
Depth/Color
color scale

8-3
8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D

8.2 Multi-Sounder Display Operations

This section covers the functions available with the multi-sounder display. For the
menu items shared with the conventional fish finder, see chapter 7. To show the
[Multi-Sounder] menu, open the layers menu and then tap [Multi-Sounder Settings]; or
from the home screen, tap [Settings]→[Multi Beam Sonar]→[Multi-Sounder].

Layers menu for multi-sounder

8.2.1 How to switch between TX and STBY

Open the layers menu and then select [ON] for [TX/STBY] to start transmitting, [OFF]
to stop transmitting. "Stand-by" appears at the center of the screen when transmission
is stopped.

8.2.2 How to switch between single beam and triple beam presenta-
tions
1. Tap the multi-sounder display to show the pop-up menu.
2. Tap [Mode].
3. Select [Single Beam] or [Triple Beam].

8.2.3 How to set the TX beam angle

You can set the TX beam angle for the port, starboard and downward beams.

1. Tap the multi-sounder display to show the pop-up menu.

2. Tap [Beam Angle].
3. Select the beam angle.

8.2.4 How to set the TX beam width

You can set the TX beam width for the port, starboard and downward beams.

1. Tap the multi-sounder display to show the pop-up menu.

2. Tap [Beam Width].
3. Select the beam width.

8-4
 8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D

8.2.5 How to show or hide the depth and frequency indications

You can show or hide the depth and TX frequency at the bottom left corner of the
screen.

1. Open the layers menu.

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] for [Depth Information].

8.2.6 Availability of points and event marks registration, and go to a

point
For operation, see chapter 4.

The table below shows function availability according to latitude/longitude, heading

data presence or absence. If there is no latitude/longitude data, none of the functions
below are available.

Latitude/Longitude / Heading data: YES

Item Starboard Downward Port
Point registration Yes Yes Yes
Go to point Yes Yes Yes
Event mark registration Yes Yes Yes

Latitude/Longitude: YES, Heading data: NO

Item Starboard Downward Port
Point registration No Yes No
Go to point No Yes No
Event mark registration No Yes No

For starboard, downward, and port, see the illustration "Triple beam
display" on page 8-2.

8-5
8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D

8.3 Side Scan Display Operations

This section covers the functions available with the side scan display. For the menu
items shared with the conventional fish finder, see chapter 7. To show the [Side Scan]
menu, open the layers menu and then tap [Side Scan Settings]; or from the home
screen, tap [Settings]→[Multi Beam Sonar]→[Side Scan]. The procedures in this man-
ual, for sake of brevity, replace “open the [Side Scan] menu.”

Layers menu for side scan

8.3.1 How to switch between TX and STBY

Open the layers menu and then select [ON] for [TX/STBY] to start transmitting, [OFF]
to stop transmitting. "Stand-by" appears at the center of the screen when transmission
is stopped.

8.3.2 How to change echo color

You can select the echo color.

1. Open the [Side Scan] menu.

2. Tap [Echo Color].
3. Select [White], [Blue] or [Brown].
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.
You can select the echo color from the layers menu.

8.3.3 How to show or hide the depth and frequency indications

You can show or hide the depth and TX frequency at the bottom left corner of the
screen.

1. Open the layers menu.

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] for [Depth Information].

8-6
 8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D

8.3.4 Availability of points and event marks registration, and go to a

point
For how to register points and event marks, see chapter 4.

The table below shows function availability according to latitude/longitude, heading

data presence or absence. If there is no latitude/longitude data, none of the functions
below are available.

Latitude/Longitude / Heading data: YES

Item Starboard Port
Point registration Yes Yes
Go to point Yes Yes
Event mark registration Yes Yes

Latitude/Longitude: YES, Heading data: NO

Item Starboard Port
Point registration No No
Go to point No No
Event mark registration Yes (registered at the center)

8.4 Cross Section Display Operations

This section covers the functions available with the cross section display. For the
menu items shared with the conventional fish finder, see chapter 7. To show the
[Cross Section] menu, open the layers menu and then tap [Cross Section Settings]; or
from the home screen, tap [Settings]→[Multi Beam Sonar]→[Cross Section]. The pro-
cedures in this manual, for sake of brevity, replace “open the [Cross Section] menu.”

Layers menu for cross section

8.4.1 How to switch between TX and STBY

Open the layers menu and then select [ON] for [TX/STBY] to start transmitting, [OFF]
to stop transmitting. "Stand-by" appears at the center of the screen when transmission
is stopped.

8-7
8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D

8.4.2 How to show or hide the grid

The grid, which is useful for measuring the distance to a target, can be shown or hid-
den as follows.

1. Open the layers menu.

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] for [Grid].

8.4.3 Zoom display

The seabed echo can be zoomed.

1. Tap the cross section display to show the pop-up menu.

2. Select [ON] (zoom display) or [OFF] (normal display) for [Zoom].

[Zoom] selected [Zoom] not selected

8.4.4 How to smooth echoes (distance)

If echoes are "disconnected" because of an undulating seabed, change the setting to
[Low], [Medium] or [High] as necessary. Smoothing is done in the range direction to
smooth the echo presentation.

1. Open the [Cross Section] menu.

2. Tap [Echo Smoothing (Distance)].
3. Select [Low], [Medium] or [High]. The default setting is [Medium]. Select [Off] to
stop smoothing.
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

8.4.5 How to smooth echoes (time)

If echoes are difficult to see because they appear "speckled," use the echo smoothing
feature to suppress the speckling by time.

1. Open the [Cross Section] menu.

2. Tap [Echo Smoothing (Time)].
3. Select [Low], [Medium] or [High]. The default setting is [Medium]. Select [Off] to
stop smoothing.
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

8-8
 8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D

8.4.6 How to apply correction to the speed of sound

Even though the sea bottom is flat, the left or right edge, up or down may be distorted.
To compensate for this problem, adjust the speed of sound.

Manual correction
1. Open the [Cross Section] menu.
2. Set the correction with the software keyboard or slider bar at [Sound Speed Cor-
rection]. The setting range is -200 to 200.
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

Automatic correction
The speed of sound is automatically corrected based on the water temperature

1. Open the [Cross Section] menu.

2. Set [[Link] Correction] to [ON].
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

8.4.7 How to show or hide the depth and frequency indications

You can show or hide the depth and TX frequency at the bottom left corner of the
screen.

1. Open the layers menu.

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] for [Depth Information].

8.4.8 Availability of points and event marks registration, and go to a

point
For how to register points and event marks, see section 4.2.

The table below shows function availability according to latitude/longitude, heading

data presence or absence. If there is no latitude/longitude data, none of the functions
below are available.

Latitude/Longitude / Heading data: YES

Item Cross section
Point registration Yes
Go to point No
Event mark registration Yes

Latitude/Longitude: YES, Heading data: NO

Item Starboard
Point registration No
Go to point No
Event mark registration Yes

8-9
8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D

8.5 3D Sounder History Display Operations

This section covers the functions available with the 3D sounder history display. The
3D sounder history is able to display up to 1024 past transmissions.

For the menu items shared with the conventional fish finder, see chapter 7. To show
the [3D Sounder History] menu, open the layers menu and then tap [3D Sounder Set-
tings]; or from the home screen, tap [Settings]→[Multi Beam Sonar]→[3D Sounder
History]. The procedures in this manual, for sake of brevity, replace “open the [3D
Sounder History] menu.”

8.5.1 How to switch between TX and STBY

Open the layers menu and then select [ON] for [TX/STBY] to start transmitting, [OFF]
to stop transmitting. "Stand-by" appears at the center of the screen when transmission
is stopped.

8.5.2 How to move, zoom in, zoom out the viewpoint position
How to move the viewpoint
The viewpoint can be moved by dragging.

How to zoom in, zoom out

The display range can be zoomed in or out by pinch-
ing.
Zoom in Zoom out

How to restore default view

If you get lost in viewpoint or zoom, you can restore the default view as follows.

1. Tap the 3D sounder history display to show the pop-up menu.

2. Tap [Default View].

8-10
 8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D

8.5.3 How to mark school of fish

A detected school of fish can be marked with a "dot" mark for
easy identification.

1. Open the layers menu.

2. Set [Fish School] to [ON] to mark the detected school of fish
with the dot mark.

8.5.4 How to stop advancement of the display

You can stop advancement of the history display to observe the distribution of sea
floor topography and school of fish.

1. Tap the 3D sounder history display to show the pop-up menu.

2. Tap [Pause] to stop the display. To restart the advancement of the history, tap
[Resume] at the top right of the screen.

8.5.5 How to adjust the echo detection level

Adjust the echo detection level if schools of fish are detected unstably.

1. Open the [3D Sounder History] menu.

2. Tap [Fish Detection Level].
3. Select [Low], [Medium] or [High]. The default setting is [Medium]. If too many
schools of fish are being detected, select [Low]. If too few schools are detected,
select [High].
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

8.5.6 How to calibrate the seabed echo

If schools of fish or a fish reef are detected and displayed as the seabed echo, adjust
the strength of the seabed echo as shown below to correctly identify the seabed echo.

1. Open the [3D Sounder History] menu.

2. Set the correction with the software keyboard or slider bar at [Seabed Echo Cali-
bration]. The setting range is -15 to 15. A large figure helps distinguish bottom fish
from the seabed echo; however, it is difficult to distinguish a fish bed. Use a small
figure to distinguish a fish bed; however, it is difficult to distinguish bottom fish from
the seabed echo.
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

8.5.7 How to use the noise filter

If the seabed echo is displayed with undulations, use the noise filter to smooth the sea-
bed echo.

1. Open the [3D Sounder History] menu.

2. Tap [Noise Filter].
3. Select [Low], [Medium] or [High]. The default setting is [Medium]. Select [Off] to
stop smoothing.
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

8-11
8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D

8.5.8 How to use terrain shading

The thickness of the shading for the seabed terrain can be adjusted.

1. Open the [3D Sounder History] menu.

2. Set the thickness of the shading with the software keyboard or slider bar at [Ter-
rain Shading]. The default setting is 50.

Setting: 0 Setting: 50 Setting: 100

3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

8.5.9 Depth/Color Shading display

The seabed echo and schools of fish can be shown in shades of colors according to
depth, to help you see the differences in depths more easily.

Color shading display

Color shading can be applied to the seabed echo or schools of fish. For the seabed
display, the seabed color can be multi tone or single tone, and schools of fish can be
shown in single tone or single color. For the schools of fish display, schools can be
shown in multi tone or single tone and the bottom color is in single tone.

[Color Mode] selected to [Seabed] [Color Mode] selected to [Fish]

Depth/Color Depth/Color Shading Depth/Color Depth/Color Shading

Shading display display Shading display display
Color Scale Color Scale

1. Open the [3D Sounder History] menu.

2. Tap [Color Mode].
3. Select [Seabed] or [Fish].
You can select the color mode from the layers menu.

8-12
 8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D

How to set color shading

Open the [3D Sounder History] menu and then set the following menus.

[Color Mode] selected to [Seabed] [Color Mode] selected to [Fish]

[Color Mode] selected to [Seabed]

Menu item Description Setting options
[Seabed Color] For setting multi tone or single tone. [Classic Hue], [Inverted
Classic Hue], [Red Hue],
[Blue Hue], [Green Hue],
[Yellow Hue]
[Fish Monochrome Color] For setting single tone or single color. [Gray Hue], [Brown Hue],
[Red], [Green], [Blue],
[Cyan], [Magenta], [Black
Or White], [Pink], [Light
Green], [Yellow]
[Auto Seabed Shading] Use automatic or manual seabed shading. [OFF] (manual),
Tap [A] to switch between automatic [ON] (automatic)
and manual depth/color shading
scale setting mode.

Manual mode Auto mode

[Minimum Value] Use the software keyboard to set the shal- 0 to 3936 (ft)
lowest depth to use. [Auto Seabed Shad-
ing] must be [OFF] to enter depth.
Alternatively, tap the minimum value indica-
tion on the color bar scale to show the slider
bar. Drag the slider bar to set. Tap [Done] to
finish.
[Minimum Value]
Shallowest depth

8-13
8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D

Menu item Description Setting options

[Maximum Value] Use the software keyboard to set the deep- 1 to 3937 (ft)
est depth to use. [Auto Seabed Shading]
must be [OFF] to enter depth.
Alternatively, tap the maximum value indi-
cation on the color bar scale to show the
slider bar. Drag the slider bar to set. Tap
[Done] to finish.
[Maximum Value]
Deepest depth

[Color Mode] selected to [Fish]

Menu item Description Setting options
[Seabed Monochrome For setting single tone. [Gray Hue], [Brown Hue]
Color]
[Fish Color] For setting multi tone or single tone. [Classic Hue], [Inverted
Classic Hue], [Red Hue],
[Blue Hue], [Green Hue],
[Yellow Hue]
[Auto Fish Shading] Use automatic or manual fish shading. [OFF] (manual),
Tap [A] to switch between automatic [ON] (automatic)
and manual depth/color shading
scale setting mode.

Manual mode Auto mode

[Minimum Value] Use the software keyboard to set the shal- 0 to 3936 (ft)
lowest depth to use. [Auto Fish Shading]
must be [OFF] to enter depth.
Alternatively, tap the minimum value indica-
tion on the color bar scale to show the slider
bar. Drag the slider bar to set. Tap [Done] to
finish.
[Minimum Value]
Shallowest depth

8-14
 8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D

Menu item Description Setting options

[Maximum Value] Use the software keyboard to set the deep- 1 to 3937 (ft)
est depth to use. [Auto Fish Shading] must
be [OFF] to enter depth.
Alternatively, tap the maximum value indica-
tion on the color bar scale to show the slider
bar. Drag the slider bar to set. Tap [Done] to
finish.
[Maximum Value]
Deepest depth

8.5.10 How to show or hide the depth and frequency indications

You can show or hide the depth and TX frequency at the bottom left corner of the
screen.

1. Open the layers menu.

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] for [Depth Information].

8.5.11 Availability of points and event marks registration, and go to a

point
For how to register points and event marks, see section 4.2.

The table below shows function availability according to latitude/longitude, heading

data presence or absence. If there is no latitude/longitude data, none of the functions
below are available.

Latitude/Longitude / Heading data: YES

Other than Fish
Item Fish Seabed
or Seabed
Point registration Yes Yes No
Go to point Yes Yes No
Event mark registration No No Yes

Latitude/Longitude: YES, Heading data: NO

Other than Fish
Item Fish Seabed
or Seabed
Point registration No No No
Go to point No No No
Event mark registration No No Yes

8-15
8. MULTI BEAM SONAR DFF-3D

This page is intentionally left blank.

8-16
9. FILE OPERATIONS
Points, tracks, boundaries, routes and settings can be read and written using the USB
port. Additionally with a My Time Zero™* account, you can save settings data to the
My Time Zero™* data service cloud. The card slot at the back of the MFD holds mi-
croSD cards, and is exclusively for use with chart cards (data cannot not written to or
read from a micro SD card).

The table below outlines the media that can be used with your unit.

MicroSD CARD
SD card USB flash
Action SD Card Unit (SDU-
converter memory
001, option)
adapter
Write data Yes Yes Yes
Read data Yes Yes Yes

Note: For care and handling of microSD cards see section 1.11.

Handling USB flash memory

• Format the USB flash memory or SD card to file system FAT32. The capacity of the
media should be 32GB or less.
• Do not use a secure USB flash memory.
• Turn off the power before inserting or removing the media connected to the USB
port, to prevent corruption of data.

9.1 File Format

You can select the file format to use to export data.

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Files].

2. Tap [Export File Format].

3. Tap desired file format, among [TZD], [CSV], [GPX].
[TZX]: For NavNet TZtouch3

9-1
9. FILE OPERATIONS

[TZD]: For NavNet TZtouch2

[CSV]*1: For NavNet3D
[GPX]*2: For use with PC plotter

**1: The CSV format has the following export restrictions:

• Points: Max. 2,000
• Routes: Max. 200 (100 points/route)
• Track: Max. 10,000

*2
: When exporting data in GPX format, it is recommended to make a note of the
data contained in the file. GPX files names do not indicate their contents.
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

9.2 How to Export User Objects

This unit holds a maximum of 30,000 points, 200 routes, 100 polygon areas, (bound-
aries), 100 circles (boundaries), 1,000 screenshots, and 1,000 catches. When the ca-
pacity for routes/points is full, new data cannot be stored. If you need to save the
above-mentioned items permanently, save them to a media, following the procedure
below.

1. Put the appropriate formatted media in the USB port.

2. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Files]→[Export User Objects].
3. A confirmation message asks you if you are sure to proceed.
4. Tap [OK]. The message "EXPORT SUCCEEDED" appears if the exporting was
successful.
5. Tap [OK] to erase the message.
6. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

9.3 How to Import User Objects

You can import points, routes and boundary lines to the internal memory of this unit,
using a SD card, microSD card or USB flash memory.

1. Put the appropriate formatted media in the USB port.

2. Open the Home screen, then tap →[Files]→[Import User Objects]. A list of files
stored on the inserted media appears.
USB 1

XXXX. [Link]

XXXX. [Link]

XXXX. [Link]

XXXX. [Link]

3. Tap the file(s) to import. You are asked if you are sure to import selected items.

9-2
 9. FILE OPERATIONS

4. Tap [OK]. The message "IMPORT SUCCEEDED" appears if the importing was
successful.
5. Tap the [OK] to erase the message.
6. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

9.4 How to Export, Import Track

How to export track
This unit saves up to 30,000 points of track data. You can export all tracks to a media
as follows.

1. Put the appropriate formatted media in the USB port.

2. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Files]→[Export Tracks]. A list of files
stored on the SD card or USB flash memory appears.
3. Tap the destination for the track. You are asked if you are sure to proceed.
4. Tap [OK]. The message "EXPORT SUCCEEDED" appears if the exporting was
successful.
5. Tap [OK] to erase the message.
6. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

How to import tracks

You can import the tracks stored on a media to the internal memory of this unit.
Note: Imported track is transfered to each NavNet TZtouch3 unit. Track cannot be
shared among units in the network.
1. Put the appropriate media in the USB port.
2. From the Home screen, tap [Settings]→[Files]→[Import Tracks]. A list of tracks
stored in the media appears.

USB 1

XXXX. [Link]

XXXX. [Link]

XXXX. [Link]

XXXX. [Link]

3. Tap the tracks file to import. You are asked if you are sure to import tracks.
4. Tap [OK]. The message "IMPORT SUCCEEDED" appears if the exporting was
successful.
5. Tap [OK] to erase the message.
6. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

9-3
9. FILE OPERATIONS

9.5 How to Backup the Equipment Settings

You can save the settings data to the SD card inserted in SD card unit or the media
inserted in the USB port to use the settings on other NavNet TZtouch3 units.

1. Put the appropriate formatted media in the USB port.

2. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Files]→[Backup Settings]. A list of
files stored on the SD card or USB flash memory appears.
3. Tap the destination for the equipment settings. You are asked if you are sure to
proceed. The message "EXPORT SUCCEEDED" appears if the exporting was
successful.
4. Tap [OK] to erase the message.
5. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

9.6 How to Load the Equipment Settings

You can load saved settings data from an appropriate media to this unit, and share
them with the NavNet TZtouch3 units in the NavNet network.

1. Put the appropriate media in the USB port

2. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Files]→[Restore Settings]. A list of
user settings stored on the card in the media appears.

USB 1

3. Tap the file to load. A confirmation message appears.

4. Tap [OK]. The message "IMPORT SUCCEEDED" appears if the importing was
successful.
5. Tap [OK] to erase the message.
6. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

9-4
 9. FILE OPERATIONS

9.7 My TimeZero Cloud Data Service

With the TimeZero™ cloud data service, you can share data (settings, points, routes
and tracks) stored in your TimeZero™ cloud account with another NavNet TZtouch3
(requires software version 3.01 or after). To use the TimeZero™ cloud data service,
connect to the internet and create a TimeZero™ account.

9.7.1 How to save settings/data to the cloud

Do as follows to save settings data to the cloud.

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[General].

2. Tap [Login] at the [SOCIAL NETWORK] section and login to your TimeZero™ ac-
count.
3. Tap "<" on the title bar to return to the [Settings] menu.
4. Tap [Files]→[Backup Settings in the Cloud]. If the file already exists in the cloud,
you are informed that the file exists and are you sure to proceed. Tap [OK] to write
over the existing file.

9.7.2 How to retrieve settings/data from the cloud

Do as follows to retrieve settings data from the cloud.

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[General].

2. Tap [Login] at the SOCIAL NETWORK section and login to your TimeZero™ ac-
count.
3. Tap "<" on the title bar to return to the [Settings] menu.
4. Tap [Files]→[Restore Settings From the Cloud]. You are asked if you are sure to
retrieve settings. Tap [OK] to erase the message.
5. Tap [OK] to write over settings data stored in the MFD. If there is no settings data
in the cloud, a message informs you of no data. Tap [OK] to erase the message.

9-5
9. FILE OPERATIONS

This page is intentionally left blank.

9-6
10. CAMERA/VIDEO/EXTERNAL
EQUIPMENT
The camera/video function allows you to use your unit to play back images from a vid-
eo player, on-board camera, network camera, DVD player and other compatible de-
vices. The image from a network camera can be seen by all NavNet TZtouch3 MFD
units in the NavNet network, however it cannot be seen on the NavNet series MFD.
Image size, brightness, contrast and the color of images can be adjusted.

10.1 How to Display a Video Image

To show the camera display, go to the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Camera].
Turn on the [Connected] flipswitch at [ANALOG CAMERA 1] or [ANALOG CAMERA
2], or connect a network camera. Return to the Home screen, then tap the camera dis-
play icon to activate the camera display.

Camera display
icon

Note: The Home icon does not appear when the camera display is active. To show
the Home icon, tap the camera display.

10-1
10. CAMERA/VIDEO/EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

10.2 Video Signal Types

There are five types of video signals which can be connected to this equipment.

• Digital signal (HDMI): Images from surveillance cameras, on-board cameras and
video playback.
Note: This feature is available with TZT16F/19F.
• Analog signal: Images from surveillance cameras, on-board cameras and video
playback.
• Digital signal (IP): Images from a network camera.
Note: Turn on the network camera first, then turn on the MFD.
• Axis Quad Server: The image from an Axis Quad Server, which can feed up to four
lines of video signals simultaneously.
• FLIR: Images from a FLIR brand infrared camera

Compatible FLIR cameras

The following FLIR cameras are compatible the multi function display. (As of 4/2019.)

Type Model
IP camera M132, M232
Analog camera M400, M400XR, M500, M324S, M324CS, M617CS, M625S, M625CS

Note: The ClearCruise™ function of FLIR cameras is inoperative with the multi func-
tion display.

Camera display combinations

The images from a maximum of two cameras can be displayed simultaneously.

Note: The images from two analog cameras cannot be displayed simultaneously.
See the table below for the combination of cameras that can show their images simul-
taneously.

Analog Analog IP Cam- IP IP IP Axis Sec- HDMI

1 2 era Cam- Camera Camera Quad ond Input
1 era 2 3 4 Server Axis
Quad
Server
Analog 1 No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Analog 2 No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
IP Camera Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
1
IP Camera Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2
IP Camera Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
3
IP Camera Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
4
Axis Quad Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Server
Second Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Axis Quad
Server
HDMI In- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
put

10-2
 10. CAMERA/VIDEO/EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

10.3 How to Set the Camera Display

This section shows you how to set up the camera display, on the [Camera] menu. The
Camera menu can be accessed two ways:

• From the Home screen: Tap [Settings]→[General]→[Camera].

• From the [Layers] menu: Open the [Layers] menu to show camera settings.
In this manual, this operation is referred to as “Open the [Camera] menu.”

10.3.1 How to set the video signal

HDMI Input
Note: This feature is available with TZT16F/19F.

[HDMI Input]: Select [ON] when video equipment is connected to the HDMI IN ports.

[Touch Output]: See section 10.6.

[HDCP]: Select [ON] when connecting HDCP playback devices such as DVD and Blu-
ray players.

Video Input 1/Video Input 2 (analog, FLIR)

[Connected]: Turn on to use the device (video equipment, FLIR camera) connected
to the VIDEO-IN1, VIDEO-IN2 port.

[Nickname]: If desired, you change the name of the analog camera(s). The default
names are [CAMERA1], [CAMERA 2]. You can use a maximum of 20 characters. To
change a name, tap [NickName] to show the software keyboard. Change the name,
then tap [9] to finish. The name is reflected to the following locations.

• The name that appears at the bottom right corner of the camera display.
• Home screen→[Settings]→[Camera]→[FLIR Installation]→[Video Source]

10-3
10. CAMERA/VIDEO/EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

IP camera
The IP address and the signal name for the IP camera signal can be changed as
shown below. Additionally PTZ control can be turned on or off.

[Nickname]: If desired you can change the name of the IP camera(s). The default
names are [IP CAMERA 1], [IP CAMERA 2], [IP CAMERA 3], [IP CAMERA 4]. You
can use a maximum of 20 characters. To change a name, tap [NickName] to show the
software keyboard. Change the name, then tap [9] to finish. The name is reflected to
the following locations.

• The name that appears at the bottom right corner of the camera display.
• Home screen→[Settings]→[Camera]→[FLIR Installation]→[Video Source]
[IP Camera]: Enter the IP address of the IP camera, using the software keyboard. Tap
[9] to finish.

[PTZ Control]: Turn this item on to enable PTZ (Pan, Tilt, Zoom) control of the camera.

Note: [PTZ Control] should only be used when the connected camera is compatible
with the PTZ function. Activating the [PTZ Control] function when the camera is not
compatible may cause problems with this equipment's regular functions.

10-4
 10. CAMERA/VIDEO/EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

Axis Quad Server digital signal

A maximum of two Axis Quad Servers can be connected. Each server can be set in-
dividually with the menus [AXIS QUAD SERVER] and [SECOND AXIS QUAD SERV-
ER], respectively.

[Server]: Turn this item on to receive the signal from the Axis Quad Server.
[IP Server]: Enter the IP address of the server, using the software keyboard. Tap [9]
to finish.

[Quad Mode]: Turn this item on to feed four channels simultaneously to one display.
[Input 1] (2, 3, 4): Turn this item on to feed each of the four channels of the server
individually.

[Nickname]: If desired you change the name of the Axis Quad Server(s). The default
names are [VIDEO 1], [VIDEO 2], [VIDEO 3], [VIDEO 4]. You can use a maximum of
20 characters. To change a name, tap [Nickname Input 1] (2, 3, 4) to show the soft-
ware keyboard. Change the name, then tap [9] to finish. The name is reflected to the
following locations.

• The name that appears at the bottom right corner of the camera display.
• Home screen→[Settings]→[Camera]→[FLIR Installation]→[Video Source]

10-5
10. CAMERA/VIDEO/EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

FLIR camera
Images from an infrared camera allow you to navigate easily at night or in bad weath-
er. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Camera]→[FLIR Installation].

Note: To use the PTZ function of the FLIR camera with the NavNet TZtouch3, a set-
ting (Nexus CGI Interface, port: 8090) is required at the FLIR camera. See the opera-
tor’s manual of the FLIR camera for details.
[Scan IP]: Tap [Scan IP] to scan the IP address automatically when connecting an
FLIR camera.

[FLIR IP]: Enter the IP address manually with the software keyboard then tap [9].

[Video Source]: Select the port where your FLIR camera is connected.

[Camera Model]: Select the FLIR camera model connected to your MFD.
• FLIR M-Series: M324CS, M324S
• FLIR M200: M132, M232
• FLIR M400: M400

[Camera Offset (Right-left)]: Adjust the side position of the FLIR camera.

[Camera Offset (Up-down)]: Adjust the up-and down position of the FLIR camera.

[Automatic Zoom]:Turn on to turn on the automatic zoom.

[Zoom Distance]: Set the distance to zoom automatically.

[Camera Altitude]: Set the altitude for the FLIR camera.

10-6
 10. CAMERA/VIDEO/EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

10.3.2 How to switch your video inputs

If you have more than one camera installed, you can switch your video inputs from the
camera screen.

1. Open the [Layers] menu.

Screen name (source)

Example: Two cameras connected

The display contents depends on the cameras connected.

2. Tap the screen name of the camera you want to display.

10.3.3 How to adjust the image size

You can adjust the image size from the [Layers] menu.
1. Open the [Layers] menu.
2. For multiple camera installation, see section 10.3.2 for how to select video input
source.
3. At [Display Mode], tap [Stretch] or [Fit].
[Stretch]: Shrink or enlarge the image to fit the monitor’s width.
[Fit]: Shrink or enlarge the image to fit the monitor’s height. The aspect ratio is
kept, so a black bar appears on the right and left sides of the picture. This is nor-
mal; it is not a sign of malfunction.

10.3.4 How to adjust the video image

Open the [Layers] menu, that adjust the slider bar for [Contrast] or [Brilliance].

10.4 Control of FLIR Camera

[Camera FoV] menu
You can display the field of view captured by the FLIR
camera on the chart plotter display.

1. Tap the boat icon to display the pop-up menu.

2. Turn on [Cone]. The boat icon is put inside a red
translucent circle.

10-7
10. CAMERA/VIDEO/EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

[Move Camera] and [Lock Camera] menus

You can rotate the FLIR camera about the position you select (touch) on the plotter or
radar display. Open the pop-up menu then tap [Lock Camera]. To track the position,
tap [Move Camera] on the pop-up menu. To disable the camera tracking, tap [Unlock
Camera] on the pop-up menu.

Operations from the Layers menu

The [Layers] menu provides for adjustment of image size (see section 10.3.2) and
zoom in or zoom out. Additionally, you can tap [HOME] to restore camera reference
position. For the menu items [Mode], [Scene] and [Surveillance Mode], see the FLIR
Operator’s Manual.

Touchpanel operations with a FLIR Camera

Operation Function
Tap Points camera to direction
tapped.

Drag Rotates camera while dragging.

Pinch Zoom in/zoom out the camera

image (infrared only).

Zoom in Zoom out

10-8
 10. CAMERA/VIDEO/EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

10.5 Tracking Active Waypoint, MOB

The camera can be set to automatically track the active waypoint and/or MOB. Open
the [Camera] menu and then turn on [Automatic Lock on Active Waypoint] or [Auto-
matic Lock on MOB].

10.6 Operating External Equipment

You can control external equipment (such as on-board monitoring and digital switch-
ing) by connecting the external equipment via the HDMI Input ports, and the touch
monitors via the USB ports on the TZT16F/19F.

Note: This feature is not available with the TZT12F.

External equipment
USB
*: External equipment must be
User interface
touch-operation capable.
HDMI

TZT16F/19F External
equipment*
Configuration example

How to set up operation of external equipment

1. Open the [Camera] menu.
2. Set both [HDMI Input] and [Touch Output] to [ON].

How to show the external equipment’s display

From the Home screen, tap the Camera icon to show the external equipment’s display
appears.

Layers menu

With the external equipment display shown, tap the menu icon ( ) at the top-right of
the screen to show the [Layers] menu.

10-9
10. CAMERA/VIDEO/EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT

[Source]: See section 10.3.2.

[Display Mode]: Adjust the image size with [Stretch], [Fit]. See section 10.3.3.

[Zoom In]: No use.

[Zoom Out]: No use.

[Move] button: Moves the menu icon. You can also long tap the menu icon to move
the icon. The icon changes to show flashing arrows ( ), indicating that the icon can
now be moved. Drag the icon to the desired location, then tap the icon. The flashing
arrows disappear and the icon is anchored to the location.

[Contrast]: No use.

[Brilliance]: No use.

[Camera Settings]: Opens the [Camera] menu.

10-10
11. FUSION-Link
The FUSION-Link™ product from FUSION Entertainment allows compatible NavNet
TZtouch3 displays to interface and achieve control of specialized FUSION marine en-
tertainment equipment. The following FUSION-Link™ products are compatible with
the multi function display, as of 1/2019.

Series name Model

750 series MS-AV750, MS-UD750
755 series MS-AV755, MS-UD755
Apollo series MS-RA770, MS-SRX400

Note 1: The Apollo series units have a built-in WiFi, however connect the unit to the
LAN. The PartyBus™ feature of the Apollo is inoperative with the multi function dis-
play.
Note 2: For audio output, a speaker (locally arranged) must be connected to a FU-
SION-Link compatible device.

11.1 FUSION Display

The FUSION display can be accessed two ways.

• From the Home screen

Fusion display
• Two finger tap (long) on screen
Set [Two Finger Log Tap Function] to [Fusion], on the [General] menu, to use this
feature. See section 1.16 for the procedure.

11-1
11. FUSION-Link

Zones 1 and 2 volumes synched.

Zones 1 and 2 volumes independent.

: Select tracks or albums.

: Repeat one or all.

Close
button

Drag
slider to
adjust
volume. Swipe to
Globally change
adjust source.
volume.
Show or hide
[MENU] panel.

Show or hide [ZONES] panel. Show or hide [TONES] panel

(tone controls).

Tap: Goto previous title.

Hold down: Go back.

Playback

Tap: Goto next number.

Hold down: Fast forward.

Lower volume.

Mute/unmute.

Raise volume.

Example1: iPod, full screen

11-2
 11. FUSION-Link

Drag bar to
adjust squelch. Tap to
select
CH16.

Channel
selection
mode

Hide or
show
menu.
Select channel. Lower volume.

Tap: Switch channel selection mode between Mute/unmute.

preset and manual.
Long tap: After selecting channel in manual mode,
long tap to register the channel as preset channel. Raise volume.

Example2: VHF, full screen

11-3
11. FUSION-Link

11.2 FUSION Operation Bar

The FUSION controls can be accessed two ways:

• Tap Fusion on the slide-out menu.

Tap to show or hide the

FUSION operation bar.

• Tap (long tap) the screen with two fingers.

Note: [Two Finger Long Tap Function] ([General] menu) must be set to [Fusion Bar]
to use this method.

Tap to go to full screen

FUSION display. Tap to hide bar.

For iPod

For VHF

11-4
 11. FUSION-Link

11.3 FUSION Settings

Open the Home screen, tap [Initial Setup], then scroll down to find the [FUSION] sec-
tion. Set the [FUSION] items referring to the descriptions shown below.

[Connect to Fusion]: Connects to your FUSION equipment.

[Fusion Auto Volume]: Set to [ON] to allow the NavNet TZtouch3 unit to control the
FUSION volume.

[Minimum Speed]: Set the minimum speed that triggers the volume auto control.

[Maximum Speed]: Set the maximum speed that triggers the volume auto control.

[Volume Increase]: Set the amount of extra volume to output when the speed is that
set at [Maximum Speed].

11-5
11. FUSION-Link

This page is intentionally left blank.

11-6
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DIS-
PLAYS
With connection of appropriate sensors, this equipment provides three types of spe-
cialized displays:

Instrument display: This display provides conventional navigation and environment

data. Analog and digital displays, highway display, NAVpilot data, etc. can be shown.
The display can be programmed to a full screen or three-way split screen.
CZone display: This display offers, in a full screen display, control of the Power Prod-
ucts’ CZone equipment (shipboard power management system) connected in the
NavNet network.

Yamaha engine status display: This display provides engine information about com-
patible Yamaha engines, in a full screen display.

12.1 How to Show the Instrument Display

Set the instrument display on the Home screen referring to subsection 1.7.1. Tap the
instrument display icon to show the instrument display.
Instrument display
(full screen)

Monday, January 1, 2018

Instrument display
(3-way screen)

12-1
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.2 Instrument Displays

This section provides examples of the instrument displays, in their default arrange-
ments.

The background color of the instrument displays can be selected to black or white. The
illustrations in this chapter use the black background.

12.2.1 Full-screen instrument displays

Sailing instrument display

Cruising instrument display

12-2
 12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

Single outboard instrument display

Twin outboard instrument display

12-3
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

Triple outboard instrument display

Quad outboard instrument display

12-4
 12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

Single inboard instrument display

Highway instrument display

12-5
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

Twin inboard instrument display

12.2.2 Three-way, four-way split screen instrument display

Navigation instrument display

Graphs instrument display

12-6
 12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

Environment instrument display

Wind instrument display

Numeric instrument display

12-7
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

Highway instrument display

NAVpilot instrument display

Single engine instrument display

12-8
 12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

Twin engines instrument display

Triple engines instrument display

Tank instrument display

The tank display shows the fuel level in both analog and digital formats. The analog
display indicates an increase or decrease in fuel level and changes color according to
the percentage of fuel remaining.

Green: 10% - 100% Red: 0% - 10%

12-9
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.2.3 How to switch between instrument displays

Note: The data that can be displayed depends on the your system configuration.

Full-screen display
There are nine default full-screen displays, Sailing, Cruising, Single, Outboard, Twin
Outboard, Triple Outboard, Quad Outboard, Single Inboard, Highway?, and Twin In-
board.

You can show the full-screen instrument

display by these two methods.

• Swipe the screen leftward or rightward.

The name of the currently shown display
appears at the center of the screen.
• Tap the screen to show the instrument
screen selection window, shown right.

Three-way, four-way split screen

The default display screens in the 3-way,
4-way split screen are [Navigation],
[Graphs], [Environment], [Wind], [Numer-
ic], [Highway], [NAVPilot], [Single Engine],
[Twin Engines], [Triple Engines], and
[Tank]. The availability of a display de-
pends on your system configuration.

You can switch between the displays by

the following two methods:

• Swipe the screen leftward or rightward.

The name of the currently shown dis-
play appears at the center of the screen.
• Tap the screen to show the instrument
screen selection window, shown right.

12-10
 12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.3 How to Edit the Instrument Displays

The instrument displays are fully customizable. You can edit the displays as follows:

• Remove an indication from a display

• Add an indication to a display
• Rearrange the indications in a display
• Rename a display
• Delete a display
• Remove a display
• Add a custom display
Note: To restore the default instrument displays, go to the Home screen, then tap
[Settings]→[Initial Setup]→[Graphic Instruments Setup]→[Reset Instrument Pag-
es]→[OK]. All default displays are restored and any custom displays are deleted.

12.3.1 How to prepare for editing

To start the editing process, tap anywhere on an instrument display to show the pop-
up menu, then tap [Edit Page] on the menu. A white line circumscribes each indication
in the display, as shown in the figure below. Edit the display referring to the procedures
in the coming sections. To save your changes, tap anywhere on the instrument display
to show the pop-up menu, then tap [End Edit] on the menu.

12.3.2 How to rearrange the indications in an instrument display

Drag and drop the indications to your liking.

12-11
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.3.3 How to edit, remove an indication in an instrument display

1. Prepare the display for editing as shown in section 12.3.1.
2. Tap the indication to process to show the [Edit Instrument] pop-up menu.

3. Do one of the following depending on your objective:

• Bring to front: If two indications are occupying the same location, you can se-
lect one to bring to the front. Tap the indication to bring to the front, then tap
[Bring to Front].
• Remove: Tap [Remove].
• Change the indication: Tap required data in the [NAVIGATION DATA],
[ROUTE INFORMATION], or [WIND AND WEATHER].
• Change the size: Tap [Small], [Medium], or [Large] as appropriate.
• Change the indication type: The available indication types are [NAVIGATION
DATA], [ROUTE INFORMATION], [WIND AND WEATHER], and [ENGINE].

12-12
 12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

• Change the format: Tap [Change Type] to show the pop-up menu shown be-
low. Choose the format and size.

The format choices are [GRAPHIC]*1, [NUMERIC]*2, [GRAPH], [TANK], [HIGH-

WAY], and [NAVPILOT]*3 and the available sizes are [Small], [Medium], and
[Large].
*1 Graph cannot be displayed for engine or tank data.
*2
Displayed with connection of a tank sensor and [MANUAL FUEL TANK] is set
to [ON]. See subsection 12.5.1
*3
Requires connection of FURUNO NAVpilot.
• Change graph plotting time (horizontal axis): Tap [Plot Period]* to change
the time over which the graph’s data is plotted.
* Depending on the display time, the number of data points displayed on the
graph may be reduced, and the graph may be coarse.
• Change graph plotting range (vertical axis): Tap [Plot Range Value] to
change the range for the data display in the graph. Tap [9] to finish and close
the keyboard.

12-13
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.3.4 How to add an indication to an instrument display

1. Prepare the display for editing as shown in "How to prepare for
editing" on page 12-11.
2. Tap an unoccupied position on the instrument display to show the [Add Instru-
ment] pop-up menu.
Note 1: If there is no space available, remove an unnecessary indication following
the procedure in "How to prepare for editing" on page 12-11.
Note 2: You can show a maximum of 24 displays in the full screen instrument dis-
play; 10 displays in a split-screen display.

3. Tap a size in the applicable section.

4. Tap the added instrument display to change its data. See section 12.3.3.

12.3.5 How to rename an instrument display

1. Show the instrument display that you want to rename.
2. Tap the display to show the [Choice of Config Type] pop-up menu.
3. Tap [Rename Page] to show the software keyboard.
4. Enter new name (maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters), then tap [9].

12.3.6 How to remove an instrument display

Tap the instrument display to show the pop-up menu, then tap [Remove Page] on the
menu.

1. Show the instrument display that you want to remove.

2. Tap the display to show the [Choice of Config Type] pop-up menu.
3. Tap [Remove Page]. You are asked if you are sure to remove the page.
4. Tap [OK] to remove the page.

12-14
 12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.3.7 How to add an instrument display

Full screen, three-way split and four-way split screens are preset in this equipment. If
the displays do not meet your requirements, you may add custom displays as neces-
sary. You can have 10 full screen displays, and 10 3-way/4-way split screens.

1. Tap the instrument display to show the [Choice of Config Type] pop-up menu.
2. Tap [Add Page] to show the software keyboard.
Note: If you have reached the capacity for the screen configuration selected, [Add
Page] is grayed out. Remove an unnecessary page referring to"How to edit, re-
move an indication in an instrument display" on page 12-12.
3. Enter a name for the page then tap [9]. A blank page appears.
4. Tap the blank page to show the [Add Instrument] pop-up menu.
5. Tap a size in the applicable section
6. Repeat steps 4 - 5 to add other items.
7. After you have added all items required, tap the screen to show the [Add Instru-
ment] pop-up menu, then tap [End Edit] to finish.
The page name appears in the [Choice of The Config Type] pop-up menu.
8. if you need to rearrange the data, see section 12.3.2 and section 12.3.3.

12.3.8 SC-33/SCX-20 3-axis speed display

With connection of a SC-33/SCX-20 Satellite Compass™ in the network, a dedicated
3-axis speed display data box can be shown in the data area.

This function requires input of the PGN data sentence 130578 (Vessel Speed Com-
ponents).

Referring to section 12.3.3 and section 12.3.4, tap [3-Axis Speed].

Port/starboard directional speed

: Starboard
: Port Tidal current direction
(brown arrow)
Speed at
CCRP*
Fore/aft directional speed
: Fore Speed at mid-ship
: Aft
Wind direction
1.23 3-axis Speed

(purple arrow)
15.67 1.23
Speed at stern 1.23 15.67
Speed
SOG: Speed over
1.23
the ground
STW: Speed thru [Graphic] [Numeric]
the water analog format digital format

*
CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point) is determined at installation, and is either the bow,
transducer location or center of vessel.

12-15
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.4 Instrument Theme

The instrument theme is available in black or white. To change the theme, go to the
Home screen and tap [Settings]→[General]. Set [Instrument Theme] to [Black] or
[White].

Black White

12.5 Fuel Management System

This equipment can calculate the remaining fuel from the total fuel and the fuel con-
sumption rate. This function requires the NMEA 2000 sentence PGN127489 (Engine
Fuel Rate).
Note: The remaining fuel calculation is for reference purposes. Do not use the results
for navigation planning or emergency purposes. During an entire voyage, select one
NavNet Ztouch3 unit for the calculation at start-up. The calculation of remaining fuel
is not done when the unit is powered off.

12.5.1 How to manually enter fuel tank capacity

1. From the Home screen, tap [Settings]→[Initial Setup].
2. At [Total Fuel Capacity], enter your vessel’s total fuel capacity.
3. Set the flipswitch of [Manual Fuel Management] to [ON].
4. Tap [OK] to finish.

12-16
 12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.5.2 How to check remaining fuel amount

You can check remaining fuel and update fuel amount from the [Slide-out] menu.

How to fill up all tanks

1. Tap [Fill up all tanks] on the [Manual Fuel Management] pop-up menu. You are
asked to confirm that you want to fill up all tanks.
2. Tap the [OK] button.
3. Tap the close button on the pop-up menu to finish.

How to add fuel

1. Tap [Add Fuel] on the [Manual Fuel Management] pop-up menu. You are asked
to confirm that you want to fill up all tanks.
2. Enter the amount of fuel to add, then tap [9].
3. Tap the close button on the pop-up menu to finish.

12-17
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.6 CZone
The NavNet TZtouch3 can control Power Products’ CZone equipment connected in
the NavNet network. CZone is a shipboard power management system.

This equipment controls [CZone Control], [CZone Modes] and [CZone Monitoring].
• CZone Control: Controls the power of individual CZone equipment.
• CZone Modes: Controls the power of multiple CZone equipment.
• CZone Monitoring: Shows temperature, pressure, fuel tank and battery state of
CZone equipment.
The table below shows the points of control of each CZone system.

System name Instrument display Data area Slide-out menu

CZone Control Yes No Yes
CZone Modes Yes Yes Yes
CZone Monitoring Yes Yes No
(display only) (display only)

12.6.1 How to use CZone

After confirming the following two items, set up your NavNet system to use CZone.C
• This equipment is connected to the CZone system and NavNet network by NMEA
2000 interface.
• CZone equipment have been properly set.

How to add/edit CZone pages

Add or edit CZone pages in the following instances:

• First use of CZone

• Setting changed at the CZone system
1. From the Home screen, tap [Settings]→[Initial Setup]→[Graphic Instruments Set-
up]→[Add Default CZone Pages]. You are asked if it is OK to add or edit CZone
pages.
2. Tap the [OK] button.
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to close the menu.

About the DIP switches

For the serviceman. Do not change the settings.

12-18
 12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.6.2 CZone control

Display and operations from the instrument display
1. On the Home screen, tap the instrument display icon.
If there is no instrument display icon, see section 1.7.1 for how to add the icon.
2. Tap the display screen, to show the [Choice of the Config Type] pop-up menu.

3. Tap [CZone Control] to show the [CZone Control] screen. Use [ON], [OFF], [←],
[↑], [↓], [→] to control CZone equipment.

CZone Control screen (example)

12-19
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

You can customize the [CZone Control], [CZone Modes] and [CZone Monitoring]
screens. See section 12.3.

Customized screen (example)

Display and operations from the slide-out menu

1. Open the slide-out menu.
2. Tap [CZone Control] to show the following menu.

3. Swipe up or down or tap ">" to select CZone equipment.

4. Use [ON], [OFF], [←], [↑], [↓], [→] to control CZone equipment.
5. Tap the close button on the title bar to close the menu.

12-20
 12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.6.3 CZone modes

Display and operations from the instruments display
1. On the Home screen, tap the instrument display icon. If there is no instrument dis-
play icon, see section 1.7.1 for how to add the icon.
2. Tap the screen to show the following pop-up menu.

3. Tap [CZone Modes] to show the following screen.

Tap the [ON], [OFF] button to operate a CZone equipment.

12-21
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

You can customize the [CZone Control], [CZone Modes] and [CZone Monitoring]
screens. See section 12.3.

Customized screen (example)

4. Tap the close button on the title bar to close the menu.

Display and operations from the data area

1. Show the data area.
2. Long-tap the data box to show the [Edit NavData] menu.
3. Tap a vacant area in the data area to show the [Add Nav Data] menu.

12-22
 12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

4. Tap the display mode that you want to add. The selected item appears at the bot-
tom of the data area.

5. Tap the added item to control corresponding CZone device.

Display and operations from the slide-out menu

1. Open the slide-out menu.
2. Tap [CZone Modes] to show the following menu.
A list of CZone modes appear.

3. Tap the mode to use.

4. Tap the close button on the title bar to close the menu.

12-23
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.6.4 CZone monitoring

Display on the instruments display
1. On the Home screen, tap the instrument display icon. If there is no instrument dis-
play icon, see section 1.7.1 for how to add the icon.
2. Tap the screen to show the following pop-up menu.

3. Tap [CZone Monitoring] to show the following screen.

12-24
 12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

You can customize the [CZone Control], [CZone Modes] and [CZone Monitoring]
screens. See section 12.3.

Customized screen (example)

4. Tap the close button on the title bar to close the menu.

Display and operations from the data area

1. Show the data area.
2. Tap a vacant area in the data area to show the [Add Nav Data] menu.
3. Tap the display mode to add. The selected item appears at the bottom of the data
area. In the example below, water temperature data is shown. To add or delete
data, see section 1.9.2 (add data) or section 1.9.4 (delete data).

12-25
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.7 Yamaha Engine Status Display

When interfaced with a Yamaha outboard engine(s) compatible with Command Link®
and Command Link Plus®, the NavNet TZtouch3 can display engine information on
the full-screen or quarter screen, dedicated Yamaha engine status displays. There are
two types of displays, the engine combo display, and the boat status display.

Note: The example figures in this section are taken using the full-screen display.
The engine combo display shows critical engine system data, including shift posi-
tion, engine RPM, boat speed, engine trim level, available fuel in gallons, fuel level (up
to six tanks), fuel flow, fuel economy and other vital engine functions such as oil pres-
sure, water pressure and battery voltage.

The boat status display shows provides important information such as trip distance,
speed, fuel flow, fuel economy, gallons used, rudder info, depth, and other informa-
tion.

Yamaha engine information can also be shown on the conventional instrument dis-
play, using the NMEA 2000 PGN sentences 127488 (Engine Parameters, Rapid Up-
date) and 127489 (Engine Parameters, Dynamic).
The information for a maximum of four engines is available. Set the number of engines
and other engine-related information on the [YAMAHA ENGINE SETUP] menu, in the
[Initial Setup] menu. For details, see the NavNet TZtouch3 installation manual.

12.7.1 How to show the display

Add the Yamaha engine status display icon to the Home screen (if it has not already
been done), referring to section 1.7.1. Tap the Yamaha engine status display icon on
the Home screen to show the display.

12-26
 12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.7.2 Display examples

Each display type is divided into three sections: upper, middle and lower. The error
message area at the top of a display shows engine error messages.

For detailed descriptions of the displays, see the Operator’s Manual for the Yamaha
engine.

Error message area

CHECK SYSTEM! Starboard Engine

Upper section 1

Upper section 2

Middle section
(layout depends
on no. of engines)

Lower section

Engine combo display (example: twin engine)

Error message area

Upper section

Middle section

Lower section

Boat status display

12-27
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.7.3 How to switch between displays

There are two methods by which you can switch displays.
Tap screen: Tap the screen to show the pop-up window, then tap the indication in the
window, as in the example below.
Swipe screen: Swipe the screen from bottom up or top down.

Pop-up window

12.7.4 How to select the data to display in a data box

Tap a data box in a Yamaha engine display, and a pop-up menu appears. Tap the de-
sired data on the pop-up menu to show it in the selected data box. The example below
shows the pop-up menu available with the boat status display.
For the engine combo display, only the data boxes in the lower and middle sections
can be changed.

Pop-up
menu
(example)

12-28
 12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.7.5 Troll mode

The Troll mode is also integrated into the display, allowing you to control trolling speed
from the engine combo display. Tap the Troll mode ON switch at the top right corner
on the engine combo display to activate the mode. The Troll mode operation panel ap-
pears at the bottom of the display. Use the controls on the panel to operate the Troll
mode, referring to the illustration below.

For details, see the Operator’s Manual for the Yamaha engine.

Troll mode
ON switch

Troll mode
operation panel

Troll mode
Change engine RPM OFF switch Hide Troll
(50 RPM steps) mode operation
panel

12-29
12. INSTRUMENT-RELATED DISPLAYS

12.7.6 Trouble codes

Trouble codes generated by the engine can be reviewed on the [YAMAHA ENGINE
SETUP] menu, in the [Initial Setup] menu. For detailed information, see the Operator’s
Manual for the Yamaha engine.

12.7.7 Alarm list

When an engine alarm is violated, you can see the name of the offending alarm on the
[Alarms] list. See section 2.10.9 for details.

12-30
13. WEATHER OPERATIONS
This chapter describes how to operate the built-in weather feature, NavCenter, and
the optional Furuno BBWX SiriusXM weather receiver. Your weather receiver pro-
vides weather information (U.S.A only), in analog and digital forms. The SiriusXM sat-
ellite radio is also available with a SiriusXM satellite radio subscription.

13.1 Weather Display Introduction

Your NavNet TZtouch3 has a built-in NavCenter weather data, via an Ethernet con-
nection, and optional weather data via the FURUNO BBWX SiriusXM weather receiv-
er.

Note: For BBWX SiriusXM weather receiver operations, see section 13.3.

How to select the weather display

The weather display is overlaid on the 2D plotter display. Select the weather display
on the Home screen, by tapping the weather display icon.

Weather display

13-1
13. WEATHER OPERATIONS

13.2 NavCenter Weather

You can download the NavCenter data from the internet via Wireless LAN. See
section 1.19 for how to connect to the internet.

13.2.1 How to set up for NavCenter weather

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Weather].
2. Tap [Load Weather File].
Note: The option [Sirius] appears when connecting a FURUNO BBWX series
weather receiver.
3. Tap [NavCenter] then tap < to return to the menu.
4. Tap [Tidal Step].

5. Tap the update interval (which determines how often tidal data are captured) for
the tide icon.

13-2
 13. WEATHER OPERATIONS

6. Tap [Duration of Animation].

7. Tap the update interval for the animation. The larger the time, the slower the ani-
mation moves.

13.2.2 How to download the NavCenter weather data

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[General].
2. Tap [Wireless LAN Settings].
3. Turn on [Wireless].
4. After the internet connection is established, tap the close button to exit.
5. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Weather].

13-3
13. WEATHER OPERATIONS

6. Tap the data model from [Model] in the [NAVCenter Download] section. (The op-
tions are [USA] and [Worldwide].)
7. Drag the slider in [Forecast Days] to select how many days’ data to download.
8. Turn on the items to receive, from [Wind] to [Plankton].
9. For [Sea Surface Temperature], set the following menu items.

[Weather Color Transparency]: Adjust the degree of transparency for the weath-
er overlay. Use a large figure to increase the degree of transparency.
[Auto SST Color Scale]: Activate this feature to adjust the SST color scale auto-
matically according to the sea surface temperature.
[Minimum Value]: Set the minimum value for the SST color when [Auto SST Col-
or Scale] is deactivated.
[Maximum Value]: Set the maximum value for the SST color when [Auto SST
Color Scale] is deactivated.
10. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.
11. Open the weather display, then tap the screen to show the pop-up menu. Tap [Get
Latest Wx].
The notification bar at the top of the screen flashes the message "Weather Update in
Progress" during the downloading. If the downloading was successful, the message "
DOWNLOAD SUCCEEDED" appears. Tap [OK] to finish.

13.2.3 How to display the NavCenter weather data

The NavCenter data display provides forecast data that includes [Wind], [Waves],
[SST] (sea surface temperature), [Cloud], [Rain], [Pressure], [500mb], [Air Temp],
[Currents], [Altimetry], [Plankton].
Home Center Vessel

esterday 20 oday 21
To Tomo

13-4
 13. WEATHER OPERATIONS

1. Tap the screen to show the pop-up menu, then

tap [Wx Data].
2. Turn on necessary data (wind, waves, etc.).
3. The animation display provides a visual presenta-
tion of the weather over time. To start the anima-

tion display, tap the icon on the animation bar

at the bottom of the screen. The display shows
the forecast for the date and time selected. Drag
the time scale horizontally to select a time - left for
past time, right for future time. To stop the anima-
tion display, tap [End Anim] (top left-hand corner
of screen).

Tap to return to beginning of animation display.

Tap to fast rewind animation display.
Tap to playback the animation display.
Tap to fast forward the animation display.
Tomorrow
Saturday, 1 1, 2014
January

The time scale moves.

Tap to set the time scale to the current time and display the current data.

Saturday, January1 1, 2014

Tomorrow

Tap to temporarily stop the animation display.

How to find weather data for a location

Tap desired location to show the pop-up window. Scroll the window to see other data.

13-5
13. WEATHER OPERATIONS

13.2.4 How to load a weather file

You can load a weather file saved on a microSD card or USB flash memory.

1. Set the media containing the weather file in the microSD card drive or the USB
port.
2. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Weather]→[Load Weather File].
3. Tap the data to load then tap [OK].
4. After the equipment has loaded the selected data, tap the close button to finish.

13.3 SiriusXM Weather

SiriusXM weather radar information and advanced weather information are available
in North America with connection of the FURUNO BBWX SiriusXM weather receiver.
SiriusXM satellite radio is also available with a SiriusXM satellite radio subscription.

Your system displays the current and forecasted marine weather information for your
area. The weather information is updated in real time so that you have current weather
information for your area and any area in the U.S.

Information provided by the FURUNO BBWX SiriusXM weather receiver service is ad-
visory in nature. You, the customer, agree to release FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.,
SiriusXM satellite radio INC, Navcast Inc. and WSI Corporation from any problems
that occur from this service. And you acknowledge that you have read the conditions
of your subscription agreement and agree to all the conditions of the subscription. If
you do not have the subscription agreement, go to [Link]
weatheragreement, or call 1-855-796-9847 to have a copy sent to you.

You can put a point on the weather display. Tap the screen where to put a point, then
tap [New Point] on the pop-up menu.

Before using your SiriusXM satellite weather receiver...

• Purchase a SiriusXM satellite weather service subscription. Contact SiriusXM sat-
ellite radio INC. for additional information.
• Purchase a SiriusXM satellite radio service subscription. Contact SiriusXM satellite
radio INC. for additional information.
• After installation of the FURUNO BBWX SiriusXM weather receiver, make sure to
check the NavNet TZtouch3 sensor list to make sure the BBWX appears in the sen-
sor list.

BBWX4 BBWX4

13-6
 13. WEATHER OPERATIONS

If the receiver does not appear in the list, check the Antenna LED on the FURUNO
BBWX SiriusXM weather receiver and the connection between the two units. The
LED is solid violet when a normal antenna connection is detected, and off or flashing
violet in case of antenna short circuit.
• Connect the FURUNO BBWX SiriusXM weather receiver and the NavNet TZtouch3
displays then turn on both of those units. Your unit then receives WX data from the
weather receiver, which takes approximately 30 minutes.

13.3.1 How to set up for SiriusXM weather

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Weather]→[Weather Data Server].
2. Tap [Sirius] then tap < to return to the menu.
3. Tap [Sirius Weather Radar].
4. Tap the SiriusXM weather radar to use, [US Now Radar] (USA) or [CanadRad]
(Canada). [US Now Radar] shows the type and level of precipitation. The amount
of precipitation increases with level.
Precipitation indication on USNowRadar.
Weather radar color Precipitation type Level
Light green Rain 15-19 dBz
Medium green Rain 20-29 dBz
Dark green Rain 30-39 dBz
Yellow Rain 40-44 dBz
Orange Rain 45-49 dBz
Light red Rain 50-54 dBz
Dark red Rain over 55 dBz
Light blue Snow 5-19 dBz
Dark blue Snow over 20 dBz
Light pink Mixed 5-19 dBz
Dark pink Mixed over 20 dBz

Precipitation indication on CanadianRadar

Weather radar color Level (mm per hour)
Transparent (low precipitation) 0.00 to 0.20 mm/hr
Light green 0.21 to 1.00 mm/hr
Medium green 1.01 to 4.00 mm/hr
Dark green 4.01 to 12.00 mm/hr
Yellow 12.01 to 24.00 mm/hr
Orange 24.01 to 50.00 mm/hr
Light red 50.01 to 100 mm/hr
Dark red over 100.01 mm/hr

5. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

13-7
13. WEATHER OPERATIONS

13.3.2 How to display the SiriusXM weather data

[Wx Radar] (Weather radar)
NOWRAD and Canadian weather radar information are put on top of your chart (see
subsection 13.3.1). To display the weather radar, turn on [Wx Radar] from the layer
menu.

Wx radar
display

[Adv Wx Data] (Advanced weather)

The advanced weather display provides the weather data; [Buoys], [City], [Storm],
[Lighting] or [Storm Tracks] or [Marine Zone]. For the icons of these data, see
section 13.4.

1. Tap the screen to show the pop-up menu, then tap [Adv Wx Data].
2. Tap a menu item to display its data.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select all menu items desired.

6,695

esterday 20 To
oday 21 Tomo

[Anim Radar] (Animation radar)

The animation radar display provides the past weather radar information. To show the
animation radar display, tap [Anim Radar] on the pop-up menu. To stop the animation
display, tap [End Anim] at the top right-hand corner of the screen.

13-8
 13. WEATHER OPERATIONS

13.4 Weather Icons (SiriusXM Weather)

The table below shows the weather icons that appear on the SiriusXM weather dis-
play. You can show or hide these icons from the pop-up menu, with [Wx Data].

Icon Meaning
Storm cast

Lightning

Surface observation stations

Buoy or
CMAN sta.

Wind

City

Currents

Storm tracks

Surface pressure

etc.

13-9
13. WEATHER OPERATIONS

13.5 Weather Data (NavCenter or SiriusXM Weather)

The table below shows the weather data available for displaying according to weather
data server (NavCenter or SiriusXM weather).

Items NavCenter SiriusXM Item NavCenter SiriusXM

Wind Yes Yes Currents Yes No
Waves Yes Yes Altimetry Yes No
SST Yes Yes Plankton Yes No
Cloud Yes No Buoys No Yes
Rain Yes No City No Yes
Pressure Yes Yes Storm No Yes
500mb Yes No Lightning No Yes
Air Temp Yes No Storm Tracks No Yes

[Wind]: The wind forecast displays

the wind speed by color. The bar at
the bottom points in the wind direc-
tion.

Direction
<5 5<
=, <9 9<
=, <14

( Wind speed
in knot )
14<
=, <19 19<
=

[Waves]: The waves forecast dis- Home

plays wave height with color. 0 foot

(minimum) is displayed in light blue,
35 feet (maximum) in red.

[Cloud]: The cloud forecast displays

cloud images. 8% of cloud amount
(minimum) is displayed in white,
100% (maximum) in black. The
cloud amount under 8% is transpar-
ent.

13-10
 13. WEATHER OPERATIONS

[Rain/Snow]: The rain/snow fore-

cast displays rain/snow images. 0.1
mm/hour of rainfall/snowfall (mini-
mum) is displayed in green, 5 mm/
hour (maximum) in dark violet.

[Air Temp]: The air temp forecast

displays the air temperature by col-
or. -45°C (-49°F) (minimum) is dis-
played in dark violet, 45°C (113°F)
(maximum) is displayed in red.

[Pressure]: The pressure forecast

displays surface pressure.

[500mb]: The 500mb forecast dis-

plays the contour lines over 500 mb.

13-11
13. WEATHER OPERATIONS

[SST] (Sea surface tempera-

ture): This data layer shows
the temperature of the sea
surface in shades. Lower tem-
peratures are in dark blue,
higher in red.
On the screen, you can turn
on or off the automatic SST
scale by tapping [A].
Set the minimum or maximum
value for which to show SST.
See page 3-5 for how to set Manual SSTscale
SST scale
the value. This is available mode
䉝
when [Auto] is off. Auto
mode Minimum
Minimum Maximum
Maximum
value
value value
value
Tap “A” to select automatic or manual adjustment fo the
SST scale.
Manual mode: Use the slider bar to set scale.
Auto mode: SST scale automatically set according to
the depth shading selection set in the menu ([Set-
tings]→[Plotter]).
[Currents]: The current fore-
cast displays the tidal current speed
and direction by blue arrow. The
darker the blue, the faster the cur-
rent speed (0 to 2 kn).

[Altimetry]: The altimetry forecast

displays the sea height anomalies
by color. The large anomalies are
displayed in red, smaller ones in
light green.

[Plankton]: The plankton forecast

displays the plankton growth in
tones of green. The darker the
green, the greater the density of the
plankton.

13-12
 13. WEATHER OPERATIONS

13.6 SiriusXM Weather Diagnostics

Your FURUNO BBWX SiriusXM weather receiver can be checked for proper opera-
tion as shown below.

1. From the Home screen, tap [Settings]→[Initial Setup] to show the [Initial Setup]
menu.
2. Scroll down to the [SIRIUS DIAGNOSTIC] window, then tap [Sirius Weather Di-
agnostic]. The count for each weather item is shown.

13-13
13. WEATHER OPERATIONS

13.7 SiriusXM Satellite Radio

The SiriusXM satellite radio provides round-the-clock, 100% commercial-free music
from every genre plus sports, news, talk and comedy.

13.7.1 How to enable the radio

Method 1: From the Home screen
Go to the Home screen and tap the [Sirius] icon to show the full screen SiriusXM radio
controls. See the next page.

SiriusXM
icon

Method 2: From the Home screen

Open the slide-out menu, then tap the [Sirius Audio] icon to show or hide the audio
control bar. See the next page for how to operate the audio control bar.

SiriusXM
Audio icon

13-14
 13. WEATHER OPERATIONS

13.7.2 How to operate the radio controls

Full screen controls

Channel, music genre

Signal strength

Sound
setting

Title,
artist

Preset
channels

Select Raise Channel selection*

category. volume.
Mute, unmute.
Lower volume.
*: The channel ▲ and ▼ down buttons cycle through the available
channels within the selected category. To allow the system to cycle
through all categories and channels, tap the ALL CH button. Tap the
button again to return to category-based channel selection.

Audio control bar controls

Preset channels Artist, title Channel,

music genre Raise
volume.
Mute,
unmute.

Lower
volume.

13-15
13. WEATHER OPERATIONS

13.7.3 Radio diagnostics

Your SIriusXM satellite radio can be checked for proper operation as shown below.
This test is intended for the service technician.

1. From the Home screen, tap [Settings]→[Initial Setup] to show the [Initial Setup]
menu.
2. Scroll down to the [SIRIUS DIAGNOSTIC] window, then tap [Sirius Radio Diag-
nostic]. The count for each weather item is shown.

13-16
14. AIS, DSC MESSAGE

14.1 What is AIS?

AIS (Automatic Identification System) is a system that continuously transmits the iden-
tification and position of your ship to AIS-equipped ships within VHF range. All such
ships also receive data from other AIS-equipped ships and display their positions and
other relevant information. The AIS broadcasts this information over a VHF transceiv-
er. The information is as shown below.

• Position • Call sign

• Name of ship • Speed over ground
• Course over ground • Rate of turn
• Heading

14.2 How to Show or Hide the AIS Symbols

1. On the radar display or chart plotter display, open the [Layers] menu.
2. Turn [AIS Targets] on or off.

14.3 AIS Target Symbols

Target
Symbol Description
type
Activated SOG/COG
COG is indicated on the sym-
AIS target vector bol with a dashed line.
Note: An AIS symbol that has a
ROT (Rate of Turn) "TX marker" (callout) above it
indicates that vessel has trans-
Heading line
mitted an AIS message.
Symbol color
Blue: Class A AIS target TX marker
Green: Class B AIS target (callout)
Blue (hollow): BFT AIS target (see next page)

Dangerous The target whose CPA and

AIS target TCPA are smaller than the
CPA/TCPA (see
Color: Red
section 14.11). alarm setting is
indicated as a dangerous tar-
get.

14-1
14. AIS, DSC MESSAGE

Target
Symbol Description
type
Lost AIS An AIS target becomes a lost
target target if a signal is not received
from the AIS target for x* min-
utes. The lost target symbol is
Symbol color erased if a signal is not re-
Blue: Class A AIS target ceived for an additional x* min-
Green: Class B AIS target
utes.
Blue (hollow): BFT AIS target (see next page)
*: The time depends on the AIS
transponder. Check the opera-
Cross mark color
tor’s manual for your AIS tran-
Red
sponder for information about
lost targets.
No CPA/ AIS symbols are shown in bro-
TCPA ken lines in the following cas-
target es:
Class A AIS Class B AIS • No water or ground tracking
(Symbol color: Blue) (Symbol color: Green) speed of your ship, or there
is no speed data. All AIS
symbols are shown in bro-
ken lines.
• No speed data from AIS tar-
get. The symbol of the corre-
sponding AIS target is
shown in broken lines. A tar-
get with neither a reported
heading nor COG is oriented
toward the top of the opera-
tional display area.

Note: This unit is equipped with the Blue Force Tracking (BFT) function.
Other AIS symbols that may appear are shown in the table below.

Symbol Meaning
AtoN

Base Station

Aircraft

SART

14-2
 14. AIS, DSC MESSAGE

14.4 Proximity AIS Target Alarm

The proximity AIS target alarm alerts you when an AIS target is within the distance you
specify, and is applicable to both displayed and not displayed targets. When an AIS
target is within the distance set, the alarm indication "Proximity AIS Alarm" flashes in
the status bar and the audio alarm sounds. (See subsection 2.10.9).

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Targets].

2. Turn on [Proximity AIS Target Alarm].
3. Tap [Proximity AIS Target Alarm Value] to open the software keyboard.
4. Set the alarm value, then tap [9].
5. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

14.5 How to Ignore Slow Moving AIS Targets

The proximity AIS target alarm may often sound in areas of heavy vessel traffic. You
can prevent frequent release of the alarm against slow, non-threatening targets by
specifying the maximum target speed that triggers the alarm. Any target whose speed
is lower than set here does not trigger the alarm.

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Targets].

2. Tap [Ignore Alarms for AIS Slower than...] to open the software keyboard.
3. Set a speed, then tap [9]. Any AIS target whose speed is lower than set here is
ignored.
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

14.6 How to Display AIS Safety Messages

When you receive an AIS safety
message (addressed or broadcast)
from an AIS transponder equipped
vessel, the Status bar displays the
flashing message "New Text Tele-
gram(s)". Tap the Status bar to dis-
play the message. The AIS symbol
for the vessel that transmitted the
message is put at the center of the
screen and a pop-up window ap-
pears, showing the AIS safety relat-
ed message. You can delete the
message by tapping [Delete Message].

You can disable the AIS message notifications by turning off [AIS Message Notifica-
tion] in the [Targets] menu.

14-3
14. AIS, DSC MESSAGE

14.7 How to Display AIS Target Data

Tap an AIS target (chart plotter or radar display) to display the simple information in
the pop-up menu.

For detailed information, tap the target, then tap [Info] on the pop-up menu to show the
[Target Info] window.
GALE WARNING 27.16N 82.40W

Info

Simple information
Detailed information

14.8 How to Show or Hide the Target IDs

You can show or hide the target ID of AIS targets.

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Targets].

2. Turn [Display Target IDs] on or off.
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

14-4
 14. AIS, DSC MESSAGE

14.9 AIS List

The [AIS] list provides information about the AIS targets you are receiving navigation
data from.

How to open the AIS list

Open the Home screen, then tap [Lists]→[AIS].

The vertical bar before the target name is colored according to that vessel’s AIS tran-
sponder type or vessel’s status.
Blue: Class A AIS transponder
Green: Class B AIS transponder
Red: Dangerous AIS target
Black: Data is not reliable

You can sort the list with the buttons on the title bar.

[Name]: AIS targets sorted in alphanumeric order

[Range]: AIS targets sorted by range in ascending order.
[CPA]: AIS targets sorted by CPA in ascending order.

Note 1: To update the list, tap [Refresh].

Note 2: AIS SART targets appear at the top of the list.

List sort buttons

14-5
14. AIS, DSC MESSAGE

How to display the detailed information for an AIS target

Tap the AIS target on the [AIS] list then tap [Detail]. The name of the AIS is shown in
the title bar and navigation data appears in the [TARGET INFO] section.

FURUNO

How to find an AIS target on the chart plotter display

Tap the AIS target on the [AIS] list, then tap [Find On Chart]. The target is placed at
the center of the chart plotter display.

How to edit an AIS nickname

1. On the [AIS] list, tap the AIS target to edit its nickname.
2. Tap [Edit Nickname] to display the software keyboard.
3. Enter the nickname, then [9] to finish. You can use a maximum of 20 alphanumer-
ic characters.
4. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

14.10 AIS SART

When an AIS SART is received (in-
cluding re-received ones), the mes-
sage "AIS SART Alarm" appears Goto

flashing in the Status bar. Tap the

Status bar to acknowledge the mes-
sage. Then, the AIS SART is put at
the center of the screen and the pop-up shown above appears. To set the AIS SART
as destination, tap [Goto] on the pop-up.

14-6
 14. AIS, DSC MESSAGE

14.11 CPA/TCPA Alarm

This alarm helps you keep your ship away from collision by warning of targets on a
collision course. The ARPA continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest
Point of Approach (CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each tracked target.
When both the predicted CPA and TCPA are less than their CPA/TCPA alarm values,
the target symbol of the vessel on a possible collision course turns red, the audio
alarm sounds and the message "CPA/TCPA Alarm" appears flashing in the Status
bar.

Make sure that the gain, sea and rain controls are correctly adjusted before you use
this alarm. CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set correctly according to the size, ton-
nage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of your ship.

How to set the CPA/TCPA alarm

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Targets].
2. Turn on [CPA/TCPA Alarm].
3. Tap [CPA Alarm Value] to display the software keyboard. Set the value (distance)
then tap [9] to finish.
4. Set [TCPA Alarm Value] similarly.
5. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

How to acknowledge the CPA/TCPA alarm

The CPA/TCPA alarm generates audio and visual alerts when the CPA and TCPA of
an ARPA target are within the CPA/TCPA alarm range. The message "CPA/TCPA
Alarm" appears flashing in the Status bar. To acknowledge the alarm and stop the au-
dio alarm and the flashing message, tap "CPA/TCPA Alarm" on the Status bar.

How to deactivate the CPA/TCPA alarm

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Targets].
2. Turn off [CPA/TCPA Alarm].
3. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

14-7
14. AIS, DSC MESSAGE

14.12 How to Register an AIS or DSC Target to the

Buddies List
The buddies list provides a quick reference to ships’ MMSI and nickname. For exam-
ple, you might want to enter the MMSI and nickname of partner ships or ships that of-
ten operate in your area.

How to add a buddy to the buddies list

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Targets]→[Buddies List (AIS &
DSC)]. The indication shown below appears.

2. Tap [Add Buddy] to open the numeric software keyboard.

3. Enter the MMSI number of your buddy, then tap [9].
4. Tap the MMSI number just entered to show the software keyboard.
5. Enter the nickname of your buddy, then tap [9].

6. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

How to delete an entry from the buddies list

1. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Targets].
2. Tap [Buddies List (AIS & DSC)].
3. Tap the red "X" (to the right of the nickname) of the buddy to delete.

Tap to delete
buddy from list.
4. You are asked if you are sure to delete the buddy. Tap [OK].
5. Tap the close button on the title bar to finish.

14-8
 14. AIS, DSC MESSAGE

14.13 CPA Graphic Display

The CPA graphic display, which requires own position and heading data, draws a line
between own ship position and the selected AIS target to help you monitor an AIS tar-
get’s heading and speed changes. The display is useful as an anti-collision aid, espe-
cially in congested waters.

To activate or deactivate the CPA graphic display, open the [Targets] menu, then turn
on [CPA Graphic Display].

To find the CPA of an AIS target on the radar or chart plotter display, tap the AIS tar-
get. The CPA line connects with the position of your vessel and the CPA of the AIS
target, and its color is the same as the color of the AIS target’s symbol. The example
below shows the appearance of the graphic display on the chart plotter display.

If the CPA/TCPA alarm is generated while the CPA line is in use, the CPA line and the
selected target’s symbol turn red.

CPA line
Own ship

Class A
AIS target
FURUNO

The CPA graphic display is deactivated (erased) in the following conditions:

• The CPA line is turned off. The line can be turned off by tapping the CPA line (or
own ship icon* or target) to show the pop-up menu, then select [CPA].
* Chart plotter display only
• The TCPA is a minus (-) value.
• The AIS target is a lost target.
• The speed and heading data from the AIS target are lost.
• The CPA and TCPA of the AIS target cannot be calculated because speed and
heading data become lost.
• No own ship speed or heading.

14-9
14. AIS, DSC MESSAGE

14.14 AIS Transponder FA-30, FA-50

The FURUNO AIS Transponder FA-30 (or FA-50) installs in the NavNet TZtouch3 net-
work and can be controlled from a NavNet TZtouch3 display. To access the menu for
the transponder, do as shown below. See the respective operator’s manual for details.

1. Connect the FA-30 (or FA-50) to the NavNet TZtouch3 network.

2. Open the Home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Initial Setup]→[FA30 Browser] (or
[FA50 Browser]).

FAX30 Browser

FA30 Browser

FA50 Browser

Select an
“FA” browser

FA-30 Browser

OR

FA-50 Browser

3. See the Operator’s Manual for the FA-30 (FA-50) for operating procedures.

14-10
 14. AIS, DSC MESSAGE

14.15 DSC Message Information

The DSC (Digital Selective Calling) message information feature provides, on the
chart plotter and radar displays, the MMSI no. and position* of the ships that have
transmitted a DSC message to you. A hexagon-shaped marker marks the position of
the ship at the time the DSC was transmitted to you. The marker is color-coded ac-
cording to the type of DSC message sent, red for distress and green for non-distress.

* Position at the time of message transmission. Position information is not updated.

Red: DSC marker for Green: DSC marker for
a distress message a non-distress message

333336789 333335678
MMSI no.

This feature requires connection of a DSC capable radiotelephone that outputs the
DSC sentence in NMEA 2000 format.

14.15.1 DSC distress message

When a DSC distress message is received, the message "DSC Distress Call re-
ceived" appears flashing in the Status bar. To delete the distress message, tap the
Status bar.

14.15.2 How to set a DSC marker as destination

Tap the DSC marker, then tap [Go To] on the pop-up menu.

14.15.3 How to display DSC marker information

Tap a DSC marker to display the simple information (position, MMSI no. of the ship
that transmitted a DSC message, etc.). To get detailed information, tap a DSC marker,
then tap [Info] on the pop-up menu.

FURUNO

Simple information Detailed information

14-11
14. AIS, DSC MESSAGE

14.15.4 The DSC list

When a DSC message is received, it is automatically saved to the [DSC] list. On the
screen, the MMSI number can be changed to a specified character string, such as the
name of the ship, in order to quickly identify which ship sent you a message.

How to display the DSC list

Open the Home screen, then tap [Lists]→[DSC]. The colored before each entry de-
notes DSC message type, red for distress, green for non-distress.

DSC

List sort buttons

Vertical bar

The title bar has buttons for sorting the list.

[Name]: DSC targets sorted in alphanumeric order.
[Range]: DSC targets sorted by range in ascending order.
[CPA]: DSC targets sorted by CPA in ascending order.

Note: To update the list, tape [Refresh].

How to show detailed information about a DSC marker

Tap the target on the [DSC] list to show its detailed information.

14-12
14. AIS, DSC MESSAGE

14-13
14. AIS, DSC MESSAGE

This page is intentionally left blank.

14-14
15. OTHER FUNCTIONS
Once you have become acquainted with your equipment, you can set it according to
your needs. You can change system configuration, change how the equipment oper-
ates and displays information, etc.

15.1 General Menu

This section describes menu items not described in other chapters. Open the home
screen, then tap [Settings]→[General] to display the [General] menu.

15-1
15. OTHER FUNCTIONS

Menu item Function Options

[Move Tool On Enable the "move" function with long-push of an [OFF], [ON]
Long Push] object. Applicable to;
• Points/event mark icons (excluding Sounder)
• Route waypoints
• Guard zone
• EBL/VRM
[Display Addi- In the [ON] setting, the TD information is added to [OFF], [ON]
tional TD in Nav- the own ship’s position in the data area.
Data]
TD (time difference)
information

[Edge Swipe When you switch the display screen, or close the [OFF], [ON]
Guide] menu or list and return to the display screen in the
[ON] setting, the indication shown below appears
for about 15 seconds at the top, bottom, left and
right of the screen. When swiping the indication,
the functions appear (see section 1.8). The indica-
tion disappears when you operate the screen.

[User Interface Select the timeout for the following menus and the [0’03s], [0’05s], [0’10s],
Auto-Hide] home icon on the camera/instrument screen (full [0’15s]
screen).
• Layers menu
• Slide-out menu
• Pop-up menu
• Quick page
Note: The home icon always appears on the split
screen camera/instrument display and other dis-
plays.
[Auto Scroll] In the [ON] setting, the chart is appropriately and [OFF], [ON]
automatically scrolled when the cursor goes out of
the display area.
[Cross Cursor Adjust the cross cursor speed. -7 to +7
Speed]
[Allow Remote Set the permission level for NavNet Remote. [Off], [View Only], [Full Con-
Control] [Off]: Connection with NavNet Remote not al- trol]
lowed.
[View Only]: Can view the screen remotely, but
cannot operate and functions.
[Full Control]: Can operate the entire system by
remote.
[Local Time Off- Select the time difference between local time and UTC -12:00 to UTC +13:00
set] UTC time. (at 15 minute intervals)
[Time Format] Select how to display time, in 12 or 24 hour format. [Auto], [24 Hours], [12
[Auto] automatically inserts AM, PM indication in Hours]
24 hour clock, when the language is English.
[Demo File] Select the demo file (internal or external) to use in
the demo mode. For external data, set the appli-
cable media in the SD Card Unit or the USB port.
[Stop Demo] Stop the demo mode selected at [Demo File]. -

15-2
 15. OTHER FUNCTIONS

Menu item Function Options

[Manual Demo]* [OFF]: Use the data file selected at [Demo File]. [OFF], [ON]
Your vessel moves according the data in the data
file.
[ON]: Your vessel moves at the speed set at [De-
mo Speed] below.
[Show Wel- Show the welcome screen. -
come Screen]
[Show Wel- In the [ON] setting, the welcome screen appears [OFF], [ON]
come Screen at at startup.
startup]
[Demo Slide No use. [OFF], [ON]
Show]
[Demo Speed] Set the ship’s speed to use in the demo mode, 0 to 50 kn
when [Manual Demo] is [ON].
[Check for Soft- Checks if your software is up-to-date. See -
ware Update] section 15.5.
[Reset Default Restore default settings for the items of the [Gen- -
Settings] eral] menu.

* In the demo mode, plotter display, you can relocate the boat icon to the location
tapped. Tap the screen where you want to relocate the boat icon, then tap [Move Boat]
on the pop-up menu.

15.2 Units Menu

The [Units] menu sets the unit of measurement for speed, distance, depth, etc. Open
the home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Units] to display the [Units] menu.

15-3
15. OTHER FUNCTIONS

Menu item Options

[Bearing Display] The mode (magnetic or true) of all heading and bearing data.
[Magnetic], [True]
[True Wind Calculation Select wind value to display from speed over ground or speed through
Reference] water (surface).
[Ground], [Surface]
[Position Format] Select position format.
[DDD°[Link]’], [DDD°[Link]’], [DDD°[Link]’],
[DDD°MM’[Link]’’], [[Link]°], [Loran-C], [MGRS].
[Loran C Station &GRI] Enter Loran C Station and GRI. Available when [Position Format] is se-
lected to [Loran-C].
[Short/Long Change Over] Set the distance at which to switch between short and long range (set-
ting range: 0.0 to 2.0 NM). If the setting is 0.5, for example, short range
is automatically selected when the long range unit is 0.4 or less. The
setting "0.0" fixes the unit to long range.
[Range (Long)] Select the unit for the long range.
[Nautical Mile], [Kilometer], [Mile]
[Range (Short)] Select the unit for the short range.
[Foot], [Meter], [Yard]
[Depth] Select the unit for the depth.
[Foot], [Meter], [Fathom], [Passi Braza]
[Height/Length] Select the unit for the height and length.
[Foot], [Meter]
[Fish Size] Select the unit for the fish size.
[Inch], [Centimeter]
[Fish Weight] Select the unit for the fish weight.
[Pound], [Kilogram]
[Temperature] Select the unit for the temperature.
[Fahrenheit Degree], [Celsius Degree]
[Boat Speed] Select the unit for the boat speed.
[Knot], [Kilometer per Hour], [Mile per Hour], [Meter per Second]
[Wind Speed] Select the unit for the wind speed.
[Knot], [Kilometer per Hour], [Mile per Hour], [Meter per Second]
[Atmospheric Pressure] Select the unit for the atmospheric pressure.
[HectoPascal], [Millibar], [Millimeter of Mercury], [Inch of Mercury]
[Oil Pressure] Select the unit for the oil pressure.
[KiloPascal], [Bar], [Pound per Square Inch]
[Volume] Select the unit for the volume.
[Gallon] (Gallon & Gallon/Hour), [Litre] (Litre & Litre/Hour)
[Reset Default Settings] Restore default settings for the [Units] menu.

15-4
 15. OTHER FUNCTIONS

15.3 Initial Setup Menu

The [Initial Setup] menu, which is mainly for use by the installer of the equipment, sets
up the system according to the sensors connected. These adjustments require some
knowledge of marine electronics equipment. If you are unsure of your abilities, have a
qualified marine electronics technician make the adjustments. Inadequate adjustment
can affect performance.

Open the home screen, then tap [Settings]→[Initial Setup] to display the [Initial Setup]
menu. For the [FUSION] section, see section 11.3.

[GPS POSITION] section

Menu item Description Options (setting range)

[Longitudinal (from Enter the GPS antenna 0 to 3,275 ft
bow)] positioning bow-stern
[Lateral (-Port)] (Longitudinal) and port- Origin -320 to 320 ft
starboard (Lateral) posi-
tion from the origin.

[BOAT INFORMATION] section

Menu item Description Options (setting range)

[Boat Length] Set the length of your boat. 0 to 3,278 ft
[Size of Own Ship Icon] Set the size of own ship icon. 50 to 150
[Depth Display] Select the start point for depth measure- [Under Keel],
ment. [Under Sea Level]
[External Transducer Set the draft external transducers other 0.0 to 99.9 ft
Draft] than internal fish finder, networked or
multi-beam sonar.
For internal/network transducers, set
the draft from the home screen→[Set-
tings]→[Fish Finder]→[Transducer
Draft].
For multi-beam sonars, set the draft
from the home screen→[Settings]→
[Multi Beam Sonar]→[Initial Setup]→
[Transducer Draft].
[Keel Draft] Set the keel draft. 0.0 to 99.9 ft

15-5
15. OTHER FUNCTIONS

[INSTRUMENTS SETUP] section

Menu item Description

[Engine & The system will automatically detect engines and tanks connected to the
Tank same network.
Automatic
Setup]
[Engine & If the system does not automatically detect engines and tanks, set the en-
Tank gines and tanks manually. See "Engine & Tank Manual Setup" below.
Manual
Setup]
[Graphic Instruments • See "Graphic Instruments Setup" below.
Setup] • [Reset Instrument Pages]: Restore all instrument pages.
• [Reset Default Settings]: Restore default settings for the [Graphic Instru-
ments Setup] menu.

[Engine & Tank Manual Setup]:

Menu Item Description Options (setting range)

[Nickname] Change the nickname for the engine or tank.
[Used For Propulsion] Select which engine/tank is used to calcu- [OFF], [ON]
late the distance which may be traveled us-
ing the remaining fuel. [ON] uses the
engine/tank for calculations, [OFF] ignores
the engine/tank.
[Reset] Resets the engine/tank details to default.

[Graphic Instruments Setup]:

[Graphic Instruments Setup] - [Maximum Boat Speed], [Maximum Wind Speed]

Menu Item Description Options (setting range)
[Maximum Boat Speed] Set the transducer’s maximum detectable 1 to 99 kn
speed.
[Maximum Wind Speed] Set the transducer’s maximum detectable 1 to 99 kn
speed.

[Graphic Instruments Setup] - [DEPTH]

Menu Item Description Options (setting range)
[Minimum Depth] Set the transducer’s minimum detectable 0 to 6,558 ft
depth.
[Maximum Depth] Set the transducer’s maximum detectable 4 to 6,560 ft
depth.

[Graphic Instruments Setup] - [SEA SURFACE TEMPERATURE]

Menu Item Description Options (setting range)
[Minimum Sea Surface Set the transducer’s minimum detectable 32.00 to 89.97°F
Temperature] temperature.
[Maximum Sea Surface Set the transducer’s maximum detectable 33.01 to 210.00°F
Temperature] temperature.

15-6
 15. OTHER FUNCTIONS

[Graphic Instruments Setup] - [PROPULSION ENGINE]/[OTHER ENGINE]

Menu Item Description Options (setting range)
[Max. RPM] Set the maximum rpm of your engine to 1 to 20,000 rpm
show on the RPM display.
[Red Zone Oil Pressure] Set the starting value for the red zone area 0 to 998 kPa
of the oil pressure meter.
[Max. Oil Pressure] Set the maximum oil pressure of your 1 to 999 kPa
engine.
[Min. Temperature] Set the minimum temperature for your 32.0 to 210.0°F
engine.
[Red Zone Temperature] Set the starting value for the red zone area 32.0 to 999.9°F
of the engine temperature indicator.

[Graphic Instruments Setup] - [CZONE SETUP]

Menu item Description
[Add Default CZone Create, edit C-Zone pages.
Pages]
[CZone DIP Switch Set this unit’s DIP switches. For the serviceman. Do not change the set-
Settings] tings.

Menu item Description

[Reset Instrument Pages] Restore all instrument pages.
[Reset Default Settings] Restore default settings for the [Graphic Instruments Setup] menu.

[HOME PAGE] section

Menu item Description

[Factory Reset] Restore the home page.

[MANUAL FUEL MANAGEMENT] section

Menu item Description Options (setting range)

[Total Fuel Capacity] Enter the total fuel capacity of your 0 to 9,999 L
tank(s).
[Manual Fuel Manage- Set to [ON] for manual fuel manage- [OFF], [ON].
ment] ment.

[IF-NMEAFI SETUP] section

Menu item Description Options (setting range)

[Select IF] Select [IF-NMEAFI] to set the analog data that is input from the IF-NMEAFI.
These settings are reflected after restarting the IF-NMEAFI.
[Category] Select the category for the analog sensor to set. [Wind], [ST800_850],
[Fuel], [Fresh Water],
[Waste Water], [Live
Well], [Oil], [Black Water]
[Resistance Full] The resistance, in Ohms, when the tank is full. 0 to 300 Ohm
[Resistance Mid] The resistance, in Ohms, when the tank is half full. 0 to 300 Ohm
[Resistance Empty] The resistance, in Ohms, when the tank is empty. 0 to 300 Ohm
[Capacity] The capacity of the tank. 0 to 2650 G

15-7
15. OTHER FUNCTIONS

Menu item Description Options (setting range)

[Self test] Test results are displayed.
[Set Hardware To Resets the converter selected at [Select IF] to fac-
Factory Default] tory default.

[DATA ACQUISITION] section

Menu Item Description Options (setting range)

[GP330B WAAS Mode] Select [ON] to use the WAAS mode for [OFF], [ON]
[WS200 WAAS Mode] the corresponding GPS antenna.
[Data Source] Select the source for each data to input to the system. If two or more
sources are connected for a data, select one using the pull-down dialog
box. (FURUNO sensors are shown at the upper part of the list.)
[Sensor List] Show the information for sensors connected to your equipment.
Tap the sensor to show the detailed information. You can edit the items
with icons on the right side of the screen.
Note: If you change each instance value, you need to restart its sensor.
[NMEA0183 Output] [PORT CONFIGURATION] section:
• [Baudrate]: Select the baudrate. • [4,800], [9,600], [38,400]
• [NMEA-0183 Version]: Select the ver- • [1.5], [2.0], [3.0]
sion for NMEA0183.
[SENTENCES] section:
Select [ON] for the NMEA sentences to [OFF], [ON]
output.
Note: When outputting the TTM sen-
tence and another sentence at the same
time, the number of TTM targets output
may be reduced due to the communica-
tion bandwidth restrictions.
[NMEA 2000 PGN Output] Select [ON] for the PGNs (Parameter [OFF], [ON]
Group Number, CAN bus (NMEA2000)
message) to output from the CAN bus
port.
[Sky View…] Show the condition of GPS and GEO (WAAS) satellites on the [GPS
SkyView] display. The bearing and elevation angle of all GPS and GEO
satellites (if applicable) in view of your receiver appear. For the service-
man.
Note: The [GPS SkyView] display can also be shown by tap-
ping the GPS icon (shown right) on the home screen.

[INTERNAL GPS SETUP] section (TZT12F/16F only)

Menu Item Description Options (setting range)

[WAAS Mode] Select [ON] to use the WAAS mode. [OFF], [ON]

[NMEA2000 LOG] section

Menu Item Description Options (setting range)

[Enable NMEA2000 Log] Select [ON] to storage the NMEA2000 data. [OFF], [ON]
[NMEA2000 Log Storage Select where to storage the data.
Location]

15-8
 15. OTHER FUNCTIONS

[SC-30 SETUP] section (only when the SC-30 is connected)

Menu item Description Options (setting range)

[WAAS Mode] Select [ON] to use the WAAS mode. [OFF], [ON]
[Heading Offset] Enter the offset value for heading. -180 to +180°
[Pitch Offset] Enter the offset value for pitching. -90 to +90°
[Roll Offset] Enter the offset value for rolling. -90 to +90°

15-9
15. OTHER FUNCTIONS

[NETWORK SENSOR SETUP] section

The [NETWORK SENSOR SETUP] section allows you to set up compatible FURUNO
NMEA2000 sensors. Calibrations and offsets applied in this menu are also applied to
the sensor itself.

[CALIBRATION] section

Menu item Description Options (setting range)

[Heading] Offset heading data. -180.0 to +180.0°
[Speed Through Calibrate speed data. Enter amount in percentage. -50 to +50%
Water]
[Wind Speed] Offset wind speed data. Enter amount in percentage. -50 to +50%
[Wind Angle] Offset wind angle data. -180.0 to +180.0°
[Sea Surface Offset sea surface temperature data. -50 to +50°F
Temperature]

[DATA DAMPING] section

Menu item Description Options (setting range)

[COG & SOG] Set data damping time. The lower the set- 0 to 59 seconds
[Heading] ting the faster the response to change.
[Speed Through Water]
[Wind Speed&Angle]
[Rate of Turn]

[FUSION] section

Menu item Description Options (setting range)

[Connect to Fu- Connect to your Fusion equipment.
sion]
[Fusion Auto Set to [ON] to allow this unit to control the Fusion vol- [OFF], [ON]
Volume] ume automatically.
[Minimum Set the minimum speed threshold. Exceeding this 0 to 99 kn
Speed] speed activates volume auto control.
[Maximum Set the maximum speed threshold. 0 to 99 kn
Speed]
[Volume In- Set the amount of extra volume to output. 10 to 50%
crease]

[BROWSER INSTALLATION] section

Menu item Description

[FAX-30 Browser] Show the Facsimile Receiver FAX-30 display.
[FA-30 Browser] Show the AIS Receiver FA-30 display.
[FA-50 Browser] Show the AIS Receiver FA-50 display.

Others menu items

Menu item Description Option (setting range)

[Chart Master Device] Set to [ON] to set this equipment as the chart [OFF], [ON]
master ([OFF]: sub).
[System ID] The system ID for this device within the network.
[IP Address] IP address for this unit within the network.
[Synchronization Log] Synchronization log for this unit within the network.

15-10
 15. OTHER FUNCTIONS

Menu item Description Option (setting range)

[Quick Self Test] Information for this equipment and connected sensors.
[Certification Mark] Show the certification marks this equipment has received.
[Service] Requires login password. For the service technician only.
[Event Input Select the data to be entered as an event. [Off], [Event Mark],
Configuration] [MOB], [Ferry]
[Update Network Updates all NavNet equipment in the network. For the service technician.
Equipments]
[Sirius Radio Check the satellite radio of the FURUNO BBWX weather receiver for proper
Diagnostic] operation. See section 13.7.3.
[Sirius Weather Check the weather section of the FURUNO BBWX weather receiver for
Diagnostic] proper operation. See section 13.6.
[Reset Default Restore default settings for the [Initial Setup] menu.
Settings]

15.4 Facsimile Receiver FAX-30

The FURUNO Facsimile Receiver FAX-30 installs in the NavNet TZtouch3 network
and can be controlled from a NavNet TZtouch3 display. Below are the steps to start
fax operation.

1. Connect the FAX-30 to the NavNet TZtouch3 network.

2. Open the home screen, then tap [FAX-30] (left side of screen).
FAX-30 Browser

3. Tap [WX FAX] or [NAVTEX].

FAX-30 Browser

4. Refer to the Operator’s Manual of the FAX-30 for operation information.

15-11
15. OTHER FUNCTIONS

The FAX-30 display can only be accessed by one NavNet TZtouch3 unit at a time.
When another NavNet TZtouch3 display accesses the FAX-30, control of the FAX-30
is given to that display after the picture has stopped completely. This sequence takes
approximately one minute.

15.5 How to Check for Software Updates

You can check for software updates via the internet.

1. Referring to section 1.19, connect to the internet.

2. Open the home screen, then tap [Settings]→[General]→[Check for Software Up-
date]. The following window appears.

i Software Update

Checking new version availability...

After the checking is completed, one of the following messages appears:

• When your unit has the latest software: "THE LATEST SOFTWARE IS IN-
STALLED ON THIS DEVICE."
• When newer software is available: "A SOFTWARE UPDATE IS AVAILABLE.
PLEASE VISIT [Link] TO DOWNLOAD IT."
3. Tap the [OK] button.
4. Tap the close button to finish.

15-12
 15. OTHER FUNCTIONS

15.6 How to Manage Your Charts

The NavNet TZtouch3 uses the Mapmedia charts. There are two types of charts: free
and paid. When using paid charts, an unlock code is required. To share the system ID
and unlock code in the NavNet TZtouch3 network, open the home screen, then tap
[Settings]→[Initial Setup]→[ON] for [Chart Master Device] of one NavNet TZtouch3.
The NavNet TZtouch3 uses the same Mapmedia charts as NavNet 3D. Even though
NavNet TZtouch3 is a master-less system in networking, for charts one NavNet
TZtouch3 unit should be set as Chart Master to share the System ID, which will be
necessary to obtain a chart unlock code from Mapmedia. Chart Master Device

Note: When two or more NavNet TZtouch3s share an unlock code, you need to get
an unlock code again if changing the setting of [Chart Master Device]. For example, if
the NavNet TZtouch3 that was used as the “primary” ([Chart Master Device] setting:
[ON]) is used as the “secondary” ([Chart Master Device] setting: [OFF]) (and vice ver-
sa), the unlock code must be reacquired. Is required. For details, see “Chart is not dis-
played after changing chart master settings.” on page 16-4.

15.6.1 How to view your charts

Tap the Home icon to show the home screen, then tap [Charts] to display your charts
catalog.

Tap to show [FIlter

Tap to dowload chart charts] pop-up menu.
unlock codes.
See table Tap to enter System ID
Chart file name Chart file type below. unlock code display

Chart version no. Chart manufacturer Trash icon

15-13
15. OTHER FUNCTIONS

Chart status Chart status

Meaning Meaning
icon icon
Free chart. An unlock code is not neces- Paid chart. Unlock code
sary. entered.

Paid chart. Unlock code is necessary to Chart cannot be used

use the chart. Tap [Insert Code] at the because it is corrupted.
top of the [Charts Catalog] screen. Enter
the unlock code then tap [9] to finish.

How to hide unnecessary charts on the chart catalog list

1. Tap [Filter] on the chart catalog
list title bar to show the [Filter
charts] window.
2. Select [OFF] for the items that
you want to hide. The factory set-
ting shows all charts. To restore
all charts, tap [Reset Filters].
3. Tap < on the title bar to return to
the chart catalog list. [Filter] on
the title bar changes to [Change
Filter].
4. Tap the close button to close the
chart catalog list.

15.6.2 How to update or add charts

Free (USA and NOAA) and for-fee NavNet TZtouch3 compatible charts are provided
by FURUNO and Mapmedia. Go to the URLs shown below to download chart data.

Download the chart file to your desktop. Unzip the file, then copy it to the root of a mi-
croSD card. Insert the card into the SD card slot on the display unit, or a slot in the SD
Card Unit (SDU-001). For the detailed procedure, refer to the instructions on the FU-
RUNO website.

A for-fee chart requires that you enter its chart unlock code. Go to the Home screen
and tap [Charts] to show the [Charts Catalog] display. Tap [Insert Code] then enter the
chart unlock code from the software keyboard.

Where to obtain chart data:

Mapmedia
[Link]

15-14
 15. OTHER FUNCTIONS

15.6.3 How to delete charts

Before replacing a chart, you should delete the old chart data on every NavNet
TZtouch3 unit. Only delete the chart data that you intend to replace or no longer re-
quire.

Open the charts catalog. Tap the trashcan icon of the chart to delete. You are asked
"ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO DELETE THIS FILE?" Tap [OK] to delete the file.

15-15
15. OTHER FUNCTIONS

This page is intentionally left blank.

15-16
16. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLE-
SHOOTING
This chapter has information about maintenance and troubleshooting that the user
can follow to care for the equipment.

WARNING NOTICE
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive
Do not open the equipment. sealant or contact spray to plastic
parts or equipment coating.
Only qualified persons can
work inside the equipment. Those items contain products that can
damage plastic parts and equipment
coating.

16.1 Maintenance
Routine maintenance helps keep your equipment in good condition and prevents fu-
ture problems. Check the items shown in the table below on a regular basis to help
keep your equipment in good condition for years to come.

Check item Check point Remedy

Cables Cable connection, corrosion Connect loosened cables. Replace any damaged
cables.
Cabinet Dust on the cabinet Remove dust with a dry, clean cloth. Do not use
commercial cleaners to clean the equipment - they
can remove paint and markings.
LCD Dust on the LCD Wipe the LCD carefully to prevent scratching, us-
ing tissue paper and an LCD cleaner. To remove
dirt or salt deposits, use an LCD cleaner, wiping
slowly with tissue paper so as to dissolve the dirt or
salt. Change paper frequently so the salt or dirt will
not scratch the LCD. Do not use solvents such as
thinner, acetone or benzene for cleaning. Also, do
not use degreaser or anti-fog solution, as they can
strip the coating from the LCD.
Waterdrops on the LCD Waterdrops on the LCD can slow touch response.
Wipe the LCD with a dry, soft cloth to remove the
water.
Radar Foreign material on the radar Foreign material can reduce sensitivity. Clean the
antenna antenna antenna with a cloth wetted with freshwater. Do not
use commercial cleaners to clean the radiator -
they can remove paint and markings.
Transducer Transducer face Marine growth on the transducer face can reduce
sensitivity. Remove any growth with a wooden
stick or fine grade sandpaper.

16-1
16. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

16.2 Fuse Replacement

The fuse in the fuse holder in the power cable protects the equipment from high elec-
tric current and equipment fault. If you cannot turn on the power, check the fuse to see
if it has blown. Find the reason for the blown fuse before you replace the fuse. If the
fuse blows again after the replacement, contact your dealer for advice.

WARNING
WARNIN
Use the proper fuse.
Use of the wrong fuse can cause fire or
electrical shock.

Name Type Code No. Remarks

FRU-60V-FU-4A 000-197-093-10 For TZT12F
Fuse
FRU-60V-FU-7.5A 000-197-094-10 For TZT16F/TZT19F

16.3 Life of Parts

Magnetron
When a magnetron reaches the end of its life, targets do not appear on the radar dis-
play. If long-range performance appears to have declined, contact your dealer about
replacement of the magnetron.

Radar Sensor Magnetron Code No. Approx. Life

DRS2D E3590 000-164-574-11 5,000 hours
DRS4D E3571 000-146-867-11 5,000 hours
DRS4DL 80-0691 001-266-460 5,000 hours
DRS4DL+ 80-0691 001-266-460 5,000 hours
DRS4A MAF1421B 000-158-786-11 5,000 hours
DRS6A MAF1422B 000-158-788-12 5,000 hours
DRS6A X-Class MAF1422B 000-158-788-12 5,000 hours
DRS12A MAF1565N 000-174-559-10 5,000 hours
DRS12A X-Class FNE1201 001-245-890 5.000 hours
DRS25A MG5436(E2V) 000-140-762-10 5,000 hours
DRS25A X-Class MG5436 001-205-570 5,000 hours

The total time of power-on ("ON TIME") and transmission ("TX TIME") are displayed
on the radar screen during the stand-by mode.

LCD
The life of the LCD is approximately 50,000 hours. The actual life of the LCD is affect-
ed by the operating environment (temperature, humidity, etc.). When nearing the end
of its life-span, the LCD brilliance does not adjust correctly. When this occurs, contact
your local dealer for advice.

16-2
 16. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

Fan
The approximate life of the fan is as shown in the table below, and the actual life de-
pends on ambient temperature. When the fan does not rotate sufficiently, an applica-
ble message appears in the status bar. Turn off the power and contact your dealer
about replacement of the fan.

Item Type Code No. Estimated Life Remarks

FAN MOTOR MFB52A-12HA-002 000-175-998-10 Approx. 21,000 hours For TZT12F,
TZT16F,
TZT19F
(Internal fan)
9WP0412H6004 000-197-035-10 Approx. 40,000 hours For TZT19F
(External fan)

16.4 Troubleshooting
This section provides simple troubleshooting procedures that the user can follow to re-
store normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation, do not check inside the
unit. Have a qualified technician check the equipment.

16.4.1 General troubleshooting

Problem Remedy
You can not turn on the power. • Check for blown fuse.
• Check that the power connector is tightly fastened.
• Check for corrosion on the power cable connector.
• Check for the power cable for damage.
• Check battery for correct voltage output.
• For the TZT16F/TZT19F, use a bare finger to turn on the pow-
er. (The power cannot be turned with gloved hands.)
Picture is not displayed properly. Turn the power off, then on again. If the picture is still improper,
contact your local dealer for instructions.
The display has frozen. Push the power switch until the power goes off. (For the
TZT12F, hold and press the power switch.)
No response after display is • Check if [Touch Screen] on the [Quick Access] window is
touched. locked.
• Reset the power. If there is still no response, contact a FURU-
NO dealer for advice.

16-3
16. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

16.4.2 Plotter troubleshooting

Problem Remedy
Position is not fixed. • Check for interfering objects near the display unit that might be
blocking reception.
• Possible trouble with internal GPS antenna or GPS receiver.
Contact a FURUNO dealer for advice.
• Check if the connector at the back of the GPS receiver has
loosened. Connect if loosened.
The track of your ship is not Check if [Tracks] is turned on in the [Layers] menu.
plotted.
Chart is not displayed after Connect to the internet to get the chart unlock code, as follows.
changing chart master settings. then tap [Home]→[Catalog]→[Download codes]. The codes are
automatically applied.
1) If you are currently connected to the internet, disconnect from
the internet.
2) Use the wireless LAN to connect to the internet (see
section 1.19).
After connecting to the internet, approx. one minute later you
can obtain the unlock code.
3) If you cannot obtain the unlock code, contact a FURUNO deal-
er for advice.
Unlock code cannot be found. Get the unlock code for the chart and cancel the unlock state (with
the unit connected to the internet, [Home]→[Charts]→[Download
Codes]). There is no need to enter the chart unlock code manual-
ly.

16.4.3 Radar troubleshooting

Problem Remedy
The radar does not transmit • Tap the [TX] icon again.
when the [TX] icon is operated. • Check if the power cable, LAN cable are tightly fastened.
• Check if the radar source is correctly set and connected.
Marks and characters appear, Check if the power cable, LAN cable are tightly fastened.
but echoes do not appear.
Picture is not updated or the • Check if the power cable, LAN cable are tightly fastened.
picture freezes. • Check if this unit is powered.
You adjusted the receiver gain, The life-span of the magnetron in the radar sensor is over. Have
but radar echoes are too weak. a technician check the magnetron.
You changed the range, but the • Try to change the range again.
radar picture does not change. • Reset the power.
Poor discrimination in range. Adjust the sea control.
Range rings are not displayed. Check if [Range Rings] is turned on in the [Layers] menu.
You tapped the [TX] icon to The overload protection has activated. To restore normal opera-
transmit. The "TX screen" ap- tion, turn off all equipment in the network. Wait a few seconds then
pears momentarily, but the ra- turn on all the equipment.
dar soon goes into stand-by.

16-4
 16. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

16.4.4 Fish finder troubleshooting

Problem Remedy
You selected a fish finder dis- • Check that the transducer cable is tightly fastened.
play from the Home screen, but • Check that the fish finder source is correctly selected.
no picture appears. • Check if the fish finder is correctly connected.
• Check if [Picture Advance] in the [Fish Finder] menu is set to
[Stop].
Marks and characters appear, • Check that the transducer cable is tightly fastened.
but no picture appears. • Check if [Picture Advance] in the [Fish Finder] menu is set to
[Stop].
Picture appears but zero line • The picture is shifted. Drag the picture up or down to show the
does not appear. zero line.
• Check if the draft setting ([Settings]→[Fish Finder]→[Transduc-
er Draft]) is zero (0) or higher.
The picture sensitivity is too • If you are in the manual mode, check the gain setting.
low. • Check the transducer face for marine life and air bubbles.
• Bottom is too soft to return an acceptable echo.
The depth indication does not Adjust the bottom level.
appear.
Noise or interference shows on • Make sure the transducer cable is not near the engine.
the display. • Check the ground for tight connection, corrosion.
• Check if another fish finder near your boat has the same fre-
quency as your fish finder.
• Try to reject the interference with [Interference Rejection] in the
[Fish Finder] menu.

16-5
16. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING

This page is intentionally left blank.

16-6
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

Settings menu Default settings indicated in bold italic.

General Two Finger None, Full Screen, Screen Capture,

Tap Function Event Mark, Home, Settings, Lists, Tide
Two Finger Long None, Full Screen, Screen Capture,
Tap Function Event Mark, Home, Settings, Lists, Tide
Move Tool On Long Push (OFF, ON)
Password Lock (OFF, ON)
Connect to Never, At Startup, When Necessary
the Internet
Wireless Wireless Wireless Mode (Connect to existing LAN,
LAN Settings Mode Create Local Network)
Enable Wireless (OFF, ON)
Wireless
Scan*1
Currently Connected Network*1 *1: Shown only when
1
Available WLAN Networks* [Enable Wireless] is
Display Additional TD in NavData (OFF, ON) set to [ON].
Edge Swipe Guide (OFF, ON)
User Interface 0’03s, 0’05s, 0’10s, 0’15s
Auto-Hide
Scale & Layout Smallest, Small, Normal, Large
Instrument Theme White, Black
Brilliance Synchronization (OFF, ON)
Auto Scroll (OFF, ON)
Cross Cursor Speed (-7 to 7; 0)
Allow Remote Off, View Only, Full Control
Control
Local Time Offset (-12:00 to +13:00; +00:00)
Time Format Auto, 24 Hours, 12 Hours
Demo File (Select the file to use for demo mode)
Stop Demo
Manual Demo (OFF, ON)
Show Welcome Screen
Show Welcome Screen at startup (OFF, ON)
Demo Slide Show (OFF, ON) *2: Requires internet connection.
Demo Speed (0.0 kn to 50.0 kn; 6.0 kn)
Language (English (United States), English (United Kingdom), Others)
Check for Software Update*2
MY TIMEZERO (Logged As, Login, Logout, Enable Cloud Synchronization)
MY FRIENDS (Nickname, Manage My Friends)
DATA USAGE (Shows number of Points, Routes, Area & Lines, Circles, Photos,
Catches and Track Points used with total available.)
Reset Default Settings
1

AP-1
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

Ship & COG Vector (Time, Distance)

Track COG Vector Length (0.000 to 999.000 NM, 1.000NM)
COG Vector Time (0’10s, 0’30s, 1’00s, 2’00s, 5’00s, 10’00s, 15’00s, 30’00s,
1h00’, 2h00’, 3h00’, 6h00’, 12h00’, 1d00h)
COG Vector Color (Red, Blue, Green, Yellow, Magenta, Orange, Cyan, Black)
Heading Line Thickness (1 to 5, 2)
Vessel Icon Orientation (Heading, COG)
Fuel Range Ring (OFF, ON)
Track Interval (Time, Distance)
Distance Interval (00.01 NM to 20.00 NM; 00.02 NM)*1
Time Interval (0’05s, 0’10s, 0’30s, 1’00s, 5’00s, 10’00s)*2
Track Color (Fixed, Variable)
Fixed Color Setup (Red, Blue, Green, Yellow, Magenta, Orange, Cyan, Black)
Variable Color (Depth, SST Range, SST Variation, Speed,
Bottom Discrimination, Depth Variation)
Variable Color Setup (Open the dialog box for variable color setting.)
Track Thickness (1 to 4, 2) *1: Not available when [Track Interval] is set
Automatic Track Deleting (ON, OFF) to [Time]. On-screen display is formatted
Delete All Tracks according to setting selected at [Units]
Reset Default Settings → [Range (Short)].
*2: Not available when [Track Interval] is set
to [Distance].
Routes Default Route Color (Red, Blue, Green, Yellow, Magenta, Orange, Cyan, Black)
Route Thickness (1 to 4, 2)
Route Density (Low, Medium, Full)
Navigate with NAVPilot (OFF, ON)
NAVPilot Steering Step (2 to 30, 10)
Ask to Enter Route Name (OFF, ON)
Fuel Max Range (OFF, ON)
Laylines (OFF, ON)
Tidal Offset for Laylines (OFF, ON)
Route Auto Zoom (OFF, ON)
WPT Switch Mode (Circle and Cross Line, Circle, Cross Line)
Switching Circle Radius (0 m to 999 m; 61 m)
Waypoint Crossing Notification (OFF, ON)
End of Route Notification (OFF, ON)
End of Route Operation (Stop Navigation, Continue Navigation)
Intelligent Route Waypoint Centering (OFF, ON)
Cross Track Error Lines (OFF, ON)
Cross Track Error Value (0 m to 999 m; 61 m)
Cruising Speed for Planning (00 kn to 99 kn; 10 kn)
Delete All User Objects
1 Reset Default Settings

AP-2
 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

1
Points & Default Point Symbol (see figure below)
Boundaries Default Point Color (Red, Blue, Green, Yellow, Magenta, Orange, Cyan, Black)
Point Size (50 to 200; 100)
Icons Set (Modern, Classic)
Point Density (Low, Medium, Full)
Display Point Names (OFF, ON)
Automatic Naming (OFF, ON)
Automatic Naming Prefix (Input from software keyboard; default: WP)
Data to Be Recorded in Event Comment (None, Date, SST, Date and SST)
Record Event Mark 1 Automatically (OFF, ON)
Default Event Mark x Symbol (see figure below)
Default Event Mark x Color (Red, Blue, Green, Yellow, Magenta, Orange, Cyan,
Black; see figure below for defaults)
Event Mark 2, Blue
Default Point
Symbol

Event Mark 3, Event Mark 4,

Green Yellow
Event Mark 5,
Pink

Event Mark 6,
Orange

Event Mark 1, Red

Default Boundary Color (Red, Blue, Green, Yellow, Magenta, Orange, Cyan, Black)
Default Boundary Transparency (0 to 100; 40)
Default Boundary Contour ( , , , ; default: )
Delete All User Objects
Restore Default Settings

Chart Grid Interval (Off, Very Small, Small, Medium, Large, Very Large)
Plotter Show Scale Slider (OFF, ON)
Tide/Current Icons Size (50 to 150; 100)
NavData Transparency (0 to 80; 10)
PhotoFusion Transparency (0 to 80; 15)
Tide Range for PhotoFusion (0 m to 20 m)
Tidal Currents Transparency (0 to 80; 25)
Radar Transparency (0 to 80; 20)
Range Link (OFF, ON)
Echo Color (Multicolor, Green, Yellow)

1 2 Continued on following page

AP-3
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

1 2 Continued from previous page

Depth ShadingTransparency (0 to 80; 50)
Auto Depth Shading Color Scale (OFF, ON)
Minimum Value (00,000 m to 00,049 m; 0.0 m)*1
Maximum Value (00,001 m to 10,000 m; 50.0 m)*1
Depth Color Shade (Classic Hue, Inverted Classic Hue, Red Hue,
Blue Hue, Green Hue, Yellow Hue)
Auto Alti 3D Exaggeration (OFF, ON) *1: Available only when [Auto Depth
3D Alti Exaggeration (1 to 20; 3)* 2 Shading Color Scale] is set to [OFF].
Reset Default Settings *2: Available only when [Auto Alti 3D
Exaggeration] is set to [OFF].
Vector Chart Object Size (50 to 200; 100)
Chart Chart Color Palette (S52, Standard, Sunlight)
Chart Symbols (S52, International)
Shallow Contour (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 m)
Safety Contour (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50 m)
Deep Contour (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 30, 50, 100, 200 m)
Text (Important) (OFF, ON)
Text (Other) (OFF, ON)
Display Buoy Names (OFF, ON)
Display Light Description (OFF, ON)
Display Light Sectors (OFF, ON)
Display Routes (OFF, ON)
Display Routes Bearings (OFF, ON)
Display Soundings (OFF, ON)
Display Soundings in Red (OFF, ON)
Up To
(0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 30 m)
Obs. Depth Below Safety (OFF, ON)
Display Seabed (OFF, ON)
Cautionary Areas (OFF, ON)
Reset Default Settings
S-52 S-52 Vector Chart Display Mode (Custom, Base, Standard, Other, Fishing)
Display Unknown Object (ON, OFF)
Chart Data Coverage (ON, OFF)
Water and Seabed Features (ON, OFF)
Traffic Routes (ON, OFF)
Information Areas (ON, OFF)
Buoys & Beacons (ON, OFF)
Lights (ON, OFF)
Fog Signals (ON, OFF)
Radar (ON, OFF)
Information About Chart Data (ON, OFF)
Obstructions (ON, OFF)
Depth Contours, Cur., etc (ON, OFF)
Fishing Facilities (ON, OFF)
Services (Pilot, Signal Stations) (ON, OFF)
Harbour Facilities (ON, OFF)
Services and Small Craft Facilities (ON, OFF)
Land Features (ON, OFF)
Reset Default Settings

AP-4
 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

Weather Load Weather File (Open the dialog box to select the weather file to load.)
Weather Data Server (NavCenter, Sirius*1)
Sirius Weather Radar (USNowRadar, CanadianRadar)*1
Zone Forecast *1 *1
: Requires FURUNO BBWX
Marine Warnings *1 series Marine Weather Receiver.
Tropical Infos *1 Not shown otherwise.
Sirius Diagnostic *1
Tidal Update Interval (5 mn, 10 mn, 15 mn, 20 mn, 30 mn, 1 h, 2 h, 3 h, 6 h, 12 h)
Duration of Animation (5 s, 10 s, 15 s, 20 s, 30 s, 45 s, 1 mn, 2 mn, 3 mn)
Model (USA, Worldwide)
Forecast Days (1 - 16; 4)
Wind (ON, OFF)
Waves (ON, OFF)
Cloud (ON, OFF)
Rain/Snow (ON, OFF)
Air Temperature (ON, OFF)
Pressure (ON, OFF)
500mb (ON, OFF)
Sea Surface Temperature (ON, OFF)
Oceanic Currents (ON, OFF)
Altimetry (ON, OFF)
Plankton (ON, OFF)
Weather Color Transparency (0 - 80; 40%)
AUTO SST Color Scale (ON, OFF)
Minimum Value (50qF)
Maximum Value (90qF)
Reset Default Settings
1

AP-5
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

1
Radar Radar Source (Select the antenna host name.)
Day Background Color (Black, Dark Blue, White)
Night Background Color (Black, Dark Blue)
Echo Color (Multicolor, Green, Yellow)
Rings Interval (Automatic, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)
Show Range Slider (ON, OFF)
Own Ship Icon (ON, OFF)
Bearing Scale Mode (Relative, True)
EBL Reference (True, Relative)
Watchman (5 minutes, 10 minutes, 20 minutes)
Trail Color (Blue, Yellow, Green)
Trail Length (15 s, 30 s, 1 mn, 3 mn, 6 mn, 15 mn, 30 mn, Continuous)
Trail Shade (Single, Multi)
Trail Mode (Relative, True)
Antenna Rotation (Auto, 24 RPM)
Antenna Heading Align (-179.9 - +180.0; +0.0q)
Main Bang Suppression (0 - 100; 0)
Enable Sector (2) Blanking (ON, OFF)
Start Angle (0 - 359; 0)
End Angle (0 - 359; 0)
Antenna Longitudinal Position (from bow) (20 ft)
Antenna Lateral Position (-Port) (0 ft)
Antenna Height*1 (For DRS: Under 3 m, 3 m - 10 m, Over 10 m)
(For IMO: 5 m, 7.5 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35 m, 40 m, 45 m, 50 m)
Auto Tuning*2 (ON, OFF)
Tuning Source (Range1, Range2)
Manual Tuning (-50 to 50)
Radar Monitoring
Radar Optimization *2
ARPA Advanced Settings *3
TX Channel (Auto, 1, 2, 3)*⁴
Auto Acquire by Doppler (OFF, ON)*⁴
Set Hardware To Factory Default
Reset Default Settings

*1: Grayed out if DRS4DL is connected

*2: Not available if DRS4D-NXT is connected
*3: Grayed out IMO Radar or DRS4DL is connected
*4: Shown only for DRS4D-NXT/DRS6A-NXT/
DRS12A-NXT/DRS25A-NXT

AP-6
 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

Targets Display Target IDs (ON, OFF)

Ignore Alarms for AIS Slower than... (1 kn)
Target Icon Size (50, 100, 200)
Ais Message Notification (ON, OFF)
CPA/TCPA Alarm (ON, OFF)
CPA Alarm Value (0.5 NM)
TCPA Alarm Value (10 min)
CPA Graphic Display (ON, OFF)
Proximity AIS Target Alarm (ON, OFF)
Proximity AIS Target Alarm Value (100 yd)
Buddies List (AIS & DSC) (Open the buddies list.)
Reset Default Settings
Fish Fish Finder Source (TZTxxF, network sounder name if connected)
Finder Day Background Color (White, Light Blue, Black, Dark Blue)
Night Background Color (Black, Dark Blue)
Echo Color Levels (8 Colors, 16 Colors, 64 Colors)
Color Erase (0 - 50, 0 )
Show Range Slider (ON, OFF)
A-Scope Peak Hold (ON, OFF)
Zoom Reference Lines (ON, OFF)
Cancel Smoothing (ON, OFF)
Split Range (ON, OFF)
Picture Advance (4/1, 2/1, 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, Stop)
Bottom Range Shift Area (15 - 85(%),75)
Zoom Range Span (2 - 120(m), 10)
Bottom Lock Range Span (2 - 120(m), 10)
ACCU-FISH Info (Depth, Fish Size)
ACCU-FISH Symbols (Off, Solid, Striped)
ACCU-FISH Minimum Size (00.00 - 79.98(in); 00.00)
ACCU-FISH Size Correction (-80 - 100(%), 0)
Heaving Correction (ON, OFF; external sounder only)
Interference Rejection (Off, Low, Medium, High, Auto)
Clutter (0 - 100(%), 0)
TVG (or TVG HF, TVG MF, TVG LF)*3
Transmit Rate Mode (Auto, Manual) *3: BBDS1, DFF1, DFF1-UHD,
Transmit Rate Manual (0~20, 20) DFF3: 5=default setting
Fish Finder Transmit (ON, OFF)
Fish Alarm (ON, OFF)
Range Minimum Value (0 - 120(m), 0.0)*4
Range Maximum Value (0 - 120(m), 0.9)*4 *4: Range for internal
Fish Alarm for Bottom Lock (ON, OFF) sounder. Range is different
*4 for network sounders.
Range Minimum Value (0 - 120(m), 0.0)
Range Maximum Value (0 - 120(m), 0.9)*4
Fish Alarm Level (Low, Medium, High)
Zero Line Rejection (ON, OFF) 5
: DFF3
Zero Line Range (1.4 - 2.5; 2.0)*5,*6,*7 *6
: DI-FFAMP
Transducer Draft (0.0 - 99.9(m), 1.0) *7
: DI-FFAMP: 1-4 - 3.8; 2.0
Salt Water (ON, OFF)

1 2 Continued on following page

AP-7
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

1 2 Continued from previous page

Fish Finder Source (TZTxxF, network sounder name if connected)

Preset Frequency Setup (DI-FFAMP (preset frequency 1, 2, 3)*1
Transducer Setup (Open the dialog box for transducer setting.)
Transmission Format (Parallel, Sequential)*1
Transmission Power Mode (Manual, Auto)*1 (Not used)
Transmission Power (Min, Max)*2
External KP (ON, OFF)*3
Bottom Level (HF, MF, LF) (-40 - +40, 0)
Gain Offset (HF, MF, LF) (-50 - +50, 0)
Auto Gain Offset (HF, MF, LF) (-5 - +5, 0)*4
*9 STC (HF, MF, LF) (0 - 10)*3
Frequency Adjust (HF, MF, LF) (-50 - +50)*8
TX Pulse (HF, MF, LF) (Short 1, Short 2, Standard, Long)*5,*8
RX Band (HF, MF, 4 LF) (Narrow, Standard, Wide)*
8
*
Temperature Port (MJ Port, Low Frequency, High Frequency)*6
Fish Finder Demo Mode (OFF, Demo 1 - 4)*7
Set Hardware to Factory Default
Reset Default Settings

*1: DI-FFAMP
*2: DI-FFAMP: 0 - 10, 10
DFF1-UHD: OFF, Min, Auto
* : DFF3, DFF1-UHD, DI-FFAMP
3

*4: Auto mode only

*5: DI-FFAMP w/narrow band width transducer only
*6: DFF3, DFF1-UHD
*7: Int. sounder, DI-FFAMP. BBDS1, DFF1, DFF3,
DFF1-UHD: OFF, Shallow, Deep
*8: DFF3
*9: Menu changes according to connected transducer.
1 2 Continued on following page

AP-8
 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

1 2 Continued from previous page

Multi- Day Background Color (White, Light Blue, Black, Blue)
beam Night Background Color (Black, Dark Blue)
Sonar Show Range Slider (OFF, ON)
Bottom Range Shift Area (15~85(%); 50) *1 DFF-3D
*1
Transmit Rate Mode (Manual)
Transmit Rate Manual (0~21; 20)
Multi-beam Sonar Transmit (OFF, ON)
Multi-Sounder
A-Scope Peak Hold (OFF, ON)
HIgh Resolution (OFF, ON)
Picture Advance (4/1, 2/1, 1/1, 1/2,1/4, 1/8, Stop)
Clutter (0~100(%); 0)
TVG (0~9; 5)
TVG Distance (10~1000; 400m)
Reset Default Settings
Side Scan
Echo Color (White, Blue, Brown)
Picture Advance (4/1, 2/1, 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, Stop)
Clutter (0~100(%); 0)
TVG (0~9; 5)
Reset Default Settings
Cross Section
Clutter (0~100(%); 0)
TVG (0~9; 5)
Echo Smoothing (Distance) (OFF, Low, Medium, High)
Echo Smoothing (Time) (OFF, Low, Medium, High)
Sound Speed Correction (-15~15; 0)
Temperature Based Correction (OFF; ON)
Reset Default Settings
3D Sounder History
Fish Detection Level (Low, Medium, High)
Seabed Echo Calibration (-15~15; 0)
Noise Filter (Off, Low, Medium, High)
Terrain Shading (~100(%); 50)
Picture Advance (4/1, 2/1, 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, Stop)
Color Mode (Seabed, Fish)
Seabed Color*1 (Classic Hue, Inverted Classic Hue, Red Hue, Blue Hue,
Green Hue, Yellow Hue)
Fish Monochrome Color*1 (Gray Hue, Brown Hue, Red, Green, Blue, Cyan,
Magenta, BlackOrWhite, Pink, Light Green, Yellow)
Auto Seabed Shading (OFF, ON) *1
Requires Color Mode set to Seabed.
Minimum Value*3 (0~60; 0m) *2
Requires Color Mode set to Fish.
Maximum Value*3 (0~1200; 61m) *3
Requires Auto Seabed Shading set to ON.
*4
Auto Fish Shading (OFF, ON) Requires Auto Fish Shading set to ON.
*4
Minimum Value (0~60; 0m)
Maximum Value*4 (0~1200; 61m)
Reset Default Settings
1 2 Continued on following page

AP-9
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

1 2 Continued from previous page

Fish Finder Alarms
Fish Alarm (OFF, Single Beam, Triple Beam)
Range Minimum Value (0~1200; 0m)
Range Maximum Value (0~1200; 3m)
Fish Alarm Level (Low, Medium, High)
Initial Setup
Transducer Draft (0~99.9; 0)
Salt Water (OFF, ON)
Transducer Setup (Show the menu for setting up the transducer)
Transmission Power Auto (OFF, ON)
Transmission Power (0~10; 10)
External KP (OFF, ON)
Bottom Level (-40~40; 0)
Auto Gain Offset (Multi-Sounder) (-5~5; 0)
Auto Gain Offset (Side Scan) (-5~5; 0)
Auto Gain Offset (Cross Section) (-5~5; 0)
STC (Multi-Sounder) (0~10; 5)
STC (Side Scan) (0~10; 5)
TX Pulse (Short1, Short2, Std, Long)
DFF-3D Monitoring
Set Hardware to Factory Default
Reset Default Settings
Alarm Hardware Alarm (ON, OFF)
Cross Track Error Alarm (ON, OFF)
Depth Alarm (ON, OFF)
Depth Alarm Value (0 - 900(ft), 30)
Sea Surface Temperature Alarm (Off, Over, Under, Within, Out of)
Temperature Alarm Value (32 - 140(qF), 70.00)
Temp. Alarm Range Min Value (15 - 160(qF), 60.0)
Temp. Alarm Range Max Value (15 - 160(qF),70.0)
Temp. Shear Alarm Value (0 - 15(qF), 1.0)
Speed Alarm (Off, Over, Under)
Speed Alarm Value (0 - 99.9(kn), 10.0)
Anchor Watch Alarm (ON, OFF)
Anchor Watch Alarm Value (1 - 3300(ft), 150)
Wind Speed Alarm (Off, Apparent, True)
Wind Speed Alarm Value (0.0 to 99.9; 10 kn)
Own Ship Alarm Zone (OFF, ON)
Own Ship Alarm Zone Warning (1 to 5000; 300 m)
Low Fuel Alarm (ON, OFF)
Low Fuel Alarm Level (10-50%; 20%)
Notification Sound (ON, OFF)
Notify when NAVpilot is engaged (ON, OFF)
Alarm Sound (ON, OFF)
Sound Alarm Until Acknowledged (ON, OFF)
Save Log File (Save log file to micro SD card.)
Reset Default Settings
1

AP-10
 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

Files Export File Format (TZX, TZD, CSV, GPX)

Import User Objects (Open the dialog box for importing points and routes.)
Export User Objects (Open the dialog box for exporting all points and routes.)
Import Tracks (Open the dialog box for importing tracks.)
Export Tracks (Open the dialog box for exporting tracks.)
Import Wind Polar
Polar Name
Convert NavNet vx2 Data
BackUp Settings (Open the dialog box for backing up settings.)
Restore Settings (Open the dialog box for restoring settings.)
Backup Settings in the Cloud
Restore Settings from the Cloud
Units Bearing Display (Magnetic, True)
True Wind Calculation Reference (Ground, Surface)
Position Format ([Link]’, DDD°[Link]’, [Link]’,
DDDqMM’[Link]”, [Link], Loran-C, MGRS)
Loran C Station & GRI (Select GRI, Master, and Slave; apply corrections)
Short/Long Change Over (0.0 - 2.0; 0.5 NM)
Range (Long) (Nautical Mile, Kilometer, Mile)
Range (Short) (Foot, Meter, Yard)
Depth (Foot, Meter, Fathom, Passi Braza)
Height/Length (Foot, Meter)
Fish Size (Inch, Centimeter)
Fish Weight (Pound, Kilogram)
Temperature (Fahrenheit Degree, Celsius Degree)
Boat Speed (Knot, Kilometer per Hour, Mile per Hour, Meter per Second)
Wind Speed (Knot, Kilometer per Hour, Mile per Hour, Meter per Second)
Atmospheric Pressure (HectoPascal, Millibar, Millimeter of Mercury, Inch of
Mercury)
Oil Pressure (KiloPascal, Bar, Pound per Square Inch)
Volume (Gallon, Liter)
Reset Default Settings

AP-11
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

1
Camera HDMI
HDMI Input (ON, OFF)
Touch Output (ON, OFF)
HCDP (ON, OFF)
ANALOG CAMERA 1~2
Connected (ON, OFF)
NickName (Camera 1)
IP CAMERA 1~4
NickName (IP CAMERA1)
IP Camera (IP address)
PTZ Control (ON, OFF)
AXIS QUAD SERVER
Server (ON, OFF)
IP Server
Quad Mode (ON, OFF)
Input 1~4 (ON, OFF)
Nickname Input 1~4 (VIDEO1~VIDEO4)
SECOND AXIS QUAD SERVER
CONTROLLABLE CAMERA
FLIR Installation
Scan IP
FLIR IP
Video Source (NONE, CAMERA 1, CAMERA 2, IP CAMERA1~4, QUAD, VIDEO1~4)
Camera Offset (Right-left) (0q)
Camera Offset (Up-Down) (0q)
Automatic Zoom (ON, OFF)
Zoom Distance (300 ft)
Camera Altitude (30 ft)
Camera Model (M-Series, FLIR M200, FLIR M400)
TRACKING
Automatic Lock on Active Waypoint (ON, OFF)
Automatic Lock on MOB (ON, OFF)
Reset Default Settings
Initial GPS POSITION
Setup Longitudinal (from bow)
(see Lateral (-Port)
Inst. BOAT INFORMATION
Manual Boat Length
for Size of Own Ship Icon
details) Depth Display
External Transducer Draft
Keel Draft
2 Continued on following page

AP-12
 APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

2 Continued from previous page

INSTRUMENTS SETUP
Engine & Tank Automatic Setup
Engine & Tank Manual Setup
Graphic Instruments Setup
Maximum Boat Speed
Maximum Wind Speed
DEPTH
Minimum Depth
Maximum Depth
SEA SURFACE TEMPERATURE
Minimum Sea Surface Temperature
Maximum Sea Surface Temperature
PROPULSION ENGINE
Max. RPM
Red Zone Oil Pressure
Max. Oil Pressure
Min. Temperature
Red Zone Temperature
OTHER ENGINE (same options as PROPULSION ENGINE)
CZONE SETUP
Add Default CZone Pages
CZone DIP Switch Settings
Reset Intrument Pages
Reset Default Settings

Homepage
Factory Reset
MANUAL FUEL MANAGEMENT
Total Fuel Capacity (0,000 - 9,999 (gallons)
Manual Fuel Management (OFF, ON)
YAMAHA ENGINE SETUP
Trip & Maintenance (Reset trip fuel and distance, and trip and maintenance hours.)
Trim Level Calibration (Set trim to “0” (zero).
Fuel Flow Level Calibration (-7 to +7(%); 0)
Engine Interface Software Ver. & ID)
Reset Engine Interface
Reset Engine Instance
Reset Number of Engines
Trouble Codes
SUZUKI ENGINE SETUP
Diagnosis
Create New QR Code
View QR Code Logs
Engine Interface Software Ver. & ID)
Reset Data…
Installation…
IF NMEAFI SETUP
Select IF
DATA ACQUISITION
GP330B WAAS Mode
WS200 WAAS Mode
Data Source
Sensor List
NMEA 0183 Output
NMEA 2000 PGN Output
Sky View
2 Continued on following page

AP-13
APPENDIX 1 MENU TREE

2 Continued from previous page

NMEA2000 Log
Enable NMEA2000 Log
NMEA2000 Log Strage location

INTERNAL GPS SETUP

WAAS Mode
SC-30 SETUP
WAAS Mode
Heading Offset
Pitch Offset
Roll Offset
NETWORK SENSOR SETUP (Shows compatible FURUNO devices.)
CALIBRATION
Heading
Speed Through Water
Wind Speed
Wind Angle
Sea Surface Temperature
DATA DAMPING
COG & SOG
Heading
Speed Through Water
Wind Speed & Angle
Rate of Turn
FUSION
Connect to Fusion
Fusion Auto Volume
Minimum Speed
Maximum Speed
Volume Increase
BROWSER INSTALLATION
FAX30 Browser
FA30 Browser
FA50 Browser
Chart Master Device
System ID
IP Address
Synchronization Log
Quick Self Test
Certification Mark
Service
Event Input Configuration (Off, Event, MOB)
Update Network Equipments *1 :Requires FURUNO BBWX series
SIRIUS DIAGNOSTIC*1 Marine Weather Receiver.
SIrius Radio Diagnostic Not shown otherwise.
Sirius Weather Diagnostic
Reset Default Settings

AP-14
APPENDIX 2 TRANSDUCER LIST
The table below shows whether the transducers that can be connected to this unit are compatible
with ACCU-FISH™, Bottom Discrimination and RezBoost™ functions.

Optional transducers

Standard transducers (CW)

Bottom
Model ACCU-FISH™ RezBoost™ Remarks
Discrimination
520-5PSD Yes Yes Yes 600 W
520-5MSD Yes Yes Yes
525-5PWD Yes Yes Yes
525STID-MSD Yes Yes Yes
525STID-PWD Yes Yes Yes
520-PLD Yes Yes Yes
525T-BSD Yes Yes Yes
525T-PWD Yes Yes Yes
525T-LTD/12 Yes Yes Yes
525T-LTD/20 Yes Yes Yes
SS60-SLTD/12 Yes Yes Yes
SS60-SLTD/20 Yes Yes Yes
526TID-HDD Yes Yes Yes 1 kW
50/200-1T Yes Yes Yes
50B-6 No No No
50B-6B No No No
200B-5S No No No
28BL-6HR No No No 2 kW
38BL-9HR No No No (Requires DI-FFAMP)
50BL-12HR No No No
82B-35R No No No
88B-10 No No No
200B-8 No No No
200B-8B No No No
28BL-12HR No No No 3 kW
38BL-15HR No No No (Requires DI-FFAMP)
50BL-24HR No No No
68F-30H No No No
100B-10R No No No
150B-12H No No No
88F-126H No No No 5 kW* (Requires DI-
200B-12H No No No FFAMP)
28F-38M No No No 5 kW* (Requires DI-
50F-38 No No No FFAMP and BT-5-1/2)
28F-72 No No No 10 kW* (Requires DI-
50F-70 No No No FFAMP and BT-5-1/2)

*: 3 kW with DI-FFAMP

AP-15
APPENDIX 2 TRANSDUCER LIST

CHIRP transducers
Bottom
Model ACCU-FISH™ RezBoost™ Remarks
Discrimination
TM150M No No No 300 W
B-75L No No No
B-75H No No No 600 W
B-175H No No No 1 kW
B-175L No No No
B265LH-FJ12 Yes No No
CM265LH-FJ12 Yes No No
TM265LH-FJ12 Yes No No
PM111LHG No No No 2 kW
(Requires DI-FFAMP)
CM599LHG No No No 2 to 3 kW
CM599LM No No No (Requires DI-FFAMP)

Other compatible transducers

CHIRP transducers (single frequency)

Bottom
Model ACCU-FISH™ RezBoost™ Remarks
Discrimination
B150M No No No 300 W
SS75L No No No
B75M No No No 600 W
B785M No No No
SS75H No No No
SS75M No No No
B175HW No No No 1 kW
B175M No No No
B285HW No No No
B285M No No No
TM185HW No No No
TM185M No No No

CHIRP transducers (dual frequency)

Bottom
Model ACCU-FISH™ RezBoost™ Remarks
Discrimination
B265LH Yes No No 1 kW
B275LHW No No No
B265LM No No No
CM265LH Yes No No
CM265LM No No No
CM275LHW No No No
TM265LH Yes No No
TM265LM No No No
TM275LHW No No No

AP-16
 APPENDIX 2 TRANSDUCER LIST

CHIRP transducers (dual frequency for DI-FFAMP)

Bottom
Model ACCU-FISH™ RezBoost™ Remarks
Discrimination
PM111LH No No No 2 kW
PM111LHW No No No
R109LH No No No
R109LHW No No No
R111LH No No No
CM599LH No No No 2 to 3 kW
CM599LHW No No No
R509LH No No No
R509LHW No No No
R509LM No No No
R599LH No No No
R599LM No No No

AP-17
APPENDIX 3 ALERT MESSAGES
The table below shows the alert messages that may appear.

Text Meaning Remedy

Hardware: Fan Speed The rotation speed of the Do the quick self test. Replace the fan if
Alarm fan is 4,000 rpm or less. the rotation speed (IntFan (SYSFAN)
Speed)* is 3,999 rpm or less. If the rota-
tion speed is 0 rpm, the connector may
be disconnected. Check the connector.
*: The TZT19F has two fans. Replace a
fan if the rotation speed (ExtFan (FAN2)
Speed)* is 3,447 rpm or less.
Several Chart Master De- Two or more TZT units are Set the chart master on only one TZT
tected set for the chart master. unit.
Home screen → [Settings] → [Initial Set-
up] → [Chart Master Device]
No Chart Master Detected TZT are set for the chart Set the chart master on only one TZT
master. unit.
Home screen → [Settings] → [Initial Set-
up] → [Chart Master Device]
SID not found ** SID is not found. Start TZT with the chart master set to
** is the system ID. ON.
Object Limit Reached The user object data has Delete unnecessary user objects to
reached the upper limit. make room. Check the number of used
user objects.
Home screen → [Settings] → [General]
→ [DATA USAGE]
AIS Count 100% AIS data containing 1,000 This message disappears when the
or more targets is received. number of AIS targets becomes less
than or equal to 999.
AIS Count 95% AIS data containing 950 or This message disappears when the
more targets is received. number of AIS targets becomes less
than or equal to 949.
AIS SART Alarm AIS data (including AIS This message disappears when AIS
SART) is valid. data (including AIS SART) is lost. You
cannot delete this message manually
because this is an emergency warning.
Proximity AIS Target Alarm If [Proximity AIS Target Take evasive action immediately. To
Alarm] is set to ON, this cancel the proximity AIS target alarm,
message appears when an use the following procedure.
AIS target is within the dis- Home screen → [Settings] → [Targets]
tance set. → [Proximity AIS Target Alarm]
CPA/TCPA Alarm If [CPA/TPA Alarm] is set to Take evasive action immediately. Tap
ON, this message appears "CPA/TCPA Alarm" on the status bar at
when a AIS target’s CPA the top of the screen to silence the audio
and TCPA are less than the alarm and erase the message. To can-
threshold value. The status cel the CPA/TPA alarm, turn off the
of the AIS target changes alarm using the following procedure.
to “dangerous target”. Home screen → [Settings] → [Targets]
→ [CPA/TPA Alarm]
AIS: New Text Message An AIS safety message is Tap [Delete Message] to clear the mes-
received. sage.

AP-18
 APPENDIX 3 ALERT MESSAGES

Text Meaning Remedy

DSC Distress Call A distress warning is re- You cannot delete this message manu-
ceived. ally because this is an emergency warn-
ing.
DSC Position Report Re- A non-distress DSC mes- This message is erased when a
ceived sage is received. non-distress DSC message is lost.
Radar Connection Lost Connection with the select- Reconnect the radar sensor.
ed radar sensor is lost.
Radar Trigger Alarm Trigger signal error. Check the radar antenna. Check the
connection with the radar antenna.
Radar Video Alarm Video signal error. Check the radar antenna. Check the
connection with the radar antenna.
Radar Azimuth Alarm Bearing pulse signal error. Check the radar antenna. Check the
connection with the radar antenna.
Radar Headline Alarm Heading pulse signal error. Check the reed switch and magnetron of
the radar antenna. Check the connec-
tion with the radar antenna.
TARGET ALARM A target has entered the Take evasive action immediately. Tap
guard zone. the guard zone to cancel the alarm.
Antenna FAN RPM is Low Problem with the fan of the Check the fan of the radar sensor.
radar sensor.
Bird Mode Activated The bird mode is turned on. –
Bird Mode Deactivated The bird mode is turned off. –
Target Analyzer Requires The radar sensor is Set the target analyzer within the config-
24NM Range or Less DRS6A-NXT and the target urable range (within 16 NM).
analyzer is set to 24 NM.
Cannot intercept target at The target cannot be inter- Raise the ship speed.
current speed cepted at the current ship
speed.
Fish Finder Connection Connection with the select- –
Lost ed fish finder is lost.
Fish detected - Bottom A fish school is detected –
within the range set for the
bottom lock fish alarm.
Multibeam Sonar Discon- Connection with the multi- Check the connection with the multi-
nection Alarm beam sonar is lost. beam sonar.
Multibeam Sonar B Voltage The B voltage of the multi- Have a qualified technician check the
Abnormal beam sonar is outside the connection between the PWRTRX
specified value (32.4 to board and the DIGI board of the multi-
39.6 V). beam sonar. If there is no problem with
the connection and no echo is produced,
the PWRTRX board is faulty. Contact
your dealer for advice.
Multibeam SONAR Fish A school of fish is detected –
Detected within the range set for the
fish alarm of the multibeam
sonar.
Sirius Disconnection Alarm Connection with the Siri- Check the connection with the SiriusXM
usXM receiver is lost. receiver.
Weather Update in Prog- The latest weather data is This message disappears after the
ress being downloaded from the weather data is obtained.
internet.

AP-19
APPENDIX 3 ALERT MESSAGES

Text Meaning Remedy

Opening Grib File The GRIB file (weather in- –
formation) stored in the
TZT is being opened.
NAVpilot Connection Lost Connection with the Check the connection with the NAVpilot.
NAVpilot is lost. Check that power is supplied to the
NAVpilot.
NAVpilot Engaged AUTO/NAV/WIND/TURN/ –
FISH HUNTER/SABIKI is
being performed from
STBY on the NAVpilot or
the TZT.
NAVpilot Disengaged Navigation by the NAVpilot –
is canceled.
Safe Helm Activated The safe helm function is
activated. (The NAVpilot
steering mode is temporar-
ily switched to the manual
mode.)
Safe Helm Deactivated The safe helm function is
deactivated.
Position Lost No positioning data. Check for objects which may be blocking
reception. Check the connection be-
tween the built-in GPS antenna/external
GPS and the MAIN board.
Heading Lost No heading data. Check the connection with the heading
sensor. Check the heading sensor.
Depth Alarm The depth is lower than the Take immediate evasive action to pre-
value set for the depth vent grounding.
alarm.
Sea Surface Temperature The sea surface tempera- –
Alarm ture matches the value set
for the sea surface tem-
perature alarm.
SST Shear detected Shear is detected. –
Speed Alarm The ship speed matches –
the value set for the ship
speed alarm.
Max Wind Speed Exceed- The wind speed matches –
ed the value set for the wind
speed alarm.
Low Fuel Alarm The fuel level is lower than Refill the fuel.
or equal to the value (%)
set for the low fuel alarm.
MOB A MOB mark is input. –
XTE Alarm This alarm alerts you to The notification will disappear when the
course deviation. set course is recovered.
Anchor Watch Alarm Your ship has moved a dis- The notification will disappear when the
tance greater than the val- ship returns within the specified dis-
ue set for the anchor watch tance.
alarm.
Waypoint Crossing Notifi- Your ship arrived at the –
cation destination.
End of Route Notification Your ship has arrived at the –
final destination.

AP-20
 APPENDIX 3 ALERT MESSAGES

Text Meaning Remedy

Fuel Active Route The fuel is expected to run Refill the fuel.
out during the route naviga-
tion.
Nmea 2000 Logging NMEA2000 log is being re- –
corded.
Boundary Line Crossed Your ship has crossed a –
boundary line.
In Alarm Zone Your ship has entered a –
boundary line.
Near Alarm Zone Your ship is near a bound- –
ary line.
Check Engine! Engine error. Refer to the operator's manual for the
engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Over Temperature! Engine error (overheat). Refer to the operator's manual for the
engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Low Oil Pressure! Engine error (oil pressure Refer to the operator's manual for the
drop). engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Low Oil Level! Engine error (oil level Refer to the operator's manual for the
drop). engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Low Fuel Pressure! Engine error (fuel pressure Refer to the operator's manual for the
drop). engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Low System Voltage! Engine error (voltage Refer to the operator's manual for the
drop). engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Low Coolant Level! Engine error (coolant level Refer to the operator's manual for the
drop). engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Water Flow! Engine error (water flow). Refer to the operator's manual for the
engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Water in Fuel! Engine error (mixture of Refer to the operator's manual for the
water in fuel). engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Charge Indicator! Engine indicator error. Refer to the operator's manual for the
engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Preheat Indicator Engine indicator error. Refer to the operator's manual for the
engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
High Boost Pressure! The discharge pressure of Refer to the operator's manual for the
the engine pump is too engine and contact the engine manufac-
high. turer.
Rev Limit Exceeded! The engine rotation speed Refer to the operator's manual for the
has exceeded the upper engine and contact the engine manufac-
limit. turer.
EGR System! EGR system (engine) er- Refer to the operator's manual for the
ror. engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.

AP-21
APPENDIX 3 ALERT MESSAGES

Text Meaning Remedy

Throttle Position Sensor! Throttle opening sensor Refer to the operator's manual for the
(engine) error. engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Engine Emergency Stop Engine indicator (emergen- Refer to the operator's manual for the
Mode! cy stop mode) error. engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Warning Level 1! Engine error (Warning Lev- Refer to the operator's manual for the
el 1). engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Warning Level 2! Engine error (Warning Lev- Refer to the operator's manual for the
el 2). engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Power Reduction! Engine error (power drop). Refer to the operator's manual for the
engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Maintenance Needed! Engine error (maintenance Refer to the operator's manual for the
required). engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Engine Comm Error! Engine error (undetectable Refer to the operator's manual for the
condition). engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Sub or Secondary Throttle! Engine sub-throttle error. Refer to the operator's manual for the
engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Neutral Start Protect! Engine error (Neutral Start Refer to the operator's manual for the
Protect!). engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
Engine Shutting Down! Engine error (stop). Refer to the operator's manual for the
engine and contact the engine manufac-
turer.
** -Device Missing- ** CZone devices can not be Check the connection with CZone devic-
found. es.
** indicates the source
Module Type/Name.
** -High Temperature An error is received from Refer to the operator's manual for
Alarm- ** the CZone devices. CZone.
** -Very High Temperature An error is received from Refer to the operator's manual for
Alarm- ** the CZone devices. CZone.
** -Low Temperature An error is received from Refer to the operator's manual for
Alarm- ** the CZone devices. CZone.
** -Very Low Temperature An error is received from Refer to the operator's manual for
Alarm- ** the CZone devices. CZone.
** -High Level Alarm- ** An error is received from Refer to the operator's manual for
the CZone devices. CZone.
** -Very High Level Alarm- An error is received from Refer to the operator's manual for
** the CZone devices. CZone.
** -Low Level Alarm- ** An error is received from Refer to the operator's manual for
the CZone devices. CZone.
** -Very Low Level Alarm- An error is received from Refer to the operator's manual for
** the CZone devices. CZone.
** -High Battery Capacity An error is received from Refer to the operator's manual for
Alarm- ** the CZone devices. CZone.

AP-22
 APPENDIX 3 ALERT MESSAGES

Text Meaning Remedy

** -Low Battery Capacity An error is received from Refer to the operator's manual for
Alarm- ** the CZone devices. CZone.
** -High Battery Voltage An error is received from Refer to the operator's manual for
Alarm- ** the CZone devices. CZone.
** -Low Battery Voltage An error is received from Refer to the operator's manual for
Alarm- ** the CZone devices. CZone.
** -Very Low Battery Volt- An error is received from Refer to the operator's manual for
age Alarm- ** the CZone devices. CZone.
You are logged as ** The data (setting data, –
points, routes, and tracks)
saving on the cloud has
been started using the My
time zero cloud data ser-
vice.
The User name is dis-
played in **.
Manual Demo The manual demo mode is –
enabled.
Demo Mode The demo mode is enabled –
started with the selected
demo file.
Previous SID Disable The previously detected –
chart master has been dis-
abled.
Scanning Drive The microSD charts are be- –
ing loaded.

AP-23
APPENDIX 4 RADIO REGULATORY
INFORMATION
Wireless Interoperability
This product is designed to be interoperable with any wireless LAN product that is based on direct
sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) and orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) radio
technology and to comply with the following standards.

• IEEE Std 802.11b Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN

• IEEE Std 802.11g Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN
• IEEE Std 802.11n Standard on 2.4 GHz Wireless LAN

Safety
This product, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of
energy emitted by this device, however, is less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by other
wireless devices such as mobile phones. This product operates within the guidelines found in ra-
dio frequency safety standards and recommendations. These standards and recommendations
reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and com-
mittees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In
some situations or environments, the use of this product may be restricted by the proprietor of the
building or responsible representatives of the applicable organization. Examples of such situa-
tions include the following:
• Using this product onboard airplanes, or
• Using this product in any other environment where the risk of interference with other devices or
services is perceived or identified as being harmful.
If uncertain of the policy that applies to the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or
environment (an airplane, for example), ask for authorization to use this product before turning it
on.

Export Regulation
Radio wave certification is necessary at the export destination. The Wireless LAN of this product
operates in the 2.4 GHz band, which does not require a license in most countries. However, the
conditions for use of the wireless LAN depend on the country or the area.

AP-24
APPENDIX 4 RADIO REGULATORY INFORMATION

AP-25
APPENDIX 4 RADIO REGULATORY INFORMATION

This page is intentionally left blank.

AP-26
FURUNO TZT12F/16F/19F

SPECIFICATIONS OF MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY

TZT12F/16F/19F

1 DISPLAY FUNCTION
1.1 Screen
TZT12F 12.1-inch touch-panel color display, 1280 x 800 (WXGA)
TZT16F 15.6-inch touch-panel color display, 1920 x 1080 (FHD)
TZT19F 18.5-inch touch-panel color display, 1920 x 1080 (FHD)
1.2 Brightness
TZT12F 900 cd/m2 typical
TZT16F 1000 cd/m2 typical
TZT19F 900 cd/m2 typical
1.3 Display colors 16,770,000 colors (plotter), 64 colors for radar/sounder echo
1.4 Language Bulgarian, Chinese, Danish, English (UK/US), Finnish, French,
German, Greek, Italian, Japanese, Norwegian, Portuguese,
Russian, Spanish, Swedish

2 PLOTTER FUNCTION
2.1 Display mode Course plot, NAV data (includes instrument and engine data)
2.2 Projection Mercator
2.3 Usable area 85° latitude or below
2.4 Memory capacity Track: 30,000 points, Point/MOB: 30,000 points
Route: 200 courses w/500 points each
ARPA: 30 targets (100 for DRS-NXT ser.) , AIS: 100 targets
2.5 Alarm Anchor watch, XTE, Own ship alarm zone
(TZT19F requires external data)
2.6 GPS receiver (TZT12F/16F only)
Receiving frequency 1575.42 MHz
Number of channel GNSS: 72 ch (GPS, Galileo, SBAS, QZSS)
Accuracy GNSS: 10 m (2drms, HDOP<4),
WAAS: 3 m (2drms, HDOP<4), MSAS: 7 m (2drms, HDOP<4)
Ship’s speed range 500 m/s max. (all satellites at -130dBm)
Position fixing time Cold start: 100 s typical
Position update interval 0.1 s

3 RADAR FUNCTION
3.1 Orientation mode Head-up, North-up (heading data required)
3.2 Echo trail 15/30 s, 1/3/6/15/30 min. or continuous
3.3 ARPA target 30 point (100 for DRS-NXT ser.)
3.4 Alarm Guard-zone, CPA/TCPA, Trigger, Video, Azimuth, Heading line

4 SOUNDER FUNCTION
4.1 Frequency CW: 50/200 kHz, CHIRP: 40 to 225 kW
4.2 Output power 300/600 W, 1 kW or
2 to 3 kW (optional fish finder power amplifier required)
4.3 Display mode ACCU-FISHTM, A-scope, ResBoostTM,

SP - 1 E4510S01A-M
200312
FURUNO TZT12F/16F/19F

Estimation for bottom composition, Temperature graph

4.4 Alarm School of fish, School of fish for bottom lock

5 OTHER FUNCTIONS
5.1 AIS information AIS receiver required
5.2 DSC display 20 target max, Target data required
5.3 Instrument indication Instrument data required
5.4 Camera monitor NTSC/PAL data required
5.5 Information indication FAX/NAVTEX, Weather information (external data required)
5.6 Alarm Speed, Wind speed*, Depth*, Water temperature*,
Sea surface temperature*, Low fuel *
*: external data required
(TZT19F requires external data for all items)

6 INTERFACE
6.1 Number of port
HDMI output 1 port, TZT12F: 720p (WXGA), TZT16F/19F: 1080p (FHD)
HDMI input (TZT16F/19F only)
1 port, 1920 x 1080 (FHD) or less, HDCP, Non-interlaced
Video input (composite) 2 ports, NTSC/PAL
USB 1 port (TZT12F) or 2 ports (TZT16F/19F) , USB2.0,
for touch-monitor and control unit
LAN 2 ports, Ethernet 100Base-TX
NMEA2000 1 port
Serial 1 port, NMEA0183 output
Contact closure 2 port, event switch and external power switch
SD card slot 1 port, micro-SDXC
6.2 Wireless LAN IEEE802.11b/g/n
Transmit frequency 2.412 to 2.462 GHz
Output power 11 dBm max.
6.3 NMEA0183 sentences
Output AAM, APB, BOD, DBT, DPT, GGA, GLL, GNS, GSA, GSV, RMB,
RMC, RTE, TTM, VDM, VTG, WPL, XTE, ZDA
6.4 NMEA2000 PGN
Input 065280, 126992, 126993, 126996, 127237, 127245, 127251, 127257, 127488,
127489, 127505, 128259, 128267, 129025, 129026, 129029, 129330, 129038,
129039, 129040, 129041, 129291, 129538, 129540, 129793, 129794, 129798,
129801, 129802, 129808, 129809, 129810, 130306, 130310, 130311, 130312,
130313, 130314, 130316, 130577, 130578, 130817, 130818, 130820, 130822,
130823, 130826, 130827, 130828, 130880
Output 126992, 126993, 126996, 127250, 127251, 127257, 127258, 128259, 128267,
128275, 129025, 129026, 129029, 129033, 129283, 129284, 129285, 130306,
130310, 130311, 130312, 130313, 130314, 130316

7 POWER SUPPLY
7.1 Multi function display
TZT12F 12-24 VDC: 2.3-1.2 A
TZT16F 12-24 VDC: 4.3-2.2 A

SP - 2 E4510S01A-M
200312
FURUNO TZT12F/16F/19F

TZT19F 12-24 VDC: 4.7-2.3 A

7.2 Rectifier (option) 100/110/115/220/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60Hz

8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
8.1 Ambient temperature -15°C to +55°C
8.2 Relative humidity 93% or less at +40°C
8.3 Degree of protection IP56
8.4 Vibration IEC 60945 Ed.4

9 UNIT COLOR
N1.0 (fixed)

SP - 3 E4510S01A-M
200312
INDEX
Numerics proximity AIS target................................14-3
2D/3D switch ..............................................3-2 speed ........................................... 2-16, 2-17
3D display SST ........................................................2-15
activating ..................................................3-2 XTE ........................................................2-14
description................................................3-1 Alarms list.................................................2-18
exaggeration ............................................3-3 Alert messages .....................................AP-18
3D sounder history display Anchor watch alarm .................................2-16
depth indication ......................................8-15 ARPA
echo detection level ...............................8-11 automatic target acquisition ...................6-35
example....................................................8-3 clearing lost target..................................6-38
frequency indication ...............................8-15 CPA/TCPA alarm ...................................6-39
function availability .................................8-15 manual target acquisition .......................6-35
marking school of fish ............................8-11 showing/hiding display ...........................6-34
noise filter...............................................8-11 stop tracking target.................................6-37
picture advancement..............................8-11 target data ..............................................6-36
terrain shading .......................................8-12 A-scope display..........................................7-5
TX and ST-BY ........................................8-10 B
viewpoint position...................................8-10 Background color
A fish finder................................................7-22
ACCU-FISH radar.......................................................6-21
description..............................................7-16 Beam angle (multi-sounder display)...........8-4
fish size correction .................................7-17 Beam type selection (multi-sounder
information .............................................7-17 display).....................................................8-4
setting.....................................................7-16 Beam width (multi-sounder display) ...........8-4
showing/hiding symbol ...........................7-17 Bird mode.................................................6-23
Advanced Wx data ...................................13-8 Boat icon
AIS COG vector ..............................................2-5
buddies list .............................................14-8 description................................................2-4
CPA/TCPA alarm ...................................14-7 heading line..............................................2-4
finding target on chart plotter display .....14-6 orientation ................................................2-6
ignoring slow targets ..............................14-3 Bottom discrimination display.....................7-6
list...........................................................14-5 Bottom echo calibration............................8-11
locating target on chart plotter display ...14-6 Bottom level .............................................7-23
lost target ...............................................14-2 Bottom lock display ....................................7-4
nickname of target..................................14-6 Bottom lock fish alarm
proximity AIS target alarm......................14-3 activating, deactivating...........................7-15
showing/hiding symbols .........................14-1 sensitivity................................................7-15
target data with pop-up menu ................14-4 setting.....................................................7-14
target details...........................................14-6 Bottom range shift area............................7-22
target IDs................................................14-4 Bottom zoom display..................................7-4
target symbols........................................14-1 Boundary lines
AIS list ......................................................14-5 erasing ...................................................4-32
AIS transponder (FA-30, FA-50) setup ..14-10 showing, hiding ......................................4-23
Alarm sensitivity (fish finder) ....................7-15 Buddies list...............................................14-8
Alarms C
alarm menu ............................................2-13 Camera/Video
anchor watch..........................................2-16 contrast adjustment................................10-7
audio alarm silencing .............................2-13 FLIR camera ..........................................10-3
aural alarm on/off ...................................2-17 image size ..............................................10-7
bottom lock fish alarm ............................7-14 showing ..................................................10-1
CPA/TCPA ................................... 6-39, 14-7 switching inputs......................................10-7
depth ......................................................2-14 tracking active waypoint, MOB...............10-9
fish..........................................................7-14 Chart information........................................2-7

IN-1
 INDEX

Chart object info ........................................ 2-6 Display icons

Chart plotter menu .................................. 2-25 description ............................................. 1-16
Charts editing........................................... 1-18, 1-19
adding ................................................. 15-14 removing ............................................... 1-19
deleting................................................ 15-15 Display selection
panning ................................................... 2-3 home screen ......................................... 1-16
range ....................................................... 2-2 quick page ............................................. 1-17
S52 charts objects................................. 2-11 DSC list ................................................. 14-12
type ......................................................... 2-1 DSC message
updating .............................................. 15-14 displaying ............................................ 14-11
vector charts text and object DSC list ............................................... 14-12
information.......................................... 2-10 going to position of .............................. 14-11
viewing ................................................ 15-13 notification of ....................................... 14-11
zoom in, zoom out ................................... 2-2 Dual frequency display .............................. 7-3
Clutter (fish finder)..................................... 7-9 Dual range radar ..................................... 6-22
Color erase.............................................. 7-11
E
Controls..................................................... 1-1
EBL
CPA graphic display
bearing measurement with .................... 6-11
AIS ........................................................ 14-9
reference ............................................... 6-12
radar ...................................................... 6-40
Echo analyzer ......................................... 6-24
CPA/TCPA alarm ........................... 6-39, 14-7
Echo average (radar) .............................. 6-15
Cross section display
Echo color (radar) ................................... 6-21
depth indication ....................................... 8-9
Echo detection level ................................ 8-11
example................................................... 8-3
Echo history ............................................ 7-12
frequency indication ................................ 8-9
Echo smoothing
function availability .................................. 8-9
distance ................................................... 8-8
grid .......................................................... 8-8
time ......................................................... 8-8
speed of sound correction ....................... 8-9
Echo trail (radar) ..................................... 6-18
TX and ST-BY ......................................... 8-7
Echo trails
CZone
clearing.................................................. 6-18
CZone control, instrument display....... 12-19
color ...................................................... 6-19
CZone control, slide-out menu ............ 12-20
length .................................................... 6-18
CZone modes, data area .................... 12-22
reference ............................................... 6-19
CZone modes, instruments display ..... 12-21
shading.................................................. 6-20
CZone modes, slide-out menu ............ 12-23
showing, hiding ..................................... 6-18
CZone monitoring, data area .............. 12-25
Edge swipe.............................................. 1-20
CZone monitoring, instruments
End of route notification .......................... 5-17
display .............................................. 12-24
Event mark
DIP switch settings .............................. 12-18
entering on chart plotter display .............. 4-3
page addition, edit............................... 12-18
info (chart plotter) .................................... 4-5
D Exporting
Data area points....................................................... 9-2
adding data to ....................................... 1-24 routes ...................................................... 9-2
contents of data box.............................. 1-23 track ........................................................ 9-3
data format (analog or digital) ............... 1-25 External KP ............................................. 7-23
deleting data box from........................... 1-24
F
description ............................................. 1-22
False echoes
order of data .......................................... 1-23
fish finder............................................... 7-28
transparency ......................................... 1-25
radar ...................................................... 6-30
Depth alarm............................................. 2-14
Fan replacement ..................................... 16-3
Depth measurement................................ 7-12
FAX-30 (Facsimile Receiver) setup ...... 15-11
Depth shading overlay
File format ................................................. 9-1
description ............................................... 3-4
Fish alarm
settings.................................................... 3-5
activating, deactivating .......................... 7-15
Depth/color shading ................................ 8-12
activating/deactivating ........................... 7-15
DI-FFAMP ............................................... 7-20
setting.................................................... 7-14
Display brilliance ..................................... 1-13
Fish finder automatic operation................. 7-7

IN-2
INDEX

Fish finder menu ......................................7-21 M

FLIR camera Magnetron replacement ...........................16-2
controlling...............................................10-7 Maintenance ............................................16-1
setting.....................................................10-6 Menu tree ................................................AP-1
Fuel management ..................................12-16 MicroSD cards
Function availability care of ....................................................1-28
3D sounder history display.....................8-15 compatible cards ....................................1-29
cross section display ................................8-9 formatting ...............................................1-28
multi-sounder display ...............................8-5 inserting..................................................1-28
side scan display......................................8-7 removing ................................................1-28
Fuse replacement ....................................16-2 MOB (Man OverBoard) ............................1-37
FUSION-Link............................................11-1 MOB mark ................................................1-37
G Multiple echoes (radar) ............................6-30
Gain Multi-sounder display
offset (fish finder) ...................................7-23 beam angle ..............................................8-4
radar.........................................................6-2 beam type selection .................................8-4
Gain offset (fish finder).............................7-23 beam width...............................................8-4
General menu ..........................................15-1 depth indication ........................................8-5
Grid (cross section display)........................8-8 example....................................................8-1
Guard zone frequency indication .................................8-5
activating, deactivating...........................6-16 function availability ...................................8-5
setting.....................................................6-15 TX and ST-BY ..........................................8-4
showing/hiding .......................................6-16 My TimeZero
creating ..................................................1-42
H logging in to account ..............................1-42
Heading line MyFriends
boat icon...................................................2-4 setting up................................................2-31
radar.......................................................6-14 showing, hiding display ..........................2-31
Heaving ....................................................7-22
Heaving correction ...................................7-22 N
High resolution (fish finder) ......................7-22 NavCenter weather
Home icon ...................................... 1-15, 1-33 data availability.....................................13-10
Home screen data description....................................13-10
display selection.....................................1-16 displaying ...............................................13-4
editing display icons ...............................1-18 downloading ...........................................13-3
introduction.............................................1-15 file loading ..............................................13-6
setting.....................................................13-2
I NAVpilot
Importing data box .................................................2-27
boundary lines..........................................9-2 enabling use...........................................2-26
points........................................................9-2 NAVpilot control box...............................2-26
routes .......................................................9-2 settings...................................................2-30
track .........................................................9-3 steering mode ........................................2-28
Initial setup menu .....................................15-5 steering to a point...................................4-20
Instrument display Noise filter ................................................8-11
adding indication ..................................12-14
changing position of data .....................12-11 O
editing indication ..................................12-12 Off center .................................................6-13
showing ..................................................12-1 Orientation mode
switching between displays..................12-10 chart plotter ..............................................2-3
theme ...................................................12-16 radar.........................................................6-5
Interference Orientation mode switch
fish finder................................................7-11 chart plotter ..............................................2-3
radar.......................................................6-14 radar.........................................................6-5
Overlays
L depth shading...........................................3-4
Language .................................................1-37 radar.........................................................3-6
Layers menu ............................................1-21 tidal current ............................................3-10
Low fuel alarm..........................................2-17 tide info.....................................................3-8

IN-3
 INDEX

Own ship icon (radar).............................. 6-20 Remote Control Unit (MCU-004)

description ............................................... 1-6
P
group setting ......................................... 1-10
Photos
Rez boost ................................................ 6-28
importing ............................................... 2-32
Routes
moving on screen .................................. 2-33
auto zoom at arrival to go to point ......... 5-16
photo information deleting ..................... 2-34
color ...................................................... 5-24
photo information editing ....................... 2-34
creating from points................................. 5-3
photo list display.................................... 2-33
creating from points list ........................... 5-4
Picture advance speed............................ 7-10
creating on chart plotter screen............... 5-2
Points
creating with current track ..................... 2-23
default settings ........................................ 4-6
creating with past track.......................... 2-22
deleting.................................................. 4-12
deleting.................................................. 5-10
deleting all ............................................. 4-12
deleting points or route points ................. 5-5
entering on chart plotter display .............. 4-2
description ............................................... 5-1
following with NAVpilot ................. 4-20, 5-18
detailed information ............................... 5-14
going to on-screen point........................ 4-16
end of route notification ......................... 5-17
going to point on points list.................... 4-19
exporting ................................................. 9-2
going to position selected on screen ..... 4-17
extending................................................. 5-5
goto point information............................ 4-20
finding on chart...................................... 5-10
importing ................................................. 9-2
following in reverse direction ................. 5-15
information (chart plotter) ........................ 4-5
following on-screen route ...................... 5-12
moving................................................... 4-11
following route selected from the
moving point to screen center ............... 4-14
routes list ............................................ 5-13
points used display.................................. 4-8
inserting route points ............................... 5-4
restarting navigation to .......................... 4-21
moving route points ................................. 5-5
showing/hiding point names .................. 4-14
navigation from selected route point ..... 5-13
stopping navigation to ........................... 4-21
restarting navigation .............................. 5-15
Pop-up menu........................................... 1-20
routes list ................................................. 5-6
Power on/off ............................................ 1-12
routes menu .......................................... 5-24
Power switch ................... 1-1, 1-2, 1-12, 1-13
routes used display ............................... 5-10
Proximity AIS target alarm ...................... 14-3
settings on routes menu ........................ 5-24
Q showing/hiding ...................................... 5-11
Quick page ..................................... 1-17, 1-20 showing/hiding active route on radar..... 6-20
R skipping a route point ............................ 5-16
Racon...................................................... 6-33 steering with NAVpilot ........................... 5-18
Radar overlay stop following ........................................ 5-15
description ............................................... 3-6 waypoint arrival notification ................... 5-17
settings.................................................... 3-7 waypoint switching mode ...................... 5-16
Radio regulatory information .................AP-24 XTE lines ............................................... 5-17
Rain clutter ................................................ 6-4 Routes list ................................................. 5-6
Range Routes menu........................................... 5-24
chart plotter ............................................. 2-2 RX band (fish finder) ............................... 7-24
radar ........................................................ 6-5 S
Range and bearing measurement S-52 charts cartographic objects............. 2-11
chart plotter ............................................. 2-8 S-52 display menu .................................. 2-11
radar ...................................................... 6-13 Safety instructions......................................... ii
Range and bearing measurement with SART....................................................... 6-32
cursor (radar) .......................................... 6-8 Satellite photo overlay............................... 3-6
Range measurement SD cards
fish finder............................................... 7-12 loading equipment settings...................... 9-4
plotter ...................................................... 2-6 saving equipment settings....................... 9-4
Range rings Sea clutter ................................................. 6-4
bearing mode .......................................... 6-7 Sector blanking ....................................... 6-31
description ............................................... 6-6 Sensor icons ........................................... 1-16
interval..................................................... 6-7 Settings menu ......................................... 1-33
Remote Control Unit (MCU-002) ............... 1-5 Side scan display
depth indication ....................................... 8-6

IN-4
INDEX

echo color.................................................8-6 Transducer setup .....................................7-23

example....................................................8-2 Transmit (radar) .........................................6-1
frequency indication .................................8-6 Troubleshooting
function availability ...................................8-7 chart plotter ............................................16-4
TX and ST-BY ..........................................8-6 fish finder................................................16-5
Sidelobe echoes ......................................6-32 general ...................................................16-3
Single frequency display ............................7-2 radar.......................................................16-4
SiriusXM radio Tuning ........................................................6-1
controls.................................................13-15 TVG..........................................................7-13
diagnostics ...........................................13-16 Two-finger tap function.............................1-36
enabling................................................13-14 TX and ST-BY
SiriusXM weather 3D sounder history display.....................8-10
advanced Wx data .................................13-8 cross section display ................................8-7
animation radar ......................................13-8 multi-sounder display ...............................8-4
data availability.....................................13-10 side scan display......................................8-6
data description....................................13-10 TX pulse (fish finder) ................................7-24
diagnostics ...........................................13-13 TX/Standby switch .....................................6-1
icons overview........................................13-9 TZ iboat ....................................................2-32
setup ......................................................13-7
U
Wx radar.................................................13-8
Units menu ...............................................15-3
Slide-out menu .........................................1-20
Soft cover ...................................................1-2 V
Software update .....................................15-12 Vector charts text and objects..................2-10
Speed alarm................................... 2-16, 2-17 Viewpoint position (3D sounder history
SST alarm ................................................2-15 display)...................................................8-10
Stand-by (radar) .........................................6-1 Virtual image ............................................6-31
STC (fish finder) .......................................7-24 VRM
System configuration .................................xvii range measurement with.......6-9, 6-10, 6-12
T W
Temperature graph ..................................7-19 Watchman ................................................6-17
Terrain shading ........................................8-12 Waypoint arrival notification .....................5-17
Tidal current graph ...................................3-11 Waypoint switching mode ........................5-16
Tidal current overlay Weather display
displaying ...............................................3-10 advanced Wx data .................................13-8
icon size .................................................3-10 animation radar ......................................13-8
Tide graph ..................................................3-9 introduction.............................................13-1
Tide info overlay NavCenter data display..........................13-4
displaying .................................................3-8 NavCenter data download......................13-3
tide graph .................................................3-9 NavCenter weather file...........................13-6
tide icon size ............................................3-8 NavCenter weather setup ......................13-2
tide information display ............................3-8 selecting .................................................13-1
Touchscreen operations ............................1-3 SiriusXM.................................................13-6
Track Wireless LAN
color ............................................. 2-20, 2-22 connect to existing .................................1-39
creating route with current track.............2-23 creating network.....................................1-41
creating route with past track .................2-22 X
deleting...................................................2-24 XTE alarm ................................................2-14
deleting all ..............................................2-24 XTE lines..................................................5-17
description..............................................2-18
exporting ..................................................9-3 Y
importing ..................................................9-3 Yamaha engine display
interval....................................................2-19 alarm list...............................................12-30
points used display.................................2-24 data box ...............................................12-28
recording ................................................2-18 example displays..................................12-27
showing/hiding .......................................2-19 showing ................................................12-26
thickness ................................................2-22 switching displays ................................12-28
Track back ...............................................2-23 troll mode .............................................12-29
Transducer draft.......................................7-23 trouble codes........................................12-30

IN-5
 INDEX

Z
Zero line .................................................. 7-25
Zoom display............................................. 8-8
Zoom display selection (fish finder)........... 7-4
Zoom reference lines .............................. 7-22

IN-6
Declaration of Conformity
[TZT12F/TZT16F/TZT19F]
Bulgarian ɋ ɧɚɫɬɨɹɳɨɬɨ Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. ɞɟɤɥɚɪɢɪɚ, ɱɟ ɝɨɪɟɫɩɨɦɟɧɚɬ ɬɢɩ
(BG) ɪɚɞɢɨɫɴɨɪɴɠɟɧɢɟ ɟ ɜ ɫɴɨɬɜɟɬɫɬɜɢɟ ɫ Ⱦɢɪɟɤɬɢɜɚ 2014/53/ȿɋ.
ɐɹɥɨɫɬɧɢɹɬ ɬɟɤɫɬ ɧɚ ȿɋ ɞɟɤɥɚɪɚɰɢɹɬɚ ɡɚ ɫɴɨɬɜɟɬɫɬɜɢɟ ɦɨɠɟ ɞɚ ɫɟ ɧɚɦɟɪɢ
ɧɚ ɫɥɟɞɧɢɹ ɢɧɬɟɪɧɟɬ ɚɞɪɟɫ:

Spanish Por la presente, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. declara que el tipo de equipo
(ES) radioeléctrico arriba mencionado es conforme con la Directiva 2014/53/UE.
El texto completo de la declaración UE de conformidad está disponible en la
dirección Internet siguiente:

Czech Tímto Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. prohlašuje, že výše zmínČné typ rádiového
(CS) zaĜízení je v souladu se smČrnicí 2014/53/EU.
Úplné znČní EU prohlášení o shodČ je k dispozici na této internetové adrese:

Danish Hermed erklærer Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., at ovennævnte radioudstyr er i

(DA) overensstemmelse med direktiv 2014/53/EU.
EU-overensstemmelseserklæringens fulde tekst kan findes på følgende
internetadresse:

German Hiermit erklärt die Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., dass der oben genannte
(DE) Funkanlagentyp der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU entspricht.
Der vollständige Text der EU-Konformitätserklärung ist unter der folgenden
Internetadresse verfügbar:
Estonian Käesolevaga deklareerib Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., et ülalmainitud raadioseadme
(ET) tüüp vastab direktiivi 2014/53/EL nõuetele.
ELi vastavusdeklaratsiooni täielik tekst on kättesaadav järgmisel
internetiaadressil:
Greek Ȃİ IJȘȞ ʌĮȡȠȪıĮ Ș Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., įȘȜȫȞİȚ ȩIJȚ Ƞ ʌȡȠĮȞĮijİȡșȑȞIJĮȢ
(EL) ȡĮįȚȠİȟȠʌȜȚıȝȩȢ ʌȜȘȡȠȓ IJȘȞ ȠįȘȖȓĮ 2014/53/ǼǼ.
ȉȠ ʌȜȒȡİȢ țİȓȝİȞȠ IJȘȢ įȒȜȦıȘȢ ıȣȝȝȩȡijȦıȘȢ ǼǼ įȚĮIJȓșİIJĮȚ ıIJȘȞ ĮțȩȜȠȣșȘ
ȚıIJȠıİȜȓįĮ ıIJȠ įȚĮįȓțIJȣȠ:
English Hereby, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. declares that the above-mentioned radio
(EN) equipment type is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following
internet address:
French Le soussigné, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., déclare que l'équipement radioélectrique
(FR) du type mentionné ci-dessusest conforme à la directive 2014/53/UE.
Le texte complet de la déclaration UE de conformité est disponible à l'adresse
internet suivante:
Croatian Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. ovime izjavljuje da je gore reþeno radijska oprema tipa
(HR) u skladu s Direktivom 2014/53/EU.
Cjeloviti tekst EU izjave o sukladnosti dostupan je na sljedeüoj internetskoj
adresi:
Italian Il fabbricante, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., dichiara che il tipo di apparecchiatura
(IT) radio menzionato sopra è conforme alla direttiva 2014/53/UE.
Il testo completo della dichiarazione di conformità UE è disponibile al seguente
indirizzo Internet:
Latvian Ar šo Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. deklarƝ, ka augstƗk minƝts radioiekƗrta atbilst
(LV) DirektƯvai 2014/53/ES.
Pilns ES atbilstƯbas deklarƗcijas teksts ir pieejams šƗdƗ interneta vietnƝ:
Lithuanian Aš, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., patvirtinu, kad pirmiau minơta radijo Ƴrenginiǐ tipas
(LT) atitinka Direktyvą 2014/53/ES.
Visas ES atitikties deklaracijos tekstas prieinamas šiuo interneto adresu:

Hungarian Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. igazolja, hogy fent említett típusú rádióberendezés
(HU) megfelel a 2014/53/EU irányelvnek.
Az EU-megfelelĘségi nyilatkozat teljes szövege elérhetĘ a következĘ internetes
címen:
Maltese B'dan, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., niddikjara li msemmija hawn fuq-tip ta' tag㾲mir
(MT) tar-radju huwa konformi mad-Direttiva 2014/53/UE.
It-test kollu tad-dikjarazzjoni ta' konformità tal-UE huwa disponibbli f'dan l-indirizz
tal-Internet li 㾬ej:
Dutch Hierbij verklaar ik, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd., dat het hierboven genoemde type
(NL) radioapparatuur conform is met Richtlijn 2014/53/EU.
De volledige tekst van de EU-conformiteitsverklaring kan worden geraadpleegd
op het volgende internetadres:
Polish Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. niniejszym oĞwiadcza, Īe wyĪej wymieniony typ
(PL) urządzenia radiowego jest zgodny z dyrektywą 2014/53/UE.
Peány tekst deklaracji zgodnoĞci UE jest dostĊpny pod nastĊpującym adresem
internetowym:

Portuguese O(a) abaixo assinado(a) Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. declara que o mencionado
(PT) acima tipo de equipamento de rádio está em conformidade com a Diretiva
2014/53/UE.
O texto integral da declaração de conformidade está disponível no seguinte
endereço de Internet:
Romanian Prin prezenta, Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. declară că men‫܊‬ionat mai sus tipul de
(RO) echipamente radio este în conformitate cu Directiva 2014/53/UE.
Textul integral al declara‫܊‬iei UE de conformitate este disponibil la următoarea
adresă internet:
Slovak Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. týmto vyhlasuje, že vyššie spomínané rádiové
(SK) zariadenie typu je v súlade so smernicou 2014/53/EÚ.
Úplné EÚ vyhlásenie o zhode je k dispozícii na tejto internetovej adrese:
Slovenian Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. potrjuje, da je zgoraj omenjeno tip radijske opreme
(SL) skladen z Direktivo 2014/53/EU.
Celotno besedilo izjave EU o skladnosti je na voljo na naslednjem spletnem
naslovu:
Finnish Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. vakuuttaa, että yllä mainittu radiolaitetyyppi on
(FI) direktiivin 2014/53/EU mukainen.
EU-vaatimustenmukaisuusvakuutuksen täysimittainen teksti on saatavilla
seuraavassa internetosoitteessa:
Swedish Härmed försäkrar Furuno Electric Co., Ltd. att ovan nämnda typ av
(SV) radioutrustning överensstämmer med direktiv 2014/53/EU.
Den fullständiga texten till EU-försäkran om överensstämmelse finns på
följande webbadress:

Online Resource
[Link]